Home

JBL CVPD50 User's Manual

1. fa en i a N JBL CVR700R1 Figure 120 Programmed Device Functions Once the secondary remote has been pro grammed for the codes of other devices press the appropriate Input Selector A A to switch the remote to control the audio section of the CVR700 System Selector A the CVPD50 screen Screen Selector Ay the internal DVD CD changer of the CVR700 DVD Selector A or to control additional products When you press any one of the selectors it will briefly flash in red to indi cate that you have changed the device being controlled When operating a device other than the CVR700 the controls may not correspond exactly to the function printed on the remote or button Some commands such as the volume control are the same as they are with the CVR700 Other buttons will change their function so that they correspond to a secondary label on the remote For example the Numeric Keys Ay are used to access various functions of the CVR700 s audio section such as selecting surround modes or setting the sleep timer However in DVD mode these buttons are used as numbers to access various items such as track numbers and time search For some products however the function of a particular button does not follow the command printed on the remote In order to see which function a button controls consult the Function List tables on pages 96 97 To use those tables
2. Volume Punch Through Follow these steps to enable the Volume Up Down and Mute controls from one device to be used when the remote is otherwise programmed for a different device NOTE FOR VOLUME PUNCH THROUGH The remote s default settings are for the CVR700 s volume controls to be used when any input or device is selected with the exception of the Game Cam button There is no need to program the remote for volume punch through for the CVR700 s controls with other sources such as DVD To have the CVR700 s volume commands used when the Game Cam device is selected follow these steps 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button f3 for about three seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the Navigation Button f until PUNCH THROUGH appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 88 Press the Set Button to enter the main punch through menu branch MAIN MENU PUNCH THROUGH a Figure 88 3 At the next menu screen Figure 89 press the Set Button to begin programming the remote for Volume punch through PUNCH THROUGH VOLUME A Figure 89 4 The next display screen Figure 90 is where you sel
3. As instructed on the next menu screen press the Navigation Button to begin the automatic code search process Your confirma tion that the remote is sending out commands is the movement of a square block across the top line of the LCD display screen while the bot tom line reads PLEASE WAIT You will also see the transmit icon in the upper right corner of the LCD dis play s top line to remind you that the remote is working even though you may not see anything happening to he device being programmed ct It will take a few seconds for the remote to send out the first group of commands after which you will see a new display in the LCD screen as shown in Figure 63 Following the instructions if the device being pro grammed has not turned off press the A Navigation Button f2 again to send another group of codes see Step 9 If the device being programmed has turned off press either the 1 or 0 key and skip to Step 10 POWER OFF gt 1 8 N gt A Figure 63 By pressing the Navigation Button again the remote will send out a new set of commands When it pauses follow the instruc tions shown in Step 8 Depending on how many codes are stored for a specific device type you may have to repeat this process as many as 15 times Remember if the device turns off skip to Step 10 When all the codes for the device being pro grammed have been tried the instruction shown in
4. SPEAKERS xx ARE YOU SURE YOU UANT TO CHANGE SPEAKER SETTINGS ET ALL SPEAKERS NO gt YES RES TO FACTORY SETTINGS Figure 19 SPEAKERS p CONFIGURATION CROSSOVERS DISTANCES LEVELS BACK TO MAIN MENU Figure 20 SPEAKER CONFIGURATION AND BASS MANAGER gt BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU Figure 21 Configuring Speaker Sizes The first step is to configure speaker sizes You may skip this step if you are using JBL Cinema Vision speakers at all positions If you are using other model or brand loud speakers you should NOT skip this menu Scroll to the CONFIGURATION line and select it to display the SPEAKER CONFIGURATION AND BASS MANAGER submenu Figure 21 For each of these settings use the LARGE setting if the speakers for a particular position are traditional full range loud speakers Use the SMALL setting for smaller frequency limited satellite speak ers that do not reproduce sounds below 200Hz Note that when small speakers are used a subwoofer is required to reproduce low frequency sounds Remember that the large and small descriptions do not refer to the actual physical size of the speakers but to their ability to reproduce low frequency sounds If you are in doubt as to which category describes your speakers consult the specifications in the speakers owners manual or ask your dealer The factory default sets all channels to SMALL except for the
5. Volume Default As is the case with most audio video receivers when the CVR700 is turned on it will always return to the volume setting in effect when the unit was turned off However you may prefer to always have the CVR700 turn on at a specific setting regardless of what was last in use when the unit was turned off The VOLUME DEFAULT feature may be turned on or off The factory default setting is OFF To set the feature first turn the OSD sys tem off and adjust the system volume to the desired default turn on level This level will be displayed on the front panel as a negative offset from the reference volume of OdB which is the system maxi mum For example you may find a level of 25dB to be a comfortable default turn on volume Make a note of this num ber as you will not be able to adjust the volume from within the ADVANCED SETTINGS submenu Next press the OSD Button to display the MAIN MENU and then scroll to the ADVANCED line and select it to display the ADVANCED SETTINGS submenu Figure 29 Scroll down to the VOLUME DEFAULT line and set it to ON Scroll down one more line to the V 0 L DEFAULT LEVEL line and use the Navigation Controls A A to select the setting you chose above as a comfortable default turn on volume Press the Set Button A to enter your selection into memory Your setting will be retained even after the unit is pow ered off Main Menu Time 0ut The 0SD menu system is
6. Optical Digital Audio Output Connect this jack to the optical digital input connector on a DVD R RW DVD R RW CD R RW MiniDisc or other com patible digital recorder Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio Inputs Connect the optical digital output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing audio files or streams LD player or CD player to these jacks The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal a DTS signal or standard PCM digital source This input is permanently assigned to the Auxiliary source input Cable Satellite Optical Digital Audio Input Connect the optical digital audio output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compati ble computer sound card playing audio files or streams LD player or CD player to this jack The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to this jack This input is permanently assigned to the Cable Satellite source input 1 Digital Recorder Optical Digital Audio Input Connect the optical digital audio output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compati ble computer sound card playing audio files or streams LD player or CD player to this jack The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to this jack Thi
7. See page 64 for more information on using the tuner When an optical player source such as the internal DVD changer is in use press this button to search quickly in reverse through the current track or chapter Depending on the type of disc used in the internal DVD changer each additional press will cycle through the available scan speeds as follows available scan speeds may differ for external optical source devices DVD Audio and DVD Video discs 2x 4x 16x 100x CD and VCD discs 2x 4x 8x MP3 and WMA discs 2x 4x 8x 16x See page 68 for more information on using the internal DVD changer trans port controls Record Stop Pause Transport Controls These buttons have no func tion in the System or Screen modes but are used with sources such as the inter nal disc changer or external DVD or CD players tape or digital recorders or VCRs When the internal disc changer is in use pressing the Stop button once will place a DVD in resume mode meaning that you may press the Play Button to con tinue playing the disc from the point where it was stopped If you press the Stop button twice play will resume from the beginning of the disc Pressing the Pause Button X will pause play allowing you to step frame by frame for ward through a DVD with each additional press of the Pause Button 2 Press the Play Button to resume normal play or press the Stop Button X to Stop Status Settings Butt
8. Navigation Button until PUNCH THROUGH appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 88 Press the Set Button to enter the main punch through menu branch 3 At the next menu screen press the A Y Navigation Button 2 unti CHAHHEL appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 94 Press the Set Button to begin programming the remote for channel punch through PUNCH THROUGH CHANNEL i Figure 94 4 The next display screen Figure 95 is where you select the device that will receive the punch through commands In our example that is the VCR button as that is where we want the cable 83 84 box s channel controls to be active Press the A V Navigation Button until the name of the base device appears and then press the Set Button DEUICE IN USE M DUD A Figure 95 At the next display screen Fig 96 you will select the device whose Channel Up Down commands will be used Press the A V Navigation Button until the desired device name appears to the right of the device in use In our example that is the cable box When the desired com bination of devices appears press the Set Button PUNCH THROUGH YCR lt M OUD A Figure 96 6 When the Set button is pressed the display will change to show you that the new combination of control com mands is being saved to the unit s memory as shown in Figure 97 The word SAWED will
9. e Auto Setup This initiates the process of detecting the incoming video signal and adjusting the horizontal and vertical position and size of the display e Horizontal Position This temperature bar reflects the hori zontal positioning of the image on screen When the dark square is com pletely to the left the image is moved as far to the left side of the screen as mage that is too small in size to be view 55 56 possible and the numerical value is 0 Use the lt gt Navigation Controls A to adjust the position of the image if it is not initially centered on he screen e Vertical Position This emperature bar reflects the vertical positioning of the image on screen When the dark square is completelv to he left the image is moved as far to he bottom of the screen as possible and the numerical value is 0 Use the lt gt Navigation Controls A 0 adjust the position of the image if it is not initially centered on the screen e Horizontal Total This emperature bar reflects the horizontal size of the displaved image When the grav square is completelv to the left and the numerical value is 0 the image is at maximum width Use the lt p gt Navigation Controls A to adjust the width of the image until it fills the screen e Vertical Resolution This temperature bar reflects the verti cal size of the displaved image in terms of the number of pixels used When the grav square is completelv to th
10. A B Auto Button This button s function differs depending on whether the internal disc changer DVD Main mode or the Screen mode is active To use this button be careful to press only on the lower portion of the button as other functions are accessed by pressing on the upper portion of the button In the DVD mode press this button once to select the beginning point and again to select the end point B of a pas sage you wish to play repeatedly Press the button again to end repeat playback A B repeat play is not available for VCD MP3 WMA or JPEG discs In the Screen mode this button selects automatic detection of the aspect ratio of program material from external sources with playback in the 16 9 format It will display 4 3 images stretched to fill the 16 9 screen This function is not available with HD 480p or better signals If the 4 3 image is in letterbox format with bars at the top and bottom of the screen those bars will remain See pages 13 and 27 for more information on configuring aspect ratios 22 Program PVR Replay Button In the DVD Main mode press this button to access the screen for programming playlists When a PVR personal video recorder is in use press this button for replay of recorded materials Refer to your PVR s owner s manual for more information Disc Skip PVR List Button In the DVD Main mode press this button to begin play of the next available disc in the changer
11. Ay until the informa tion display returns to normal brightness the Sleep indicator numbers will disap pear and the words SLEEP OFF will appear in the Lower Display Line When vou will be awav from home for an extended period of time it is alwavs a good idea to completelv turn the unit off bv unplugging the CVR700 and switching off the master power switch located on the underside of the CVPD50 next to the power plug NOTE Preset memories should be retained indefinitelv Source Selection e To select a source press anv of the Input Selector Buttons A e The input source mav also be changed by slowly rotating the front panel Input Source Selector F4 Each step which vou mav feel as a tactile detent or click will move the input selection through the available inputs As the input is changed the CVR700 will automaticallv switch to the digital input if selected surround mode speaker configuration and night mode status that were entered during the configuration process for that source The Front Panel Audio Video Inputs WJ may be used to temporarily con nect a device such as a video game or camcorder to your home entertainment System This source is called the Game Cam input source on the remote controls and in the CVR700 s menu system As the input source is changed the new input name will appear momentar ily as an on screen banner display along with the audio input and video screen format The
12. For external sources you may assign a digital audio input by scrolling to the AUDIO INPUT line and selecting from the analog audio input or the coaxial or optical digital audio input assigned to that source see Figures 12 and 13 This selection is not available for the internal DVD CD changer which internally passes its digital audio signal directly to the audio section of the CVR700 SOURCES x p SOURCE GAME CAMERA AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AUDIO MODE LOGIC TYPE ROVTE 7 1 NIGHT MODE N A VIDEO INPUT COMPOSITE SOURCE A R 1b 9 RESET TO FACTORY SETTING BACK TO MAIN MENU Figure 12 AUDIO INPUTX ANALOG OPTICAL DIGITAL COAXIAL DIGITAL BACK TO SOURCES MENU Figure 13 For most sources you will want to assign a default surround audio mode Refer to the chart on page 62 for descriptions of each available surround mode You may temporarily change the audio mode assignments at any time during playback using the remote control It is recom mended that for initial setup you select Dolby Digital for digital audio sources and Logic 7 for analog sources The internal DVD CD changer enables you to program an audio mode for each type of disc thus empowering you to choose two channel stereo reproduction for older two channel CD recordings Dolby Digital for video DVDs and Logic 7 matrix surround processing for analog Video CD programs With the SOURCES menu on screen and the DVD CD changer source select
13. It is important to make sure that the CVR700 is correctly configured for your speakers so that low frequency portions of the audio program will be steered to the appropriate loudspeakers this is called bass management Speaker con figuration also ensures that there are no time delay artifacts caused by the speak ers being placed at varying distances from the listening position And it is in this section that the output levels are adjusted to ensure that all speaker chan nels are balanced preserving the direc tionality and dynamism of the original recording If you are using JBL Cinema Vision loud speakers you will be able to skip some of these settings as the CVR700 has been preprogrammed at the factory to accommodate your speakers However you will need to program the distances and speaker output levels to conform to your specific listening room With the MAIN MENU Figure 6 on screen scroll to the SPEAKERS line and select it and the confirmation screen Figure 19 will appear allowing you an opportunity to retain the previous set tings Note that the RESET line indi cates that all sources will have their speaker settings reset if you choose the reset option Speaker settings are global and only need to be set once unless you change the BASS MGR line in the SPEAKER CONFIGURATION submenu Fig 21 to INDEPENDENT Select Y ES to change the speaker set tings and continue to the SPEAKERS submenu Figure 20
14. SPEAKER CROSSOVERS RESET THESE SETTINGS BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU Figure 22 Speaker Distances Due to the different distances between the listening position and each speaker position the amount of time it takes for sound to reach your ears from each chan nel is different You may compensate for this difference through the use of the dis tance settings to adjust the timing for the speaker placement and acoustic condi tions in your listening room or home the ater The CVR700 s advanced software enables you to quickly and easily set delay times without the need to calculate them using a complex formula Instead all you need to do is measure the approx imate distance between your listening position and each of the speakers in your system When you enter those distances into the CVR700 s memory as shown below the CVR700 s microprocessor does the rest of the work calculating the proper delay time The measurements need not be accurate to the inch as the system is designed to accommodate a typical lis tening area rather than require the pre cise measurement to one sweet spot position Due to the differences between the way surround modes operate some modes allow for a greater range of delay times than others To avoid problems we rec ommend that delay times be adjusted using the Dolby Digital mode It may be necessary to play a Dolby Digital disc so that the CVR700 can process the signal and make
15. dp 0 d eunjoA dn SWNJOA dn n Jeg aS U89 9S 99 usos jeg U JI U II jegueej g jag U99 9S jeg U II 198 U II jegueejg J U II U II jeg 99125 95 U88 9S U88J9S 9z Jes Jayndwo jag 19NAWOJ leg JaSJAJNAWO Jes Jeg1ejnduo Jeg1ejnduo jes jesgjemduo Gs Jegieynduio as Jes Jeyndwo9 8S 8S 8S ANI ANI jenduog Aq AG Jayndwog iAG IAG 3emduoj Q Jemduo g emduo g Jewduop Aq JAQ Jeynduoj Aq jeiduo Ag JAMAWOQ JAQ 9 195 ua 195 ua 195 195 195 ua 195 les 195 195 les 195 ua les ua 195 ud 195 195 ua 195 ud 195 ud u 195 95 195 195 95 195 95 95 95 95 WED 95 85 85 les 85 98 85 weg awen wej awey weg aweg uiej eule weg awen uiej euer weg aweg sues weg aweg weg awen wej ewey ulej euer weg aweg 7 wey awey z Ae dsiq as0 aso JSEJUO 080 0N 9 9j kejdsiq e 080 19100 K N aso 11910 080 080 080 9 5 0 050 ZA dee s 8uo dwaj 1009 xe 1817 9 umu 1p3 E kejdsig je deu alg SI deals 8u0 1817 9 20107 900 pn np ss uluBug SAMA MOpuM v lt 12910 x9el Iq seg uwwseyv ubug emg 02 83uejsi 9j sbumas QAL OAL PJ009H JEJMIEN X 08pIA 150 150 150 92UE15IQ SUM8S 1S0 6 UMOQ UMOQ uone
16. tem such as a VCR personal video recorder PVR or other devices The main remote control is easy to program using its two line LCD text display A second simplified remote is also included Simple to Install and Use The JBL Cinema Vision system is designed for easy installation and simple operation Its sophisticated processing capabilities operate automatically trans parent to the user The JBL On Screen Library display of loaded discs simplifies navigation and selection of desired pro gram material With state of the art audio and video components the JBL Cinema Vision home theater system is the perfect combination of the latest digi tal audio and video technologies in an elegant easy to use package m 50 True high definition plasma display with ultrawide viewing angle m 3 000 1 contrast ratio and 1 000cd m brightness m 7 x 100W digital control center with an audio video receiver video proces sor and DVD changer m wide range of digital and matrix sur round modes including Dolby Digital Dolby Digital EX Dolby Pro Logic II and Ilx DTS DTS ES Discrete and Matrix DTS 96 24 DTS Neo 6 Logic 7 5 1 and 7 1 Cinema and Music modes Seven channels of amplification Internal five disc changer plays DVD Audio DVD Video CD VCD CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R RW MP3 WMA Kodak Picture CD and JPEG discs Extensive bass management options including quadruple crossover and EzSet output leve
17. 3 disc 12cm 5 disc 12cm 5 disc The CVR700 will also play most DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R or DVD RW blank discs but we cannot guar antee complete playback compatibility of DVD recordable discs due to the wide variation in recorders and blank discs ae aise cise DIGITAL AUDIO MSG MISE ReWritable COMPACT COMPACT 00910 2096 ReWritable CD RW CD R VCD 12cm 5 3 8cm 3 12cm 5 12 5 NOTE Playback of CD R CD RW discs created on a computer requires proper formatting and finalization of the disc for audio playback Some computers and or software programs may not be capable of creating compatible discs DVD Video Disc Compatibility e 8cm 3 or 12cm 5 discs e Single sided or double sided discs e Single layer or dual layer discs Dolby Digital DTS MPEG or Linear PCM digital audio tracks e MPEG 2 digital video Discs are generally divided into one or more titles which may be further sub divided into chapters DVD Audio Disc Compatibility e 8cm 3 or 12cm 5 discs Single sided discs e Single layer or dual layer discs e Linear or packed PCM digital audio e Some discs may contain MPEG 2 video and Dolby Digital DTS or MPEG digital audio Discs are generally divided into one or more groups which may be further subdivided into tracks Audio CD Compatibility e 8cm 3 or 12cm 5 discs e Linear PCM digital audio e Audio CDs are d
18. 31 34 46 47 60 63 Surround Off 30 34 62 S Video 21 22 47 56 System Configuration 45 58 System Menu 46 Technical Specifications 111 112 Theater 25 34 62 Tone Controls 26 37 59 Trademark Acknowledgements 114 Transport Controls 17 26 27 28 29 30 34 35 36 37 67 68 Transport Control Punch Through 84 95 Troubleshooting Guide 109 110 Tuner Mode 16 17 26 27 29 34 36 64 Tuner Operation 64 Turn On Volume Level 52 53 TV 98 99 Typographical Conventions 3 Unpacking 7 9 VCR 21 44 76 101 102 Video Equipment Connections 21 23 43 44 Video Monitor 22 54 Video Off 29 35 40 41 71 Volume Control 18 26 34 52 53 59 Volume Default 52 53 Volume Punch Through 83 94 WMA 12 15 63 66 69 72 73 113 114 Depth measurement includes knobs and connectors Height measurement includes feet and chassis All specifications subject to change without notice JBL and Logic 7 are registered trademarks and J trademarks of Harman International Industries BL Cinema Vision JBL Digital Link and On Screen Library patent pending are ncorporated Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Confidential Unpublished Works Confidential 1992 1997 Dolby Laboratories All r DTS DTS 96 24 DTE ES and DTS Neo 6 are regi ights reserved stered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows
19. Press this button to momentarily silence the CVR700 Press it again or use the Volume Up Down Control to restore audio D EzSet Microphone Sensor The microphone sensor that is used by the EzSet system is behind the three slots at the top of the remote control When using EzSet to calibrate the CVR700 be certain that the slots are not covered See page 51 for more information on EzSet oy om B IR Transmitter Receiver The infrared emitters and receivers behind the plastic lens at the top of the remote communicate the remote codes to the CVR700 and other programmed devices Be certain that the lens is not covered when using the remote and point the lens toward the CVR700 for the best results In learning mode the remote receives IR codes to be learned through a receiver behind the lens See page 78 for more information on learning remote codes NOTE DO NOT remove the rubber plug that is supplied to cover the jack on the upper right side of the remote The jack is not active and is reserved for future use 31 CVR7OOR1 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS The CVR700R1 remote is capable of performing most of the same functions as the CVR700R2 remote control which is intended mainly for system setup but is smaller and easier to handle on a day to day basis The most noticeable functions missing from the CVR700R1 remote are the LCD information screen and the EzSet speaker calibration function As it is a programmable l
20. Pressing and holding this button for sev eral seconds causes the main source to appear in the PIP inset display and the PIP source to appear in the main display Pressing and holding the button again returns the PIP source to the inset and the main source to the main display 4h Auto PIP Channel Up Button In the Screen mode this button selects automatic detection of the aspect ratio of program material with playback in the 16 9 format inserting black bars on the right and left sides as required for 4 3 images unless you have configured your System to display 4 3 images stretched to fill the 16 9 screen This function is not available with HD 480p or better signals See pages 13 and 27 for more information on configuring aspect ratios When used with a PIP capable device whose composite video output has been connected to the Picture in Picture Composite Video Input pressing this button changes the channel of the PIP device to the next higher one It has no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50 Ay Learn Screen Standby PIP Channel Down Button Press this but ton to begin the process of learning the codes from another product s remote into the CVR700 secondary remote See page 93 for more information on using the remote learning function When used in the Screen mode this but ton places the CVPD50 display in Standby mode without affecting use of the CVR700 This function may be preferred for audio only listenin
21. VCR Combo DVD CD CABLE SAT VCR VCR Combo CBL SAT CABLE SAT HD Tuner GAME GAME CAMCORDER CAM DR DVDR CDR DVHS TIVO PVR DVI DVI DVD DVI CABLE COMP HD Tuner The analog and digital audio connec tions as well as the composite S video and component video connec tions are dedicated to each source input as labeled and may not be reas signed to another source Be certain to make all of the connections for each source device to the correct jacks Cable Satellite Source Input Since the JBL Cinema Vision system does not include a TV tuner you may wish to connect a cable TV box satellite TV receiver HDTV set top tuner or another device capable of receiving TV broad casts to the CVR700 This device should be connected to the Cable Sat source input jacks Select either the Cable Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio Input B or the Cable Satellite Optical Digital Audio Input for your digital audio connection If desired connect the analog audio outputs of the component to the Cable Satellite Analog Audio Inputs If available connect the com ponent video outputs of your device to the Cable Satellite Component Video Inputs B Otherwise connect either an S video or composite video output from the component to the Cable Satellite Analog Video Inputs B NOTE When using a source connected via the Cable Satellite Component Video Inputs due to limitations in the CVR7
22. When the Sleep timer is in use the front panel displays and other indicators will dim to half brightness WI Front Panel Audio Video Inputs KE Headphone Jack WA Front Panel Door Kl Display Dimmer Press this button to reduce the brightness of the Information Display J by 50 or to turn the dis play off completely in the following order FULL BRIGHTNESS HALF BRIGHTNESS gt OFF gt FULL BRIGHTNESS Disc Drawer This drawer is used to access the five disc magazine changer While a disc is playing you may load a disc into or remove a disc from another location in the changer If you select the current disc it will first stop playing Seat all discs carefully within the recess in the drawer Do not press down on the drawer when it is open to avoid damage to the player It is also best to open and close the drawer by pressing the Eject Button 3 rather than by pushing the drawer itself Disc Selector Press one of these buttons when prompted by a message on the Lower Display Line H and on the CVPD50 screen for a disc number after pressing the Eject Button 3 If you have selected the internal disc changer as the source device using the Source Selector or by pressing the DVD Input Selector A on either remote control and then pressed the Play Button I or Disc Direct Button 79 A the CVR700 will prompt you to enter a disc number by pressing one of these buttons 3 Tuning Mode Eject Button Th
23. but not for 6 1 channels When 6 1 chan nel program material or a 6 1 channel processing mode is in use material for the surround back channel will be out putted simultaneously through both the Back Surround Left and Right Speaker Outputs Connecting only one loudspeaker to these speaker termi nals will not only deprive you of the ben efits of 7 1 channel surround modes such as Logic 7 but will also interfere with the functioning of EzSet speaker calibration as described on page 51 It may also put undesirable strain on the surround back amplifier circuits and power supplies Connections to a subwoofer are normally made via a line level audio connection from the Subwoofer Output to the line level input of a subwoofer with a built in amplifier Speaker Placement Front Speakers Center Channel Speaker Subwoofer o Surround Speakers Alternate placement for surround speak ers when only 5 1 channels are used required placement for back surround speakers in 7 1 channel systems The front speakers should be placed the same distance from each other as they are from the listening position They should be placed at about the same height from the floor as the listeners ears wil
24. device will be turned on and the play command will be transmitted to it Press and hold the DR Digital Recorder Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the DR inputs If you have programmed the DR s remote control codes the device will be turned on and the play com mand will be transmitted to it Press and hold the AUX Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the AUX inputs If you have programmed the device s remote control codes the device will be turned on and the play command will be transmitted to it e em rh Press and hold the Game Cam Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the Game Cam inputs If you have programmed the device s remote control codes the play command will be transmitted to it Note that for video game consoles and cam corders there are no power on or off commands Therefore only the Play command or start stop command for camcorders will be transmitted Press and hold the DVI Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the DVI inputs If you have programmed the device s remote control codes the device will be turned on and the play command will be trans mitted to it 3 The PIP Swap Button 6 is activated while in screen mode by pressing and holding that button until the video source in the picture in picture frame swaps position with the
25. except the subwoofer toward the listening position at about ear level height The low frequency material reproduced by the subwoofer is mostly omnidirectional and this speaker may be placed in a con venient location in the room However bass reproduction will be maximized when the subwoofer is placed in a corner along the same wall as the front speakers Experiment with subwoofer placement by temporarily placing the subwoofer in the listening position and moving around the room until the bass reproduction is best Place the subwoofer in that location Step Two Thanks to its sophisticated video processor the CVR700 is able to upconvert composite S video and compo nent video source signals for a single cable connection to the screen Connect the included proprietary JBL Digital Link cable to the Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 Screen on the back of the CVR700 and to the digital input on the underside of the CVPD50 The connec tor is located on the right side of the screen when facing it You may wish to use a mirror to assist you in orienting the cable connector correctly Note that this cable uses a proprietary system and should not be connected to any display device other than the CVPD50 The jack for the AC power cord is located on the left side of the CVPD50 Make sure the master power switch next to the jack is in the 0 position before plugging in the AC power cord Again a mirror may be helpful in loc
26. first check the type of device being controlled e g TV VCR Next look at the remote control diagram in Figure 120 Note that each button has a number on it To find out what function a particular but ton has for a specific device find the but ton number on the Function List and then look in the column for the device you are controlling For example button number 45 is the Night Mode button for the CVR700 s audio sectioin but it is the Number 9 button for most other prod ucts Button number 31 is the Volume Down button for the CVR700 and most products the Scan Down button for video games and the Zoom Out button for cam corders NOTE The numbers used to describe the button functions in Figure 120 for the purposes of describing how a button operates are a different set of numbers than those used in the rest of this manual to describe the button functions for the CVR700 Notes on Using the Secondary Remote With Other Devices Manufacturers may use different code sets for the same product category For that reason it is important that you check to see whether the code set you have entered operates as many controls as possible If it appears that only a few functions operate check to see whether another code set will work with more buttons When a button is pressed on the sec ondary remote the red light under the Input Selector A A for the prod uct being operated should flash briefly If the Devic
27. is the case we suggest that you press the Set Button to accept the codes from another brand so that the programming is completed but remember that you will then have to program the remote manually by fol lowing the Learning Commands instructions on page 78 When the device being programmed does turn off after a numeric key has been pressed you must press the Set Button within five seconds to enter the setting into the remote s memory After you press the Set but ton the top line of the LCD display will read SAWING and then the word SAVED will flash four times in the center of the bottom line When the codes are saved the remote will return to normal operation and whenever you press the Input Selector Button that was just programmed the display will show the original device type code at the far left side of the display with the name of the new code set type in brackets For example the display will read TIUG UCR in our exam ple of replacing the TiVo codes with those for a VCR Macro Programming Macros enable you to easily repeat fre quently used combinations of multiple remote control commands with the touch of a single button Once a macro is pro grammed you may send up to 20 com mands with one press of the Power On or Macro buttons This will greatly simplify the process of turning on your system changing devices or other common tasks Thanks to the remote s two line display it is easier
28. ney uonebiaey uonebiaey uoneBieN uone ey 8 jaoueg ixy oou Jo9ueg uxj JSJUEJAINXI ux J99UEJ yx Jooueg uxj gt 1e9 1e9 JDUB jeouegAxj JSVLEJAI j99UE9 41X4 1 yBly yBly u u yoy yty yBly u u uoneBiNeN uonebiaey uolebiae uoneBiweN UOHeBIAPN uoneBieeN UOIEBIABN uoneBieN uoneBi eN uone ey 9 195 9 UJ y0 18 8S 198 8S 199 98 9 UJ 1999 91u3 9 uq au 195 195 195 q Ye ya 19 Ye ye 19 Ye Ye 19 19 Ye ya 19 19 Ye uoneBieeN uongee uonebiaey uoneBiAe uoneBiweN uoneBieN uoneBi e mey uoneBieN uoneBneN uoneDieeN uoneBineN uoneBi eN Y ua nua oipny nual 0Ju nu 0juj nua nua nua Xapul JENSIA nua nua nua nua nua nua nua jnduj olpny ojuj nuayy dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn dn uoneBieeN uoneBiAe uoneBiweN uoneBieeN uonebiney uoneBiaeN uoneBiew uoneBiew uoneDieN uoneBineN 11e DIEN dn uonebiaen 7 9 aping aping aping p ng X J
29. of the device appears on the remote s LCD display so that you see exactly which commands are being sent NOTE You may not change the device types for the DVD MAIN device CVR700 s internal DVD CD changer the FM AM TUNER device the SCREEN device controls CVPD50 functions or the SYSTEM device controls CVR700 s receiver functions To program the buttons normally assigned to one device for the commands of another follow these steps 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button f for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the A Navigation Button until CHANGE DEUICE appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 75 Press the Set Button to begin the process of reassigning the commands used for a particular device MAIM MEHU CHANGE DEUICE A Figure 75 3 Next you will select the Input Selector for the device that you wish to change When the display shown in Figure 76 appears press the Navigation Button 8 to scroll through the list to find the device you wish to use for another function In this case we will select TIVO and show how to change it to take on the codes for operating a
30. the Auto Stereo mode press and hold the button to cause the tuner to scan for the next higher station with acceptable signal strength and stop The Lower Display Line will indicate AUTO TUNE D When an FM Stereo station is tuned the display will read AUTO ST TUNED When the tuner is in Manual Mono mode you may press and hold this button to scan upward through the fre quencies and the tuner will stop immedi ately when you release this button even if no acceptable signal is detected at that frequency See page 64 for more informa tion on using the tuner 29 30 When an optical player source such as the internal DVD changer is in use press this button to search quickly forward through the current track or chapter Depending on the type of disc used in the internal DVD changer each additional press will cycle through the available scan speeds as follows available scan speeds may differ for external optical source devices DVD Audio and DVD Video discs 2x 4x 16x 100x CD and VCD discs 2x 4x 8x MP3 and WMA discs 2x 4x 8x 16x See page 68 for more information on using the internal DVD changer trans port controls Channel Slow Play Up Down Control These controls use the lt p gt icons on the same disc as the Volume Up Down Controls The left and right arrows have different functions depending on the source in use When a disc containing JPEG still images is being played using an
31. the device turns off If the device still does not turn off after all choices have been tried or if there is only one number key shown as available to try the code for this specific device is not in the remote library under that brand name If that is the case press the Exit Cancel Button to exit the manual programming mode Remember that the codes may still be stored in the remote s library under another brand and you can have the remote control search for them by fol lowing the instructions below for automatic programming You may also manually learn the codes for most devices into the remote by fol lowing the Learning Commands instructions on page 78 11 When the device being programmed does turn off after a numeric key has been pressed you must press the Set Button within five seconds to enter the setting into the remote s memory After you press the Set Button the top line of the LCD display will read SAWING and then the word SAWED will flash four times in the center of the bottom line 12 When the codes are saved the remote will return to normal opera tion and whenever you press the Input Selector Button that was just programmed the codes for the new device will be used NOTE Some brands share a common remote control code for Power Off for many models For that reason it is possi ble that even though the remote appears to be properly programmed you may find that some buttons do
32. the remote control is in System mode NOT set to control an external source device or even the CVPD50 screen To set the remote to System mode press the System Selector e Both the CVPD50 and CVR700 contain separate IR sensors that are capable of receiving commands from either remote control JBL recommends that you point the remote at the CVPD50 screen for all commands as the JBL Digital Link cable is able to pass remote commands to the CVR700 for system and DVD control as well as to any other devices you have connected to the Remote IR Output Jack B However video control com mands received by the CVR700 cannot be passed to the screen When viewing the on screen menus it is important that they not be left on the screen for an extended period of time The constant display of a static image such as these menus or video game images is likely to cause the image to be permanently burned into the plasma screen This type of damage is not covered by the JBL Cinema Vision warranty Making Configuration Adjustments The on screen menu system for the audio section is available by pressing the OSD Button When this button is pressed the MATN MENU Figure 6 will appear and adjustments are made from the individual menus To use the on screen menu system in the audio section of the CVR700 press the A W Navigation Controls A until the on screen p cursor is next to the item you wish to adjust and then pre
33. video interface It is essential that you pro gram your computer or other DVI source device to enter the screen saver mode to prevent burnout of the CVPD50 screen Fan Speed The CVR700 s 700 watts of amplification generate a significant amount of heat that must be dissipated in order to pre vent damage to delicate electrical com ponents that could shorten the unit s use ful life or even lead to failure For this reason it is extremely important to place the CVR700 in a location with adequate ventilation and several inches clearance on the top and sides The CVR700 is equipped with a fan to provide cooling The fan is always turning at one of three speeds depending upon the setting you choose for the F AN line of the ADVANCED SETTINGS submenu The default setting is MINIMUM NOISE At this setting the fan will turn at its slowest speed when the vol ume is set below 20dB and slightly faster at a medium speed whenever the volume is 20dB or higher This intelli gent cooling scheme minimizes distract ing fan noise while maintaining proper operating temperatures You may choose the MAXIMUM COOLING setting instead At this setting the fan runs at full speed at all times This setting is recommended when the CVR700 is placed inside a cabinet ADVANCED SETTINGS submenu settings may be reset to their factory defaults by scrolling to the RESET ALL OF THE ABOVE TO FACTORY SETTINGS line and pressing the Set But
34. when available In the Auto mode when the Tuning Up Down Buttons 6209 A A are pressed and held the unit will automatically search for the next available station with good signal strength When the Tuning Mode Button is pressed so that TUNE MANUAL appears in the Lower Display Line pressing and holding the Tuning Up Down Buttons A will cause the tuner to scan up or down through the frequencies and stop when the button is released even if that frequency does not provide an acceptable signal In either T UNE AUTO or TUNE ANUAL mode each tap of the Tuning Up Down Buttons 6209 A will cause the tuner to step through the frequencies in single step increments When the FM band is in use pressing the button so that the TUNE MANUAL mode is activated will enable you to tune stations with weak signals by changing to monaural reception See page 64 for more information on tuner operation Level Guide Button This button is used to start the process of setting the CVR700 output levels to an external source such as a favorite DVD While the source is playing press this button and then press the A W Navigation Controls until the channel to adjust appears Press the Set Button to select that channel and then use the A V Navigation Controls again to adjust the level setting See page 64 for more information p A W Navigation Disc This single disc like button is used to nav igate the on scree
35. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0991 0 8t oey A N Buv 0 0Ud ajbuy yuq puosey ejBuy 1999 yoeg JenuejA aun Buv jenueyy aunj ajbuy Lp dd dd H dd dd dd dd dd H H dd dn aun PJEMJO4 URIS PJEMJO4 eunj UBIS 9b 6 JU IN 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 JU IN 6 Gt 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 tr L BuO 159 L L L L L L L L L L L L L L 4831 4 Er uMog 0915 Ild uMog umog uwogeDeg dijise 017 1587 AMS uwo dis gt gt 4437 xepuj uwog dyg uwog diys UMOQ ue s UMOQ 195914 piewyoeg diyg 2eg 19S914 ADS 9 091915 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 091915 9 5 punong 5 5 5 5 5 E E 5 5 E E 5 E E 018 5 0t Y 411160 Y Y Y Y Y y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y L 21607 6E 1914 dn dn dn afed dgx N dig xen dn dais diyg dn dys lt Au ux pu dn drys dn diis dn ueas dn 1989 4 JPIENJO4 dbjs pjemuojjesejg dh 8 9 03N S10 9 03N SLO E LE punong 10 ung 11 2 9 Aqiog Aqjog l GE UMOQ MOJS umoq U UMOQ y9 umoq U umwo u uesg MOS umogy9 UMOQU MO S N0 S Mo S did uMOg Ud U y9 188 Y 158 y9 188 y9 188 1807 49 ed 4 diis dps 1sej Aejaq d dys 8 2810 5 2890 49 Ad 49 dhis 2810 dbi asiq yg 1827 0145 2910 91J0A64 yg 91J0A64 diis IO 19 NO paq 2810 34110424 paq 2810 ya 28109 90 e
36. 200mV 47k ohms 97dBA 87 5 108MHz IHF 1 3uV 13 2dBf 70 68dB 0 2 0 390 40dB 1kHz 400kHz 70dB 80dB 90dB 520 1720kHz 45dB Loop 500uV 1kHz 5090 modulation 0 896 10kHz 30dB NTSC 1V p p 75 ohms 1V p p 75 ohms 10Hz 8MHz 3dB 10Hz 100MHz 3dB 120V AC 60Hz 320W maximum 78W idle 10W standby 17 3 8 x 6 3 5 x 17 3 4 441mm x 168mm x 451mm 24 Ib 11kg INDEX 4 3 Scaling 58 5 Channel Stereo 30 34 62 7 Channel Stereo 62 AC Power Connections 45 59 Advanced Settings 52 53 57 58 Advanced Settings Menus 52 57 Antenna Terminals 23 43 Aspect Ratio 13 19 27 28 34 36 54 57 58 udio Equipment Connections 21 23 43 44 udio Mode Menus 46 47 udio Surround Mode Chart 62 uto Mode Tuning 16 17 26 27 29 34 36 64 uto Search Method 77 92 uxiliary Input 22 44 76 ass Management 48 50 Burn in 28 35 40 41 Cable Television 4 21 43 76 106 107 CD 12 71 103 Channel Control Punch Through 83 95 Cleaning and Maintenance 7 Coaxial Digital Audio Jacks 17 22 26 37 43 44 46 61 Component Video 13 14 22 47 54 Composite Video 21 22 47 56 Credenza Stand 39 40 Delay Settings 30 37 50 Description and Features 5 Digital Audio Playback 60 64 Digital Recorder 21 22 23 44 59 64 76 104 105 Digital Source Selection 46 61 Dimming Front Panel Display 52 Direct Code Entry 92 Display Settings 57 Display Settings
37. 5 1 channel Dolby Digital or a director s commentary you may cycle through these tracks while the disc is playing by repeatedly pressing the Audio Button 3 Subtitle The fifth item is the current Subtitle status If the disc contains subti tles you may cycle through the available languages while the disc is playing by repeatedly pressing the Subtitle Button EPA In addition to displaying the available languages the Subtitle feature may be set to Off by continuing to press the button d Angle The sixth item is the current camera angle This feature is only avail able on certain DVD discs check the DVD jacket to determine whether this feature is available on the disc You may change the angle setting at any time by repeatedly pressing the Angle Button However the on screen view will only change during portions of the disc where the multi angle feature has been activated At the beginning of a passage where multiple camera angles are available a Status Banner will appear indicating Angle Area In At any time after this message appears press the Angle Button to view the program using a different camera angle Another Status Banner with the message Angle Area Out will appear at the end of the passage After this second banner appears pressing the Angle Button will change the setting but the on screen image will not change NOTES e The full Status Bar is only availabl
38. 658 672 691 RUNCO 681 SAMSUNG 685 707 708 733 SANYO 667 703 SHARP 675 682 704 727 SONY 669 683 697 699 721 729 TECHNICS 680 THOMSON 657 658 TOSHIBA 663 664 687 711 712 731 YAMAHA 6 0 671 684 717 ZENITH 659 687 693 709 718 736 104 CVR7OOR1 DVD R SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List BROKSONIC 017 CYBER HOME 020 GO VIDEO 014 JVC 012 LITE ON 021 MAGNAVOX 016 PANASONIC 005 006 007 008 008 PHILIPS 016 PIONEER 004 015 RCA 019 SAMSUNG 013 SANSUI 017 SONY 001 002 003 TOSHIBA 010 011 018 ZENITH 014 CVR7OO0R1 D VHS SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List JVC 602 MITSUBISHI 601 CVR7OOR1 GAME SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List SONY PLAYSTATION2 002 MICROSOFT X BOX 001 CVR7OO0R1 CAMCORDER SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List CANON 265 266 JVC 262 PANASONIC 263 SAMSUNG 257 258 SONY 259 260 261 SHARP 264 CVR7OORI TIVO SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List DIRECTV 518 PIONEER 513 SERIES 2 DVR 514 521 TOSHIBA 515 OTHER TIVO 517 519 520 CVR7O0R1 PVR DVR SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List DAEWOO 769 772 ECHOSTAR 782 783 784 EXPRESSVU 782 HUGHES 785 795 HYUNDAI 786 KEEN 777 PANASONIC 7
39. 7 1 or surround back um surround information from either surround encoded n set only or 6 1 7 1 he 5 1 versions contains Dolby istening Enhance mode h musical o or improved imaging and channel or a version of Neo 6 ive performance theater all 2 concert hall t and back of a room right speakers t channels his mode turns off all surround processing and presents the pure left and right channel presentation of feed to the CVR700 or to select between Dolby Digital or DTS It is also possible for the type of signal feed to change dur inh the course of a DVD s playback In some cases the previews or special material will be recorded in 2 0 audio while the main feature is available in 5 1 audio The CVR700 will automatically sense changes to the bitstream and chan nel count and reflect them in these indi cators The letters used by the Speaker Channel Input Indicators 9 also flash to indicate when a bitstream has been interrupted This will happen when a digi tal input source is selected before the playback starts or when a digital source such as a DVD is paused The flashing indicators remind you that the playback has stopped due to the absence of a digi tal signal and not through any fault of the CVR700 This is normal and the digital playback will resume once the playback is started again When a 6 1 channel mode such as Dolby Digital EX is detected a line
40. 9 Navigation Buttons These buttons are used to navigate the on screen configuration menus to scroll through options lists and to select various settings such as delay speaker configura tions surround modes digital inputs etc Set Button This button is used to enter settings into the CVR700 s memory or to confirm a selection while setting delay times speaker configuration and output level adjustments It is used as the Enter or OK button for most other devices Exit Cancel Button When pro gramming the remote press this button to cancel the current function and return to the previous remote function When using the remote to enter frequencies for direct tuner access or track numbers for direct access on a CD press this button to clear previous entries A Direct Brightness Window Button Press this button when the tuner is in use to directly enter a station s frequency or when a CD is in use to directly enter a track number After press ing this button press the appropriate Alphanumeric Keys to select station or track When the Screen mode is active press this button to adjust the brightness of the CVPD50 See page 55 for more informa tion on screen adjustments This button also activates the Window function for TiVo players See your TiVo owner s man ual for more information on the Window function NOTE The Sports Broadcast Movies Buttons GD A optimize picture settings for
41. Contrast Button JBL On Screen Library Settings Distance Button Menu Info Audio Input Selector A Power Off All A IR Transmitter Receiver o 3 3 P P ppp P P D DH P P PIR RPP P gt P P P 2 gt z l S 4 P PPph bP PIP pb PP MUTE ODRECT S Sja 5 S9 EXEB I 2 5 Res o 8 B e j Em pep i 2 g gt Ss s e gt S TEST n RS ANG T v SLEEP ZOOMIMEM 5 AJ Ex B E SS A COMP 2 SYSTEM V S a g m x a ea El D SKIP ti ve tA ee e E STATUS n E B ie 3 LIGHT JBL CVR700R1 P P P gt P P PP P The alphanumeric keys function as such for all devices except in System mode of the CVR700 where pressing each key will access certain audio functions as follows 1 Dolby Surround Mode Selector 2 DTS Digital Surround Mode Selector 3 DTS Neo 6 Surround Mode Selector 4 Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector 5 DSP Surround Mode Selector Stereo Mode Selector 7 Test Tone 8 No additional function 9 Night Mode 0 Sleep Timer IMPORTANT NOTE The JBL Cinema Vision remotes are powerful devices capable of controlling virtually your entire home cinema system In comparison to a traditional system of the same capabili tie
42. Memory Backup This product is equipped with a memory backup system that preserves the system configuration information and tuner pre sets if the unit is accidentally unplugged or subjected to a power outage This memory will last virtually indefinitely 65 66 OPTICAL DISC CHANGER PLAYBACK BASICS Loading Discs To load discs in the CVR700 first turn the CVR700 on by pressing the Main Power On Off Switch ER Set the CVR700 to the DVD source input either by slowly rotating the Source Selector F4 until it engages in the notch and D V D appears in the Information Display FX or by pressing the DVD Input Selector A Press the Eject Button 3 and you will be prompted to select a disc number by a message in the Lower Display Line You must enter a number either by pressing one of the front panel Disc Selectors E or by entering a number between 1 and 5 using the Numeric Keys If you don t enter a num ber the CVR700 will cancel the command The Disc Indicator JB corresponding to the tray number you selected will flash The door will drop forward and the maga zine tray corresponding to the disc posi tion you have selected will slide forward Note that the door will open only enough to allow the correct tray to slide forward so that the door opens wider for the higher numbered trays located further down This is perfectly normal Hold the disc by the edge and gently place it into the disc drawer
43. Off All Press this button to place the CVR700 and the CVPD50 or a selected device in the Standby mode Press and hold this button to place all devices including the CVR700 the CVPD50 and any other products whose codes you have programmed into the remote into the Standby mode Power On All Press this button to power on the CVR700 and CVPD50 or another device you selected by first press ing the appropriate Input Selector Press and hold this button to power on all devices including the CVR700 the CVPD50 and any other products whose codes you have programmed into the remote LCD Information Display This two line screen displays various informa tion depending on the commands that have been entered into the remote Normally the upper line will display the current device e g DUD ZMAIH and the lower line will display the name of the function key when pressed e g DISC SKIP See page 85 for informa tion on renaming devices and keys Input Selectors Pressing one of these buttons will perform two actions The CVR700 will switch to the source selected and the remote will switch to the control codes for the selected source In order to control the CVR700 again press the System Selector B and to control the CVPD50 screen press the Screen Selector Q Press and hold any of these buttons to power on the CVR700 the CVPD50 and the source device and to begin play of the source device Scree
44. Output Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input Cable Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio Input DVI Computer Coaxial Digital Audio Input Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital Audio Input Optical Digital Audio Output Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio Input Cable Satellite Optical Digital Audio Input Digital Recorder Optical Digital Audio Input 6 DVI Computer Optical Digital Audio Input FM Antenna Jack AM Antenna Terminals Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 Screen Port for Factory Use Only gt DVI HDCP Computer Video Input NOTE To assist in making the correct con nections for multichannel input output and speaker connections all connection jacks and terminals are color coded in conformance with the CEA standards as follows Front Left White Front Right Red Center Green Side Surround Surround Left Blue Side Surround Surround Right Gray Back Surround Left Brown Back Surround Right Tan Subwoofer Purple Digital Audio Orange Composite Video Yellow Component Video Y Green Component Video Pr Red Component Video Pb Blue Back Surround Speaker Outputs These speaker terminals are normally used to power the back surround left back surround right speakers in a 7 1 channel system In conformance with the CEA color code specification the brown terminal is the positive terminal that should be connected to the red 4 termi nal on the Back Surround Left spea
45. PRELUDE 422 PRIMESTAR 464 PTS 320 356 377 378 PULSAR 360 RADIO SHACK 379 413 414 RCA 355 380 RECOTON 418 REGAL 309 357 358 363 401 402 403 REGENCY 365 417 REMBRANT 334 Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List SAMSUNG 339 374 408 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 305 306 307 349 350 351 353 354 381 393 404 405 406 407 408 410 411 428 430 431 432 485 486 SEAM 423 SHERITECH 331 SIGNAL 339 SIGNATURE 303 490 SL MARX 339 SONY 429 SPRUCER 355 383 479 491 STARCOM 304 313 317 318 465 STARGATE 317 339 422 SYLVANIA 373 TADIRAN 339 TANDY 326 TELECAPATION 330 TEXSCAN 338 373 TFC 424 TIMELESS 425 TOCOM 308 347 348 364 472 TOSHIBA 360 UNIKA 316 323 333 UNITED CABLE 313 361 UNIVERSAL 314 316 323 333 335 336 341 344 415 VIDEOWAY 366 426 VIEWSTAR 321 324 327 388 389 390 391 492 ZENITH 360 366 367 400 427 ZENTEK 418 107 108 CVR7OOR1 SATELLITE SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List ALPHASTAR 561 ALPHASTAR DBS 653 ALPHASTAR DSR 625 645 AMPLICA 559 BIRDVIEW 617 628 BSR 562 CAPETRONICS 562 CHANNEL MASTER 523 524 525 528 564 CHAPARRAL 508 518 519 522 583 CITOH 563 CURTIS MATHES 559 DRAKE 515 520 521 604 616 DX ANTENNA
46. Popes FH BH n G B BB m E H 9 i ili El Main Power On Off E Front Panel Optical Digital Audio Input Source Selector Sleep Button ITI Front Panel Coaxial Digital Audio Surround Mode Selector Display Dimmer Input EE Input Select Button El Disc Drawer EH Tuner Band Selector Play Button EI Volume Control El Disc Selector IE Memory Pause Button Information Display i Tuning Mode Eject Button FM Mode Stop Button EE Remote Sensor Window Front Panel Optical Digital Audio Output E Tuning Preset Skip Search Button El Main Power On Off Press this but ton to apply power to the CVR700 The LED indicator in will turn orange the CVR700 in S LED indicator wi If the CVPD50 is the center of the button Press it again to place tandby mode and the turn red in use pressing this but ton will also turn the CVPD5O on or off if it is plugged into AC power and its master power switch has been turned on If the LED on the CVPD50 s front panel is flashing then check that its master power switch is on the 1 position Sleep Button Press this button to place the unit in the Sleep mode After the time shown in the display the CVR700 will automatically go into the Standby mode Fach press of the button changes the time until turn off in the fol lowing order 90 4 80 70 4 60 _ 50 min gt min min gt min gt min 40 _ 30 y 20 _ 10 gt OFF min min min min
47. Search Button Press this button when the tuner is in use to change the station to one with a lower frequency Each tap of this button will decrease the frequency by one increment When the tuner receives a strong enough signal for adequate recep ion MANUAL TUNED will appear in he Lower Display Line A When the uner is in the Auto Stereo mode press and hold the button to cause the tuner to scan for the next lower station with acceptable signal strength and stop The Lower Display Line A will indicate AUTO TUNED When an FM Stereo station is tuned the display will read AUTO ST TUNED When the tuner is in Manual Mono mode you may press and hold this button to scan downward through the frequencies and the tuner will stop immediately when you release this button even if no acceptable signal is detected at that frequency See page 64 for more information When an optical player source such as the internal DVD changer is in use press this button to search quickly in reverse through the current track or chapter Depending on the type of disc used in the internal DVD changer each additional press will cycle through the available scan speeds as follows available scan speeds may differ for external optical source devices DVD Audio and DVD Video discs 2x 4x 16x 100x CD and VCD discs 2x 4x 8x MP3 and WMA discs 2x 4x 8x 16x See page 68 for more information on using the internal DVD changer s trans por
48. U Mo S ueos MOS UMOQ y9 UMOQ umog yg X UMOQU UMOQ MOIS UMOR MO S_UMOG MOoJS 3Ig u 05 PIENUOJ Nald dn puemuo puemuo4 Hd dn abeg dn dij1XeN di Xa diis PJENUO4 diys 01 diis df d jiese4j diys dn abeg jasald 6 dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn oA u wooz _ 000825 dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A dn 10A 8r piewj3eg pemyoeg umog piewpeg piewwoeg Ild umog abeg uwogeDeg di 1se di 1867 diis diis diis diis UMOQ 25 uwo jeseig piewpeg dns UMOQ abey esalg yg 181 92061510 ujise ujisej u ISEJ J9JUJ 1821 1910 OU UJ 914 U JSEJ U 1887 49 eld UJISEJ U SE1 99UEJSIQ 49 18 7 9201810 YQ 187 920110 9p 191U3 193 191U3 98 191U3 198 1947 30 2125 198 8S 199 98 191U3 198 199 95 Juj 7 19JUJ JOS 191UJ 9S 19 U3 9S 191U3 19S 191U3 198 191U3 193 195 Gr 1X N l 83ue9 Jooueg uxj je3uejg ixj Jeoueg uxj eouejg Abq ux wg Ij Jgoue A3 jaouey gt Je8 9 le9 jaouey je2uejg ix3 JeouegAuxj je2ueg Aq Jeoueg Anq vy UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ r iig 0 ye 19 yel 19 ye 18 Je 19 18 9 Je 19 yel 18 yel 19 19 W nua QAQ nua nua nua nu 1sr nuejN nue nua nua nugN 2510 nua weiBolg nueyy 0juj nuejA ojuj nuajN OJUJ NUSJA Or an an dn dn an dn an an an an dn an dn dn dn an dn 6 apin
49. When a PVR is in use press this button to list recorded materials Refer to your PVR s owner s manual for more information ED Audio Screen Saver Button This button has different functions depending on whether it is pressed in DVD Main mode or Screen mode In DVD Main mode pressing this button accesses the available audio soundtracks on a DVD In some cases the disc may simply contain different languages Other discs may switch the audio format e g to linear PCM or Dolby Digital 5 1 Pressing this button may sometimes pro vide access to commentary soundtracks In Screen mode pressing this button places the CVPD50 display in Screen Saver mode in which a JBL logo will appear to move around the screen t is important to turn on the Screen Saver any time a still image is likely to remain on screen for more than a few minutes because a still image such as a menu display may be burned into the display causing permanent damage to the plasma Screen that is not covered under warranty This danger is not present when a moving image is displayed Subtitle TV Video Button This button has different functions depending on whether it is pressed in DVD Main mode or Screen mode In DVD Main mode press this button to select a subtitle language or to turn sub titling off In Screen mode or when used with video source device that is used for ob taining television broadcasts such as a cable box satellite r
50. a full 7 1 system press the button twice so that the bottom line reads 7 CHANNELS as shown in Fig 25 7 CHANNELS 25 5 Hold the remote in front of you at arm s length being sure not to cover the EzSet Microphone Sensor at the top of the remote and press the Set Button within 5 seconds to begin the EzSet calibration process At this point EzSet will take control of your system starting the test tone at the front left speaker and automatically adjusting the output level so that it is correct During the adjustment the Lower Display Line 3 will display the speaker position on the left side of the display and the offset from reference level on the right side of the display As the levels are adjusted the speaker position and a level indication will appear in the bottom line of the remote s LCD display Figure 26 EzSet CHANNELS 7 SPEAKER 1 8dB Figure 26 The channel position being adjusted will flash in the Speaker Channel Input Indicators i if the test noise is heard from a channel other than the one shown in the indicator there is an error in the speaker connections If this is the case press the Remote Menu Button f to stop the adjustment Then turn the unit off and verify that all speakers are connected to the proper Speaker Outputs QO OO During the adjustment process for each channel you will see indications of LOM HIGH and a level readout in 4B This is n
51. allows the unit to be used as a direct readout SPL meter Complete instructions for using the EzSet features of the remote are found on page 51 of this owner s manual In most cases you will find it easier to access the EzSet capabilities directly by pressing the SPL Select Button 9 and following the menu prompts as detailed on page 51 However there is one function of the remote that is avail able only through the remote s menu sys tem being described in this section To avoid having the calibration settings created with EzSet changed accidentally the remote allows you to disable the SPL Select Button on the remote de activate the button follow these Steps 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button gt for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD dis play and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the Navigation Button f until SET SPER LEVELS appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 104 Press the Set Button to enter the main EzSet menu branch MAIH MEHU SET SPKR LEUELS A Figure 104 3 At the next menu screen Figure 105 press the A V Navigation Buttons once so that EzSeT DISABLE appears in the lower line of the LCD
52. continue scrolling until the p cursor is next to the DVD V line and select it The DVD VIDEO sub menu Figure 18 will appear Although audio mode selection is similar to the other disc types the sub mode e g Music 7 1 for Logic 7 is displayed separately on the TYPE line DVD CD CHANGER DVD VIDEO PAUDIO MODE LOGIC 7 TYPE MOVIE 7 1 NIGHT MODE N A RESET TO FACTORY SETTNG BACK TO MAIN MENU Figure 18 The DVD VIDEO submenu Fig 18 also enables you to adjust the Night Mode setting The Night Mode setting may be accessed directly from the SOURCES menu Figure 12 for other source inputs The Night mode is a fea ture of Dolby Digital that preserves the dynamic range and full intelligibility of a movie soundtrack while reducing the peak level This prevents abruptly loud transitions from disturbing others with out reducing the sonic impact of a digital source The Night mode is only available when specially encoded Dolby Digital signals are played which are only found on DVD Video or DVD Audio discs To adjust the Night mode setting make certain that the gt cursor is on the NIGHT line Next press the lt p gt Navigation Controls f A to choose between the following settings as they appear in the Lower Display Line f OFF When OFF is highlighted the Night mode will not function MEDIUM COMPRESSION A mild compression will be applied when MEDIUM COMPRESSION is highlighted MAXIMUM COMPR
53. did dems did P10994 125 dems did did dems dld did 130 40 dd __ dmiag did abueyg 8jjnus dnas dld dld dmeas qad dmesg did dmas aad 59 910 04 8101 QAL qaq MOWBJA 188 oz X 08pIA 150 wopuey 810 150 150 8110A84 1SO v9 yeaS ony oipny Snid HJA pioseg 291 gv jeaday yeaday av gv oinv g v 8 97881 878811 Nua do nuaw doy eni enl N d9 A ojuj epil enit 878914 0 29 awel jeaday yeaday awel4 jeaday 19 X0818181 wopuey wopuey x0gHTZAUODUEHU 09 held held held held held held held held held held held held held held held 6S e day e day e d yoeg held oju SNJEJS oju sBumes JUEJSUJ JUEJSUJ Mowa um u yoeg smeg snonunuo uonoy oju sBunes J JsBumes sneis 86 9sneg asneg asned asneg asneg asned asneg asneg asneg asned asneg asneg asned 9sneg 19 dois dos dois 0015 1015 dois dois dos 0015 dois dois 0015 dois dos 96 D10381 pio28y D10381 pio28y pio2ey ang u p1o2e pio28y p10994 D10381 p1028y 294 qq H H H H J H H H dd H H dp aun plemuojueog dn aun 44 vS Mau Mau Mau Mau Mau Mau Mau Mau Mau Mau May uwo jeunj pjewopeg ues UMOQ 9UN M9H gq UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQJOA UMOQJOA UMOQJOA UMOQJOA UMOQJOA oA OA UMOQ jo UuMog oA UMOQJOA UMOQJOA UMO 0 UMO JOA UMOQ JOA ns dn uo dn 9 dn uo dn 9 diu dnwojg uss dp wois dn y9 dn mols dn y9 dn y9 dn mols dn mois do A0IS 014 u9 LG UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ U uwoqu uwoguj umwo u
54. disc is stopped The other available repeat modes are Repeat All Files in a folder Repeat Disc and Repeat Off The Repeat Indicators e will light to indicate the current Repeat mode Repeat A B The Repeat A B function allows you to select any portion of a disc except for VCD MP3 and WMA discs and have it repeat until play is stopped While the disc is playing when the beginning of the desired passage is reached press the Repeat A B Button once A banner with the message A to B Repeat Set A will appear on screen momentarily When the end of the desired passage is reached press the Repeat A B Button once more The message A to B Repeat On will appear briefly The passage will continue to play repeatedly until you manually stop play or press the Repeat A B Button once again so that the message A to B Repeat Off is displayed on screen NOTE The A B Repeat range may cover several titles or chapters on a DVD as long as the DVD disc s control program does not force the CVR700 to return to a DVD menu in between 69 70 DVD PLAYBACK Using a DVD s Menu One of the unique features of the DVD System is that it offers a producer the opportunity to include a wide range of features on a disc including multiple language tracks subtitles in a variety of languages special information such as movie trailers and cast information as well as other customized information In addition producers may divid
55. external disc player press the right side of this button to advance to the next image on the disc or the left side of this button to return to the previous image When using the internal changer the Page Up Down Buttons perform this function When a cable television box satellite receiver HDTV tuner or TiVO device is in use press the right side of this button to tune in to the next higher channel or the left side to tune in to the next lower channel When the internal DVD changer or an external DVD player is in use and a DVD is playing press the right side of this but ton once to switch to the DVD slow for ward play mode Each additional press the right side of the button will cycle through the available slow play speeds of 1 2x 1 4x and 1 8x Pressing the left side of the button switches to the DVD slow reverse play mode Additional presses of the left side of the button cycles through the available slow play speeds of 1 2x 1 4x and 1 8x No slow play speeds are available for CDs or other disc types CD Preset Page Up Forward Skip Button This multipurpose button has a different function depending on the source in use When used with the tuner this button scrolls through the preprogrammed sta tion presets c When used with optical sources such as the internal disc changer or an external CD player press this button once to skip to the beginning of the next track The Page Up function is used with c
56. flash four times and then the remote will return to normal operation UCR lt CBL CHAN SAVED a Figure 97 7 Once the punch through is pro grammed the Channel Up Down Buttons of the second device named will be used when those controls are pressed while the master device is in use Returning the Channel Control Settings to Default Operation If you wish to remove the Channel Punch Through so that the commands for Channel Up Down are returned to the factory default setting follow the steps shown above except that in Steps 4 and 5 select the same device for both the DEWICE IH USE on the left side of the bottom line and the PUNCH THROUGH device In the example used the display to return the remote to default settings will appear as shown in Figure 98 PUNCH THROUGH UCRX UCR A Figure 98 Transport Control Punch Through The Play G Stop Fast Forward Reverse 6 Pause Record 2 and Skip Up Down 0 Transport Controls are set at the factory to operate your DVD player or the con trols of a specific device such as a VCR or CD player when they are selected However by using the Transport Punch Through feature you may program these controls to transmit the commands for a different device For example you may wish to operate the transport of a VCR connected to the VCR input as the default rather than the button for the internal DVD player as shown in the following exampl
57. format NOTE The Letterbox and Frame functions are not available with the internal DVD CD changer unless the DVD Auto Resize function has been turned off using the Screen setup menus See page 57 for more information The stop function may be used with the internal disc changer or with an external DVD or CD player or other playback device When the internal disc changer is in use pressing the Stop button once will place a DVD in resume mode meaning that you may press the Play Button As to continue playing the disc from the point where it was stopped If you press the Stop button twice play will resume from the beginning of the disc When a PVR is in use this button switches to play of the signal currently being received by the PVR See the PVR s owner s manual for more information Forward Play Button This button may be used with the internal disc changer or with an external DVD or CD player or other playback device Status TV Video PVR Play Button Press it to display the CVR700 systems status or an external DVD recorder status In Screen mode or when used with a video source device that is used for obtaining television broadcasts such as a cable box satellite receiver TiVo PVR DVR or VCR this button allows you to select between the television signal or one of the device s video inputs See the device s owner s manual for more infor mation on the use of this function A Tuning Down Reverse
58. in the Lower Display Line H and on screen isplay To disable the controls press the A Navigation Controls 2 until the display reads T ONE OUT To change the bass or treble settings press this button again until the desired control appears in the Lower Display Line J and in the on screen display and then press the A W Navigation Controls until the desired setting appears 2 When the Screen mode is active press this button to adjust the color tempera ture of the CVPD50 display See page 55 for more information on screen adjust ments This button also activates the List function for TiVo players See your TiVo owners manual for more information on the List function D OSD Contrast Button Press this button when the System mode is active to access the setup menu for the CVR700 s audio functions When the Screen mode is active press this button to adjust the contrast of the CVPD50 dis play See page 55 for more information on screen adjustments Angle Tuning Mode Button When the DVD mode is active press this button 50 select an alternate camera angle if available on the current DVD When the tuner is in use press this but ton to change the tuner scan mode between manual and automatic When the button is pressed so that TUNE AUTO appears in the Lower Display Line A only stations with acceptable signal quality will be tuned when scan ning and the tuner will play FM stations in stereo
59. insert a special code to identifv the brand or model Due to the varietv of formats occasionallv an error mav occur in the learning process even though the CVR700R1 remote has indicated that the code was learned correctiv Therefore it is recommended that vou test the newlv learned codes with the source component If the code was not learned correctly tiv releaming it Usually after several tries the code can be learned correctly Erasing Learned Codes The remote allows vou to remove or erase the code set for all the codes that have been programmed into specific device buttons To erase all codes within a single device follow these steps 1 Press and hold both the Input Selector A Ay within which the individual button to be erased has been pro grammed and the Learn Button 2 When the LED under the Input Selector turns on release the buttons 3 Press and release the Input Selector A A for 3 seconds 4 The light under the Input Selector A A will blink three times and go dark and all of the learned codes for that device will have been erased Macros Several macro type commands have been preprogrammed into the remote and they may be activated by pressing and holding certain other buttons as described below The secondary remote does not allow you to program new macro functions 1 Pressing and holding the Power On A or Power Off buttons will execute the Power On All or Power Off All co
60. is a single box The inner box lights when a small speaker is selected and the outer boxes light when large Speakers are selected When none of the boxes are lit for the center surround or subwoofer channels no speaker has been assigned that position See page 48 for more information on configuring speakers The letters inside each box display the active input channels For standard analog inputs only the L and R will light indicat ing a stereo input For a digital source the indicators will light to display the channels being received at the digital input When the letters flash the digital input has been interrupted When a 6 1 channel bitstream is detected a horizontal line will appear between the icons for the surround back eft and right channels to indicate that these two channels are in mono mode See page 61 for more information on the Channel Indicators Surround Mode Indicators One of these indicators will light to show the surround mode in use Depending on the specific combination of input sources and surround mode selected more than one indicator may light See page 61 for more information CT fr DIC DIGITAL Ems Ht DO PRO LOGIC 2396 24 i C _ ETEINEO5 v 1 LOGIC 7 CBO 57CH STEREO DSP SURR FI 8 E Progressive Scan Indicator Aspect Ratio Indicator 21 Upper Display Line Depending on the unit s
61. just had a new code learned is pressed press the A Navigation Button 2 until the display shown in Figure 73 appears in he LCD display Press the Set Button D to be taken to a EDIT BUTTON display Enter the new name for the ey following the instructions shown in the Renaming Individual Keys sec ion of this manual on page 86 If you ind it more convenient to rename the buttons at a later time you may do hat separately by following the instructions on page 85 CODE LEARHED EDIT BUTTON A Figure 73 11 When you have programmed all keys for the desired device press the A Navigation Button f repeatedly when the LEARH Figure 70 appears until you see the display shown in Figure 74 Press the Set Button to return the remote to normal operation CODE LEARHED EXIT A Figure 74 12 If you wish to program the codes for another device repeat the procedure outline above but select a different device in Step 3 Note on Learning Function Remote control signals can vary from one con roller to the next due to different stan dard formats adopted by each manufac urer For example some manufacturers repeat the code sequence in the initial ransmission and others insert a special code to identify the brand or model Due 0 the variety of formats occasionally an error may occur in the learning process even though the CVR700R2 remote has indicated that the code was learned cor rectly Therefore
62. left and surround left and front right and surround he center channel is fed a summed mono mix of the in phase material of the left and righ ile or Cinema mode should be used with any source that nter channel intelligibility and more accurate placement er and more realistic than with other decoding techniques d be used with analog or PCM stereo sources Logic 7 M enhances the er front soundstage and greater rear ambience Both Logic 7 modes also direct low frequency to deliver maximum bass impact The Logic 7 E is chosen is an extension of the Logic 7 modes that is primarily used wi ch circulates low frequencies in the 40Hz to 120Hz range to the undstage that appears broader and wider than when the subwoofer ng H on ive nem e0 6 for optimal 6 1 7 1 channel operation Dolby Digital EX is the latest version of er programs that have special encoding Dolby Digital EX reproduces s so that a full 6 1 7 1 sound field is available When the receiver is set for t the EX mode is automatically selected Even if speci ional channel the special algorithms will derive a 6 1 7 1 output ic EX ive separate mai ewer discs with rix mode which surround and left surround channels from either matrix surround encoded programs or conventional stereo sources when an analog input is in use The imized for movie soundtracks while the usic mode should be ng for those who prefer ogy that creates a discrete 6 1 and
63. listing with UL CSA or other appropriate testing agency stan dards Questions about running cables inside walls should be referred to your installer or a licensed electrician who is familiar with the NEC and or the applica ble local building codes in your area When connecting wires to the speakers be certain to observe proper polarity Note that the positive terminal of each speaker connection now carries a specific color code as noted on page 20 How ever most speakers still use a red terminal for the positive 4 connection Connect the negative or black wire to the same terminal on both the receiver and the speaker NOTE While most speaker manufactur ers adhere to an industry convention of using black terminals for negative and red ones for positive some may vary from this configuration To ensure proper phase and optimal performance consult the identification plate on your speaker or the speaker s manual to verify polarity If you do not know the polarity of your speaker ask your dealer for advice before proceeding or consult the manufacturer We also recommend that the length of cable used to connect speaker pairs be identical For example use the same length piece of cable to connect the front left and front right or surround left and surround right speakers even if the speakers are a different distance from the CVR700 It is appropriate to configure the CVR700 for either 5 1 or 7 1 channel operation
64. making them more like the screen in a movie theater The program material on a DVD may be recorded in either format NOTES m Due to the advent of HD high defini ion programming and the new 16 9 also called 1 85 or widescreen aspect ratio many newer sources now offer heir own scaling resizing of the pic ure to fit a frame options which are accessed through their remote or hrough their on screen menu To take advantage of CVR700 s robust scaling capabilities it is best to allow the CVR700 to handle all rescaling duties This means that all high definition external sources connected to CVR700 should be configured to supply a 16 9 picture to CVR700 if at all possible and all non HD legacy sources should supply their native 4 3 otherwise called 1 33 or FULL SCREEN aspect ratio with older devices there are usually no adjustments or options for picture size anyway Regarding HD sources some experimentation may be necessary as not all offer a basic 16 9 aspect ratio option without other parameter settings The correct mode may be called 16 9 FULL SCREEN in some brand products in other brand products you may need to select the 16 9 aspect ratio separately from selecting FULL SCREEN scaling Some experimentation with the settings on your source device may be necessary to find the most pleasing appearance m here are two film formats commonly used in movie theaters today that are close to the 16 9 aspect ratio o
65. mode has been selected In System mode this button is used to select a stereo listening mode When the button is pressed so that 2 CHANNEL STEREO appears in the Lower Display Line H and on screen display and the DSP and Surround Off Surround Mode Indicators are lit you will enjoy a two channel presenta tion of the sound along with the benefits of bass management Depending on whether your system is configured for 5 1 or 6 1 7 1 channels the next press of the button will cause 5 CH STEREO and then CH STEREO to appear and the stereo signal will be routed to all five or seven speakers See page 62 for more information on stereo playback modes In the Screen mode pressing this button automatically adjusts the screen s picture settings to preprogrammed settings that are recommended as optimal for viewing movies NOTE The Sports Broadcast Movies Buttons ED A optimize picture settings for a specific viewing medium The Broadcast settings are the most neu tral balanced and accurate and are opti mized for clarity The Movies settings are softer and less bright The Sports settings are more vibrant and optimized for fast moving action D DTS Neo 6 Mode Broadcast Preset Button This button function varies depending on whether the System or Screen mode has been selected In System mode this button is used to select a DTS Neo 6 audio surround mode See page 62 for more information on the availabl
66. mysteries of DVD and help you to enjoy all the power and flexibility of the DVD format and the CVR700 With the arrival of DVD disc data capaci ty has increased dramatically On a DVD Video disc most of this capacity is taken up by MPEG 2 video and the multichannel movie soundtrack in Dolby Digital and or DTS This information is compressed But with DVD Audio most of this capacity is available for music only without any compression This allows us to put the audio information on the disc in the same quality as the original mastering in the studio in PCM up to 24 bit 192kHz DVD Audio s 24 bit system provides sub stantially improved resolution of fine detail because it describes a specific point in the musical information using a 24 digit long string of ones and zeros with 16 777 216 possible combinations while CD s primitive 16 bit system offers only 65 536 options The 192kHz frequency allows us to have fast changes in music made audible which results in more dynamism and also allows us to obtain a higher bandwidth up to 96kHz Although that is far beyond the human audible spectrum it still improves the musical realism Aspect Ratio This is a description of the width of a video image in relation to its height A conventional video screen is four units wide for every three units of height making it almost square Newer wide aspect ratio video displays are 16 units wide for every nine units of height
67. name and the currently selected setting will be displayed in the Lower Display Line i System Configuration With the MAIN MENU on screen make sure that the gt cursor is pointing to the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION line and press the Set Button A The SYSTEM menu Fig 7 will appear on screen with the gt cursor pointing to the 5 1 CHANNEL line the default setting If your system consists of only front left center and right speakers two surround speakers and a subwoofer scroll down to the BACK TO MAIN MENU line and press the Set Button D A Otherwise use the A V Navigation Controls A to move the p cursor to point to the desired sys tem configuration then press the Set Button A A confirmation screen Fig 8 will appear giving you the opportu nity to retain the previous setting Select NO if you wish to retain the previous setting or Y E to update the setting SYSTEM xx SYSTEM p 5 1 CHANNEL 1 BACK TO MAIN MENU Figure 7 SYSTEM xx ARE YOU SURE YOU UANT TO CHANGE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION TO 5 19 p No YES Figure 8 Source Configuration The SOURCES submenu enables you to configure both the internal DVD CD changer and any external sources for dig ital audio inputs audio surround mode video input for external sources only and video screen aspect ratio for external sources only With the MAIN MENU on screen scroll down to the SOUR CES line and press th
68. ofthe SETUP MENU isthe TV DISPLAY setting which should be set to match the aspect ratio of your video display device For the CVPD50 this setting should be left at its factory default of LL 9 WIDE If you are using a different video display monitor that has a 4 3 aspect ratio screen and is capable of displaying a progressive scan image you may select the H 3PS set ting or if your display monitor has a 4 3 aspect ratio screen but does not have progressive scan capability you should select the H 3L B setting which will display widescreen 16 9 images with black bars above and below the image The second line sets the CVR700 s Component Video Monitor Outputs to progressive scan or interlaced There is no need to adjust this setting if you are using the CVPD50 but if you are using these outputs with another video display device you must select the INTERLACED setting if the display monitor is not capable of displaying a progressive scan signal or you may choose the PROGRESSIVE setting if your display monitor is capable of dis playing that type of video signal The TV TYPE line should be set to MULTI if you will be viewing both NTSC and PAL DVDs or you may set it to either NT S C which is the video stan dard used for most discs available in the United States or P AL which is the video standard used for most discs avail able in other parts of the world The VIDEO MODE setting affects the CVPD50 plasma display an
69. out of the control of the CVR700 as it is set by the disc s inter nal programming Important Notes on DVD Playback The sensitive CVPD50 plasma display screen is vulnerable to burn in if any still image remains on screen for any length of time It doesn t take very long for an image to burn in and it is impor tant to avoid leaving certain displays on screen for more than a few minutes as burn in cannot be repaired and will not be covered by your warranty Therefore DO NOT leave DVD menu screens on dis play for more than a brief period of time unless they contain movement Either begin play of the movie or turn off the system especially the screen after 5 minutes The CVR700 is capable of all the features and options covered by the DVD standards However it is up to the producer of a DVD disc to decide which of those fea tures and functions are available on any given disc For that reason not all discs will function identically and some discs will not have many of the features of the DVD system For example most current DVD discs do not take advantage of the multiple angle feature When you press a button and the player displays the Feature Not Available message this is an indication that the disc has not been programmed for that feature or that the CVR700 is not capable of executing that command on that disc in the current mode In addition it is common for the produc ers of DVD discs to block the
70. par ticularly if you are using the CVPD50 with your computer where an image such as a spreadsheet may remain on screen for a long period of time Burn in is also of concern when you are listening to audio CDs which have no visual information so that the CVPD50 s start up screen remains on You may wish to activate the Screen Standby function which places the screen in standby mode by pressing the Screen Selector A followed by the Screen Standby Button A Press the button again to restore the video display The following tips can help you avoid burn in Be particularly careful during the first 100 hours of use to display mainly moving images or frequently changing still images Use your display in full screen 16 9 format rather than letterbox black bars at top and bottom of screen or 4 3 black bars to left and right of screen Remember to activate your comput er s own screen saver when using it with the CVPD50 This also holds for a DVD player or other device con nected to the DVI input Even after the first 100 hours of use try to display moving images as much of the time as possible Switch off the display when it is not being used by pressing the Screen Standby Button A as described above Avoid increasing the contrast and brightness settings Whenever possible choose to display images containing a variety of colors and color shades 2 Although extreme care
71. plasma display onto it which may cause the installers to place the display s weight unevenly on the columns for a moment causing the glass base to snap which may result in personal injury It is the responsibility of the person installing the display to properly and securely mount the credenza stand to the plasma display Two people may now right the CVPD50 and carefully place it in the desired loca tion Do not lean the CVPD50 on the stand while righting it as this will cause the glass to snap possibly resulting in personal injury Carry the assembly by holding the bottom and sides of the CVPD50 plasma display itself not by holding the stand Figure 4 After the video cable has been connected to the CVPD50 as described below and after the speaker wire has been connected to the CVCEN50 speaker as described in its owner s manual you may carefully place the CVCEN5O speaker the cradle below the screen formed by the two top feet of the credenza stand The bottom of the grille will fit snugly behind the two stops at the front of the top feet Important Information About the CVPD50 Plasma Display Your new JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 high definition plasma display is capable of opening a new world of video enjoy ment with sharpness and beauty far beyond any television you have ever owned As this may be the first plasma display device you have ever owned it is important to be aware of some unique properties of this
72. post processing including scaling de interlacing and upconversion features of the CVR700 are only available when used with the CVPD50 When using the CVR700 with the CVPD50 display there is no need to use the CVR700 s component video outputs All video signals including those from the internal DVD changer as well as those originating with external source devices are upconverted to the digital format uti lized by the single proprietary interface cable between the CVR700 and the CVPD50 High Definition Television HDTV HDTV is a form of digital television that advances picture quality by leaps and bounds over conventional analog televi sion HDTV signals are broadcast in a dig ital format that compresses the signal allowing far more information to be sent Broadcasters take advantage of the addi tional bandwidth by offering high resolu tion images containing millions more pix els than an analog picture the end result being an image so sharp it looks more like a photograph than television The resolution of a digital video signal can vary depending on the number of pix els used and whether the image frames are interlaced or progressive Conventional television uses interlaced frames in which first the odd horizontal pixels are scanned then all of the even pixels are scanned to display one frame Progressive scanning as described below displays all of the horizontal lines of pixels in one pass These are
73. special functions that may be activated by pressing and holding par ticular buttons rather than pressing and releasing One such function is the All On Off power function To turn on the CVR700 CVPD50 display screen and other devices programmed into the remote press and hold the Power All On Button EB until all units turn on The LED inside the CVR700 s Main Power On Off Button El will turn orange to confirm that the unit is on and the Information Display will also light The CVPD50 will turn on and display the JBL logo screen Using the On Screen Display When making the following adjustments you may find it easier to use the on screen display system These easy to read displays give you a clear picture of the current status of the unit and make it easy to see which selection you are making To view the on Screen menus make certain that you have made a connection to the CVPD50 from the Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 Screen Port on the rear panel of the CVR700 The CVR700 s on screen menus are not available when a component video source device is in use unless the corre sponding S video connection has been made to the CVR700 The on screen menus are not available at all when the DVI HDCP Computer Video Input is in use If you attempt to use the on screen menus the DVI video input will be tem porarily lost IMPORTANT NOTES n order to access the on screen menus for the CVR700 s audio section make sure
74. status a variety of messages will appear here In normal operation this line will show the current input source and identify whether an analog or digital input is in use When the tuner is selected as the input this line will identify the station as AM or FM and show the frequency and preset number if any Progressive Scan Indicator This indicator lights when the CVR700 s progressive scan component video output is activated Aspect Ratio Indicators The aspect ratio of the incoming video signal will light These indicators are informa tional only and reflect the aspect ratio information provided by the DVD disc itself You may need or wish to make manual adjustments to display the images so that they fill the screen or if you prefer to avoid any scaling or crop ping of the images you may wish to let terbox the image See pages 13 and 27 for more information on adjusting the CVPD50 display to compensate for vari ous aspect ratio issues 20 CVR700 REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS QIO O OIOQO O SIDE SURROUNDS 7 1 T eack SURROUNDS IT R SURROUNDS 51 L CENTER R FRONT IL Q42 PREOUT ANALOG AUDIO 00 Four IN r1 CAUTION oul w Ne em Leer o T ScRENONY SHOCK HAZARD NOT OPEN RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE
75. technology A plasma display works by using a grid containing millions of cells each filled with phosphorous that glows in red green or blue when it receives an electri cal charge The charge is supplied by a wired grid that allows the video process ing logic to pinpoint each individual cell to determine whether or not to turn it The cells are sandwiched by glass plates that seal the phosphorous in place The combination of cells known as pixels in video display terminology when prop erly functioning can present a color pic ture with incredibly high resolution Given its construction the CVPD50 is very fragile and requires extreme care in han dling Once installed it s easy to use although there are a few points for you to be aware of 1 It is possible for a phenomenon known as burn in to occur when the phos phorous cells remain turned on for too long a stretch of time This is liable to occur when a still image such as a menu screen or even the CVPD50 s own start up screen remains on screen for more than a few minutes In order to protect against burn in the CVPD505 screen saver will be activated after it detects 2 minutes of no move ment on screen It is not possible to disable the screen saver However the screen saver does not function for the DVI source Therefore it is crucial that you set your source device to activate its screen saver after 2 minutes of inactivity on screen
76. television programs Contrast This setting is also known as white level and is most easilv set using a test pattern containing a gravscale monochrome bars in different shades of black grav and white Adjust this setting between 64 and 63 to the point just before the brightest bars of your test pattern start to bleed into the surrounding black background If you do not have a test pattern adjust it to the lowest level where all shades of a given color remain visible Brightness This setting is also known as black level and it should be adjusted using a PLUGE pattern found on a test disc Adjust this setting between 64 and 63 to the lowest point where one of the moving lines in the black field remains visible but before both disap pear If you do not have a test pattern adjust it so that typical video picture has about the same appearance as the surroundings in the room hat way the eye is relaxed when watching the TV pic ture This setting may be reduced when the surrounding light is dimmed thereby usually improving the sharpness signifi cantly Sharpness This temperature bar and numerical value ranging from 0 to 4 reflect the sharpness of the picture Due to the pixel structure of video images lowering the sharpness setting will tend to improve the quality of the picture Color This temperature bar and numerical value ranging from 0 to 31 reflect the saturation of the color Decreasing th
77. the common digital video formats 480i The picture is 704 x 480 pixels sent at 60 interlaced frames per sec ond 30 complete frames per second 480p The picture is 704 x 480 pixels sent at 60 complete frames per second e 720p The picture is 1280 x 720 pix els sent at 60 complete frames per second e 1080i The picture is 1920 x 1080 pixels sent at 60 interlaced frames per second 30 complete frames per second 1080p The picture is 1920 x 1080 pixels sent at 60 complete frames per second The p and i designations stand for progressive and interlaced The 480p and 480i when digital formats are called the SD standard definition formats and 480i is the digital equivalent of a normal analog TV picture When ana log TV shows are upconverted and broad cast on digital TV stations they are broadcast in 480p or 480i The 720p 1080i and 1080p formats are HD high definition formats When you hear about HDTV this is what is being discussed a digital signal in the 720p 1080i or 1080p format If your HD source allows you to choose a picture resolution set it to 720p which works best with the CVR700 and CVPD50 Strictly speaking the 480p format is con sidered ED enhanced definition However the JBL Cinema Vision system processes 480p signals as high definition and when referring to high definition signals we will be talking about 480p or better images JPEG Fil
78. the machine is capable of doing so If your external DVD player has the DTS Digital Out logo but does not trigger DTS playback in the CVR700 change the player s settings in the Audio or Bitstream configuration menu so that DTS playback is enabled The method for doing this will vary with ach player In some cases the proper menu choice will be Original while in others it will be DTS Consult the owner s manual for your player to find the specific information to find the proper setting CD Selecting a Digital Source To use either digital mode you must have properly connected a digital source to the CVR700 Connect the digital outputs from external DVD players HDTV receivers satellite systems or CD players to the Optical or Coaxial Inputs AZA In order to provide a backup signal and a source for analog stereo recording the analog outputs provided on digital source equipment should also be connected to the corresponding inputs on the CVR700 rear panel e g connect the analog stereo audio output from a digital recorder to the Digital Recorder Inputs on the rear panel when vou connect the source s digital outputs If you have not already configured an nput for a digital source using the on Screen menus as shown on page 46 first select the desired input using the remote or front panel controls as outlined in this manual Next press the Audio Input Button and then using the A V Na
79. this procedure while in scan mode to cycle through these scan speeds 2x 4x 16x 100x 2x and so forth Press and release the button while scanning to skip tracks or chapters To stop searching you must press the Play Button 8 the Pause Button P the Stop Button EJ or the other Search Button EJ E Front Panel Optical Digital Audio Input Connect the optical digital output of an audio or video product to this jack EN Front Panel Coaxial Digital Audio Input Connect the coaxial digital output of an audio or video product to this jack EH Tuner Band Selector Play Button The function of this button varies depend ing on whether you have selected the tuner or the disc changer as the source When the tuner is the source pressing this button will switch between the AM and FM frequency bands See page 64 for more information on the tuner When the disc changer is the source pressing this button will prompt you to enter the number of the disc you wish to play corresponding to the drawer in which the disc is loaded You may select a disc either by pressing one of the Disc Selectors E numbered 1 through 5 or by pressing the Numeric Keys Ay numbered 1 through 5 on either remote control If you don t select a disc number within 5 seconds the CVR700 will play the last disc that was selected If the disc is an MP3 or WMA disc each press of this button will expand the current folder until a file is located and t
80. to play of the signal currently being received by the PVR See the PVR s owner s manual for more information T2 Remote Menu PIP Channel Up Button This button s function differs depending on whether it is pressed when a picture in picture source is in use In System mode this button accesses the menu system for the remote control enabling you to program product codes use the EzSet speaker calibration system record macros rename functions and perform other functions as described on pages 76 through 91 When used with a compatible device whose video output has been connected to the Picture in Picture Composite Video Input pressing this button changes the channel of the PIP device to the next higher one It has no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50 DVD Setup PIP On Off PIP Swap Button This button s function differs depending on whether it is used with the internal DVD changer or with a source whose video output has been connected to the Picture in Picture Composite Video Input 9 When used with the DVD changer this button accesses the DVD setup menu and enables you to configure the DVD changer When used in Screen mode with a PIP source connected press this button once to turn on the PIP function and again to turn it off Pressing and holding this but ton for several seconds causes the main source to appear in the PIP inset display and the PIP source to appear in the main display Pressing and
81. try programming the button again When the remote prompts you to press and hold the key on the original remote again by show ing the display shown in Figure 69 immediately press the button on the source remote again To avoid anoth er failed attempt make certain that the windows on the two remotes are facing one another Continue to hold the button on the original remote until the LCD display changes again If the code was suc cessfully learned you will see the display shown in Figure 70 In that case go to Step 9 If the CODE FAILED display Fig 71 appears again you may either try to program the key again or press the A Navigation Button to stop the process It is possible that some remotes may use code sequences or infrared frequencies that are not com patible with the CVR700R2 remote and those codes cannot be learned When the display shown in Figure 72 appears press the Set Button to exit the Learning system CODE FAILED EXIT Figure 72 When a code has been learned suc cessfully you have three options When the display shown in Figure 70 is on the LCD screen on the remote you may press the Set Button to learn additional codes from the but tons on a original source remote into the CVR700R2 remote Follow Steps 4 through 6 as often as needed to com plete the code learning process If you wish to change the name that appears in the LCD display when the button that has
82. unit on press the System Selector A to set the remote control to the CVR700 functions Press the DVD Input Selector A to control the internal DVD CD changer To turn the unit off at the end of a listen ing session simply press the Main Power On Off Control the front panel or the Power Off Button Ay on the remote You may also press and hold the Power Off All Button to turn off any external source units The LED indicator in the center of the Main Power On Off Control El will turn red and the LED on the front of the CVPD50 will turn amber When the remote is used to turn the unit off it is actually placing the system in a Standby mode as indicated by the red color of the LED on the CVR700 and the amber color of the LED on the CVPD50 To program the CVR700 for automatic turn off press the Sleep Button on the remote Each press of the button will decrease the time before shut down in the following sequence 90 minutes 80 minutes 70 minutes 60 min utes 50 minutes 40 minutes 30 minutes 20 minutes 10 minutes Sleep Timer Off The sleep time will be displayed in the Lower Display Line A and it will count down until the time has elapsed When the programmed sleep time has elapsed the system will automatically turn off The CVR700 s front panel display will dim to one half brightness when the Sleep function is programmed To cancel the Sleep function press and hold the Sleep Button
83. use To adjust the subwoofer output you must use an external source following the instructions on page 64 Manual Output Level Adjustment Output levels may also be adjusted man ually either to set them to a specific level with an SPL meter or to make fine tuning adjustments to the levels obtained using the EzSet remote In order to adjust the subwoofer s output level you must use the manual adjustment method Manual output level adjustment may be performed using either the on screen SPEAKER LEVELS submenu or using the main remote control Using the On Screen Menu System With the SPEAKERS submenu on screen scroll down to the LEVEL S line and press the Set Button The SPEAKER LEVELS submenu Figure 27 will appear of the values should be set at dB If not you may wish to scroll down to the RESET THESE SETTINGS line and press the Set Button A effect the reset SPEAKER LEVELS x BERONT LEFT O dB CENTER dB FRONT RIGHT dB SIDE SURR RIGH dB BACK SURR RIGHT dB BACK SURR LEFT U dB SIDE SURR LEFT D dB SUBUOOFER dB RESET THESE SETTINGS TEST TONE OFF BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU Figure 27 Scroll down to the TEST TONE line and use the lt gt Navigation Controls A so that ON appears The inter nal test tone will begin to circulate from speaker to speaker in a clockwise direc tion and will be heard from all speakers in turn playing for two seconds in each spea
84. used to simplify the setup and adjustment of the CVR700 by using a series of on screen menus The factory default setting for these menus leaves them on the screen for 20 seconds after a period of inactivity before they disappear from the screen Time Out Time Out is a safety measure to prevent image retention of the menu text in your video display which might happen if it were left on indefinitely This is of particular concern for plasma displays such as the CVPD50 However some viewers may prefer a slightly longer or shorter period before the on screen dis play disappears With the ADVANCED SETTINGS submenu on screen scroll down to the OSD TIMEOUT line Use the lt p gt Navigation Controls A to select a timeout period of 20 30 40 or 50 sec onds Your selection will be retained even after the unit is powered off NOTE The CVR700 and CVPD50 also use a screen saver function as an additional safety measure to prevent burnout which may even occur if the CVPD50 s own start up display is left on screen for too long a period of time After 2 minutes during which no on screen movement is detected the screen saver will appear Simply press any key on either remote or on the CVR700 s front panel to wake the system and return it to normal operation The screen saver time out is not adjustable Important The screen saver is not available for devices connected to the DVI Computer source input due to the nature of the digital
85. way but the outer edges are cropped sacrificing a slight amount of the original content in exchange for 100 accurate image pro portions 4 3 HDTV TO 16 9 As HDTV is new to the broadcast industry and there is still a lot of older 4 3 standard recording and broadcast equipment in use 4 3 material is sometimes broadcast in HD 16 9 for mat with black or other color bars on its sides Since these bars are a part of the actual picture conventional picture resiz ing techniques do not work in eliminating them This setting is specifically designed to address this problem It first crops the bars off of the sides of the 16 9 picture to render it a 4 3 picture and then performs a natural looking nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16 9 screen 4 3 This mode may be used with pro grams that are known to be in the 4 3 aspect ratio The image s original aspect ratio is preserved unaltered and black bars will appear on the left and right sides of the image to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 aspect ratio screen The difference between the Frame and Letterbox functions is that the Frame function allows access to the 4 3 and 4 3 TO 16 9 NL modes which are mainly useful for materials originating in the 4 3 format NOTE The Letterbox and Frame func tions are not available with the internal DVD CD changer unless the DVD Auto Resize function has been turned off using the screen setup menus See page 57 for more information
86. will appear connecting the SBL and SBR channels to reflect that the same signal is being out putted through both back surround chan nels The line will disappear when a 7 1 channel mode such as Logic 7 is in use At this time there are no 7 1 channel dig ital formats available Night Mode A special feature of Dolby Digital is the Night mode which enables specially encoded Dolby Digital input sources to be played back with full digital intelligibility while reducing the minimum peak level by 1 4 to 1 3 This prevents abruptly loud transitions from disturbing others without reducing the impact of the digital source The Night mode is available only when Dolby Digital signals with special data are being played The Night mode may be engaged when a Dolby Digital DVD is playing by pressing the Night Mode Button Ay on the remote Next press the A W Navigation Button A to select either the middle range or full compres sion versions of the Night mode To turn the Night mode off press the A W Navigation Button until the message in the lower third of the video display and in the Lower Display Line 3 reads NIGHT MODE OFF The Night mode may also be selected to always be on at either level of compres sion using the options in the DOLBY SURROUND menu See page 47 for information on using the menus to set this option MP3 and WMA Compressed Audio Playback The CVR700 is one of the few audio video componen
87. with the CVR700 you may connect the analog audio output available on virtu ally all computers to one of the analog audio inputs using an optional adaptor cable that converts the stereo mini plug commonly used for computer audio connections to the left right RCA jacks used on the CVR700 Connecting your computer to the CVR700 will enable you to take advantage of the high quality audio reproduction possi ble with a home theater system as well as enable the use of surround pro cessing modes such as Logic 7 to greatly enhance downloaded or streaming audio playback IMPORTANT NOTES ON DIGITAL PLAYBACK When the digital playback source is stopped or in a pause fast forward or search mode digital audio data will momentarily stop and the channel position letters inside the Speaker Channel Input Indicators will flash This is normal and does not indi cate a problem with either the CVR700 or the source machine The CVR700 will return to digital playback as soon as the data is available Some source devices particularly cable set top boxes will switch back and forth between digital and analog audio outputs depending on the channel being watched To avoid losing sound with this type of product it is recom mended that you connect both the digi tal and analog audio outputs of the source to the CVR70O with the digital audio input set as the default following the steps shown on page 46 If the dig ital data stream is i
88. 0 Zoom Feature 48 Speaker Configuration 71 CD Playback 48 Configuring Speaker Sizes 7 Audio CD Playback Features 49 Speaker Crossover Configuration 71 Selecting Track 50 Speaker Distances 71 CD Status Bar 50 Output Level Adjustment 71 Video Off Feature 51 Using EzSet 72 MP3 WMA Playback 51 Manual Output Level Adjustment 72 MP3 or WMA Disc Playback 52 Advanced Settings 73 JPEG Playbac 52 Front Panel Brightness 74 VCD Playback 52 Volume Default 74 Using the Status Bar for VCD Playback 53 Main Menu Timeout 74 Playback Control 53 Fan Speed 75 Programmed Play 53 Lip Sync 76 Programming the CVR700R2 Remote 53 DVD Setup 76 Programming Product Codes 54 Parental Control 76 Preprogrammed Code Entry 55 Screen Setup TI Automatic Code Entry 55 Inputs and Picture in Picture Settings 78 Learning Commands 56 Picture Settings 79 Changing Devices 57 Display Settings 80 Macro Programming 57 Advanced Settings Menu 81 Recording a Macro 58 4 3 Scaling 81 Preprogrammed Macros 58 Information Menu 82 Erasing a Macro 59 Basic Operation 82 Read a Macro 59 Turning the CVR700 and CVPD50 On or Off 83 Punch Through Configuration 59 Source Selection 83 Volume Punch Through 59 Volume Control 83 Channel Control Punch Through 60 Surround Mode Selection 84 Transport Control Punch Through 60 Digital Audio Playback 84 EzSet Configuration 60 Dolby Digital 85 Renaming 60 DTS 85 Renaming a Device 61 Selecting a Digital Source 86 Renaming Individual Buttons 61 Digital Bitstream and
89. 00 s audio section it is neces sary to also connect the corresponding 43 44 Cable Satellite Analog S Video Input B in order to view the CVR700 s audio on screen menu system Digital Recorder Source Input If you have a personal video recorder PVR such as a TiVo we recommend that you connect it to the Digital Recorder DR source input and output jacks Alternatively use the Digital Recorder source for a DVD Recorder a CD recorder a MiniDisc recorder a tape deck or any other audio or A V recording device Select either the Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital Audio Input or the Digital Recorder Optical Digital Audio Input for your digital audio connection but not both and connect the appropriate digital audio output on the recorder to the corresponding digital audio input If desired connect the ana log audio outputs of the recorder to the Digital Recorder Analog Inputs For PVRs and DVD recorders connect the component video outputs to the Digital Recorder Component Video Inputs Note that there are no corresponding component video outputs as copy pro tection measures incorporated in most devices prohibit recording component video signals due to their high quality Alternatively you may connect the com posite or S video outputs of your recorder to the Digital Recorder Analog S Video Input but note that a separate source is available for analog VCRs Connect either the Coaxial Digital Audio Ou
90. 00 will switch to the source device connected to the AUX inputs If you have programmed the device s remote control codes the device will be turned on and the play command will be transmitted to it co CD Press and hold the Game Cam Selector Ay and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the Game Cam inputs If you have programmed the device s remote control codes the play command will be transmitted to it Note that for video game consoles and cam corders there are no power on or off commands Therefore only the Play command or start stop com mand for camcorders will be transmitted 93 94 g Press and hold the DVI Comp Selector 4h and the CVR700 will Switch to the source device connected to the DVI inputs If you have pro grammed the device s remote control codes the device will be turned on and the play command will be trans mitted to it 3 The Screen Saver Button 4h is activated while in screen mode by pressing and holding that button until the screen saver image appears on the CVPD5O screen 4 The PIP Swap Button is activ ated while in screen mode by pressing and holding that button until the video source in the picture in picture frame swaps position with the main video Source 25 EJ 4 ow t8 11811 y YAYA GA sel 8 8 8 8 J 2 EJ 5 8 S e S 8 ae
91. 069 SONY 043 055 067 075 085 116 117 130 136 SOUNDESIGN 003 011 033 045 SPECTRICON 103 SUPREMACY 002 SYLVANIA 001 003 011 060 061 064 065 145 148 SYMPHONIC 039 TANDY 057 063 077 TATUNG 057 063 077 TECHWOOD 011 TEKNIKA 001 003 011 033 045 069 092 094 132 TELERENT 069 TERA 007 011 TMK 007 011 THOMSON 047 048 TOSHIBA 013 021 035 042 052 063 092 102 108 109 112 113 114 119 TOTEVISION 132 UNIVERSAL 014 015 VIDEO CONCEPTS 008 VIDTECH 011 WARDS 011 014 015 033 061 065 132 148 YAMAHA 001 011 YORK 011 045 YUPITERU 011 045 ZENITH 069 070 090 094 103 ZONDA 069 070 090 094 103 99 CVR700R1 HDTV SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List LG 960 MOTOROLA 961 RCA 957 SAMSUNG 959 ZENITH 958 CVR7OO0R1 VCR SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List AIWA 181 AKAI 173 199 201 259 260 277 AMPRO 227 285 ASA 227 285 ANAM 190 221 AUDIO DYNAMICS 163 195 199 CANDLE 285 286 288 CANON 185 190 221 286 291 CITIZEN 285 CRAIG 154 196 267 CURTIS MATHES 190 221 DAEWOO 163 165 168 220 249 253 254 X DUAL 169 195 199 DYNATECH 191 208 ELECTROHOME 214 EMERSON 174 182 186 193 201 238 263 FISHER 154 167 168 191 293 FUNAI 154 167 168 191 293 GE 190 218 221 227 244
92. 20Hz to 20kHz and offers dramati cally improved dynamic range and signifi cant improvements to signal to noise ratios In addition digital systems have the capability to deliver an additional channel that is specifically devoted to low fre quency information This is the 1 chan nel referred to when you see these sys tems described as 5 1 6 1 or 7 1 The bass channel is separate from the other channels but since it is intentionally bandwidth limited sound designers have given it that unique designation Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a standard part of DVD available on specially encoded LD discs and satellite broadcasts and is a part of the high definition television HDTV system An optional external RF demodulator is required to use the CVR700 to listen to the Dolby Digital soundtracks available on laser discs Connect the RF output of the LD player to the demodulator and then connect the digital output of the demodulator to the Optical or Coaxial Inputs of the CVR700 corresponding to the source e g AUX you wish to use for your LD player No demodulator is required for use with DVD players or DTS encoded laser discs The CVR700 s internal DVD CD changer will automatically detect and play any Dolby DVD loaded into it and no external connections need to be made However the CVR700 is not capable of playing a aser disc and an external LD player must be connected to the CVR700 DTS DTS is a di
93. 238 293 SHARP 156 208 221 280 SONY 154 166 167 207 211 212 213 231 232 233 SOUNDESIGN 181 STS 170 SYLVANIA 190 191 214 221 222 SYMPHONIC 181 TANDY 168 191 TASHICO 285 TATUNG 195 199 TEAC 191 195 199 TECHNICS 190 221 TEKNIKA 190 191 221 238 THOMAS 181 TMK 181 TOSHIBA 155 170 198 202 214 236 249 263 283 TOTEVISION 196 238 UNITECH 196 VECTOR RESEARCH 169 VICTOR 203 VIDEOSONIC 196 VIDEO CONCEPTS 169 191 201 WARDS 154 170 174 190 191 196 208 209 263 YAMAHA 169 191 195 199 ZENITH 183 191 203 211 213 227 234 238 CVR7OOR1 CD SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List ADCOM 804 818 824 AIWA 827 866 873 911 925 AKAI 805 939 AUDIOACCESS 880 AUDIOFILE 776 AUDIO TECHNICA 808 BSR 799 CALIFORNIA AUDIO 710 864 CARVER 812 891 895 896 898 899 900 940 941 CROWN 797 DENON 782 942 943 EMERSON 804 807 FISHER 778 810 812 823 FUNAI 881 HARMAN KARDON 756 780 795 806 809 821 825 831 835 838 842 843 848 850 851 945 HITACHI 804 JENSEN 908 JVC 931 950 951 KENWOOD 769 778 785 817 833 834 903 906 931 933 LG GOLDSTAR 771 LUXMAN 773 790 832 857 MAGNAVOX 794 868 MARANTZ 798 813 839 946 947 948 MCINTOSH 949 MGA 787 MITSUBISHI 787 MITSUMI 907 NAD 768 829 952 953 NAKAMICHI 757 954 955 NEC 824 NIKKO 808 810 ONKYO 759 760 792 7
94. 275 278 GO VIDEO 264 268 HARMAN KARDON 169 200 HITACHI 162 191 199 218 269 281 INSTANT REPLAY 190 221 JCL 190 198 221 JENSEN 190 198 271 JC PENNEY 169 170 190 196 221 238 JVC 169 190 199 203 205 210 215 262 281 283 KENWOOD 171 195 199 203 LG GOLDSTAR 1659 170 177 238 243 258 LLOYD 170 171 191 238 LX 170 171 191 238 MAGIN 196 MAGNAVOX 190 191 221 222 223 MARANTZ 169 190 221 222 224 MARTA 238 MATSUI 238 MEI 190 MEMOREX 154 168 171 190 191 208 227 238 266 271 MGA 200 201 214 MTC 200 201 214 MINOLTA 170 177 MITSUBISHI 170 176 177 200 201 204 206 214 216 282 296 MOTOROLA 172 175 MULTITECH 181 NAD 290 281 NATIONAL 290 281 NEC 169 195 199 203 NORDMENDE 199 OPTIMUS 159 OPTONICA 208 209 PANASONIC 164 187 188 221 265 276 PENTAX 170 177 190 218 221 PHILCO 190 191 221 222 PHILIPS 190 191 209 221 222 226 238 PILOT 238 PIONEER 170 178 203 PROSCAN 180 181 PULSAR 221 QUARTZ 171 QUASAR 190 221 230 276 295 RADIO SHACK 153 158 159 160 161 258 285 288 291 RCA 157 164 170 177 218 244 275 276 278 102 Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List REALISTIC 153 154 160 168 171 208 203 238 288 293 RUNCO 213 278 RICO 213 278 SALORA 171 SAMSUNG 184 189 196 239 241 244 249 256 257 260 SANSUI 179 198 203 287 SANYO 154 165 168 171 266 SCOTT 174 249 263 SEARS 154 167 168 170 171 177 221 228
95. 32 LODGENET 013 021 069 077 145 148 LXI 013 021 069 077 145 148 LUXMAN 011 069 LOGIK 011 069 MAGNAV0X 001 003 011 060 061 065 118 132 145 148 MARANTZ 001 074 148 MATSUI 001 074 148 MEMOREX 011 013 069 METZ 011 013 069 MGA 001 011 033 044 050 068 074 MIDLAND 001 011 033 044 050 068 074 MITSUBISHI 001 006 008 011 033 042 044 095 100 115 MOTOROLA 093 NAD 021 031 045 NIKEI 021 031 045 NATIONAL 036 Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List NEC 001 013 022 025 042 057 121 123 125 ONKING 045 ONWA 045 OPTONICA 025 077 080 081 082 083 084 ORION 025 077 080 081 082 083 084 PANASONIC 036 038 057 087 120 148 PENNEY 068 PHILCO 001 003 011 045 060 061 065 118 132 148 PHILIPS 001 003 011 040 060 067 088 132 145 148 PIONEER 001 011 024 029 031 032 086 089 PORTLAND 011 132 PROSCAN 011 030 058 122 132 133 PROTON 011 030 059 122 132 133 QUASAR 038 057 087 RADIO SHACK 011 025 045 048 056 062 066 118 132 RCA 001 009 011 026 029 057 071 098 133 145 REALISTIC 013 025 045 048 056 062 066 RUNCO 004 005 SAA 011 045 SSS 011 045 SAMPO 001 059 011 SAMSUNG 051 082 096 104 107 011 118 128 132 145 SANYO 013 027 037 041 054 058 078 081 SCOTT 011 033 045 132 SEARS 011 021 026 033 058 132 145 148 SHARP 006 011 020 025 028 033 034 077 099 132 SIGNATURE
96. 4 128Ji 2810 z NIVIN ALGH W3LSAS 38 5 1VS 19 tAd OAIL NV 3Av9 SHAG 9 09 UJA INV INA 3INVN NOLLOS ON 98 CVR7OOR1 TV SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List AKAI 001 070 008 AMPRO 001 070 008 AMSTRAD 001 011 103 AOC 001 011 103 ANAM 045 057 103 106 122 AMARK 103 132 ADMIRAL 103 132 CANDLE 001 002 003 011 CAPEHART 059 CENTURION 070 CENTRONIC 045 CITIZEN 001 002 003 011 045 092 094 132 CLASSIC 045 CONCERTO 011 CONTEC 041 045 051 052 CORONADO 132 CRAIG 045 CROWN 045 132 CXC 045 132 CURTIS MATHES 001 011 092 132 DAEWOO 011 022 038 045 046 094 097 105 111 118 132 DAYTRON 011 132 DIGI LINK 073 DYNASTY 045 DYNATECH 063 ELECTROHOME 074 132 EMERSON 001 010 012 033 045 052 132 141 FISHER 013 033 045 058 FUNAI 013 033 045 058 FUTURETECH 045 GE 001 011 014 015 026 057 068 098 141 GRUNDIG 053 HALL MARK 011 HARMAN KARDON 076 HITACHI 001 011 015 016 017 018 029 072 132 INFINITY 148 INKEL 148 JENSEN 019 148 JC PENNEY 001 011 014 015 035 092 132 145 JVC 038 040 KAWASHO 045 KEC 045 KENWOOD 001 010 045 079 132 KTV 001 010 045 079 132 KLOSS 002 060 132 KMC 002 060 132 LG GOLDSTAR 011 101 103 104 110 118 128 1
97. 50 INCH HIGH DEFINITION PLASMA DISPLAY CVR700 HIGH PERFORMANCE AUDIO VIDEO RECEIVER VIDEO PROCESSOR OPTICAL DISC CHANGER OWNER S GUIDE JBL CINEMA VISION SYSTEM JBL CINEMA VISION SVSTEM CVPD50 HIGH DEFINITION PLASMA DISPLAY AND CVR700 CONTROL CENTER WITH AUDIO VIDEO RECEIVER VIDEO PROCESSOR AND OPTICAL DISC CHANGER 4 Important Safety Precautions 63 Night Mode 5 Introduction 63 MP3 and WMA Compressed Audio Playback 7 Safety Information 64 Tuner Operation 10 Whats Included 64 Station Selection 12 Disc Formats Supported by This Player 64 Preset Tuning 13 Terminology 64 Recording 16 CVR700 Front Panel Controls 64 Output Level Trim Adjustment 19 CVR700 Front Panel Information Display 65 Memory Backup 20 CVR700 Rear Panel Connections 66 Optical Disc Changer Playback Basics 24 CVR700R2 Remote Control Functions 66 Loading Discs 32 CVR700R1 Remote Control Functions 66 Status Bar 39 Installing and Connecting the Equipment 67 Selecting a Disc for Playback 39 Recommended Placement 67 JBL On Screen Library 39 Wall Mounting the CVPD50 Plasma Display 68 Transport Controls Playing a Disc 39 Installing the CVPD50 Plasma Display on the Included 68 Random Play Credenza Stand 69 Repeat Play 40 Important Safety Notes 69 Repeat A B 40 Important Information About the CVPD50 Plasma Display 70 DVD Playback 42 Basic Installation 70 Using a DVD s Menu 45 System Configuration 70 Notes on DVD Audio Discs 46 Source Configuration 7
98. 534 555 565 582 605 ECHOSTAR 509 510 543 567 598 599 600 601 609 614 630 ELECTRO HOME 595 EUROPLUS 618 FUJITSU 527 531 532 537 GENERALINSTRUMENT 506 511 514 526 548 568 575 606 HITACHI DBS 512 HOUSTON TRACKER 543 HUGHES 619 HYTEK 562 JANIEL 569 JERROLD 511 545 548 570 KATHREIN 613 LEGEND 510 LG 646 LUXOR 571 MACOM 520 568 572 573 574 MAGNAVOX 540 566 MEMOREX 510 NEXTWAVE 510 627 NORSAT 576 577 OPTIMUS 547 PANASONIC 549 569 PANASONIC DBS 513 PANSAT 623 PERSONAL CABLE 621 PHILIPS 5 8 PICO 610 PRESIDENT 529 607 PRIMESTAR 511 545 579 615 RCA 504 546 611 624 631 639 642 RCA DSS 516 REALISTIC 552 580 603 SAMSUNG 507 625 645 SATELLITE SERVICE CO 538 544 556 591 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 542 SONY 608 620 632 STARCAST 550 STAR CHOICE DBS 517 SUPER GUIDE 530 626 627 TEECOM 533 536 581 593 594 596 612 TOSHIBA 505 539 540 541 560 629 UNIDEN 526 535 539 554 557 584 585 602 604 606 ZENITH 588 589 590 597 622 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE Unit does not turn on Main Power Switch turned off No AC power e Standby pressed within 4 seconds after Main Power Switch Disc does not play Disc loaded improperly Incorrect disc type e Invalid Region Code Rating is above parental preset No picture e Intermittent connections e Wrong input e Progressive Scan output selected e Video Off feature active e Incompatibilitv between DVI source unit and CVR700 e Port need
99. 78 791 PHILIPS 779 785 792 795 PROSCAN 787 RCA 787 795 REPLAY TV 776 778 780 793 794 SONIC BLUE 778 780 SONY 775 781 788 789 790 791 792 105 106 CVR7OOR1 CABLE SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List ABC 303 305 313 347 350 354 361 412 ALLEGRO 413 AMERICAST 369 ANTRONIX 323 ARCHER 314 316 323 333 414 BELCOR 415 CABLE STAR 335 415 CENTURION 394 CENTURY 316 CITIZEN 316 413 COLOUR VOICE 371 392 COMBANO 385 386 COMTRONICS 328 339 DIAMOND 332 DIGI 416 EAGLE 329 339 348 488 EASTERN 365 368 372 417 ELECTRICORD 341 EMERSON 414 FOCUS 418 GC ELETRONICS 415 GE 378 GEMINI 317 331 334 362 GENERAL 312 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 470 GOLDEN CHANNEL 339 GOODMIND 414 GI 303 305 313 317 319 394 395 398 399 HAMLIN 309 310 357 358 363 394 401 403 419 477 HITACHI 303 363 490 HOSPITALITY 376 382 JASCO 413 JERROLD 303 304 305 313 318 375 395 397 398 399 LINDSAY 420 MACOM 342 493 MAGNAVOX 319 321 370 384 MEMOREX 360 MOTOROLA 470 MOVIE TIME 337 341 M NET 345 NSC 324 337 346 377 492 OAK 325 340 345 361 396 498 499 PACE 481 PANASONIC 352 355 380 478 479 491 PANTHER 416 PARAGON 360 PHILIPS 315 321 322 329 371 387 392 PIONEER 303 311 343 359 421 473 502 POPULAR MECHANICS 418 POST NEWS WEEK 325
100. 93 800 801 926 930 OPTIMUS 775 781 791 820 844 845 846 847 859 PANASONIC 761 770 830 864 874 913 938 PHILIPS 767 794 893 904 PIONEER 784 855 867 878 886 915 916 917 PROTON 772 QUASAR 770 864 RADIO SHACK 782 881 RCA 779 804 836 905 REALISTIC 812 813 859 860 SAMSUNG 783 SANSUI 802 836 889 912 927 SANYO 788 812 823 837 923 SHARP 775 813 828 860 869 906 914 922 935 936 SHERWOOD 758 796 813 860 888 SONY 765 781 815 858 870 871 873 887 894 918 SOUNDSTREAM 879 SYMPHONIC 814 865 TEAC 766 803 813 841 861 862 865 876 892 901 THETA DIGITAL 794 TOSHIBA 768 829 852 906 910 928 YAMAHA 774 786 808 816 890 103 CVR700R1 CDR SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List BANG OLUFSEN 257 DENON 261 HARMAN KARDON 262 KENWOOD 260 PHILIPS 259 SONY 258 CVR7O0OR1 DVD SETUP CODES Maker Brand Name Code Number 3 Digit List APEX DIGITAL 715 730 BRAVO 734 735 CALIFORNIA AUDIO 694 DENON 656 673 676 688 705 DVD VIDEO 728 GE 657 658 HARMAN KARDON 655 686 720 JBL 655 JVC 660 KENWOOD 661 704 723 KLH 722 LG GOLDSTAR 659 709 718 724 737 MAGNAVOX 687 710 MARANTZ 687 713 MITSUBISHI 677 690 NAD 664 716 ONKYO 663 669 702 OPTIMUS 665 704 PANASONIC 678 679 684 688 689 698 706 732 PHILIPS 687 710 PIONEER 664 666 674 692 695 700 719 PROCEED 714 PROSCAN 657 658 6891 RCA 657
101. BACK SURROUNDS which are set to NONE as the factory default system configuration is for a 5 1 channel system NOTE This setting is not affected by changing the System Configuration setting see Figure 7 In order to benefit from full 7 1 channel operation you must change both the System Configuration setting and you must enable the Back Surround speakers in the SPEAKER CONFIGURATION AND BASS MANAGER submenu Figure 21 Begin the speaker setup process by mak ing certain that the cursor is pointing at the FRONT line which sets the config uration for the front left and right speak ers If you wish to make a change to the front speakers configuration press the lt gt Navigation Controls A so that either LARGE or SMALL appears matching the appropriate description from these definitions When SMALL is selected low fre quency sounds will be sent only to the subwoofer output If you choose this option and there is no subwoofer con nected you will not hear any low fre quency sounds from the front channels When L ARGE is selected a full range output will be sent to the front left and front right outputs Only LFE channel infor mation will be directed to the subwoofer When you have completed your selection for the front channel press the A W Navigation Controls to move the cursor to CENTER Press the 4 Navigation Controls A to select the option that best describes your sys tem based on these spe
102. CVPD50 display screen In DVD mode this button access es the menu on the current disc enabling you to select the main feature or accom panying featurettes for playback or make other selections depending on how the disc is programmed Memory Zoom Button When used with the tuner press this button to enter the currently tuned radio station into a desired preset location using the Alphanumeric Keys to select the preset location between the numbers 01 and 30 Press this button a second time to store your selection To recall that sta tion later select the tuner as the source then either use the Preset Up Down Buttons T 6 to scroll to the desired preset station or use the Alphanumeric Keys to directly enter the preset sta tion location In DVD Main mode this button may be used while a DVD Video disc is playing to zoom the picture so that it is enlarged There are four steps to the zoom function each progressively larger Continue press ing the button to cycle through the steps and return to the normal view Depending on the disc you may also be able to use the 4 W 4 P Navigation Controls to view different areas of the enlarged image G Alphanumeric Keys Select num bers by pressing these keys When renaming functions or devices on the remote these keys may be used to select letters Stereo Mode Movies Preset Button This button s function varies depending on whether the System or Screen
103. Connect the composite video output of a video device that you would like to have available for picture in picture PIP viewing using the JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen When the PIP function is activated the signal fed to this jack will appear within a small field over the main program visible on the plasma screen Except for the DVI Computer source the PIP view may also be available as a split screen Use the Screen menu system to configure the PIP view When the main source is HD com ponent video 480p or better the PIP function is not available The PIP source must be able to output composite video simultaneously with its main method of connection to the CVR700 If the PIP device is connected via its composite video output to a source input on the CVR700 a Y Cable will be required to connect to both the main source input jack and the PIP input Coaxial Digital Audio Output Connect this jack to the coaxial digital input of a DVD R RW DVD R RW CD R RW MiniDisc or other compatible digital recorder B Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input Connect the coax digital output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compatible computer sound card playing audio files or streams LD player or CD player to this jack The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to this jack This input is permanently assigne
104. Down controls when operating most TV sets VCRs or cable boxes The Channel Up Down indication is printed directly on the emote For many standard CD players cassette decks VCRs and DVD functions he standard function icons are printed on top of the buttons For some products however the function of a particular but on does not follow the command printed on the remote Even though the name of he function will appear on the lower line of the LCD Information Display when the button is pressed in order to conveniently see which function a button controls before you press it consult the Function List tables on pages 89 91 To use those tables first check the type of device being controlled e g TV VCR Next look at the remote control diagram in Figure 119 Note that each button has a number on it To find out what function a particular button has for a specific device find the button number on the Function List and then look in the column for the device you are controlling For example button number 37 is the Zoom button for the CVR700 s internal DVD changer but it is the Memory button for the tuner the 4100 button for many TVs VCRs HDTV tuners and PVRs and the Enter button for many video game con soles and D VHS players NOTE The numbers used to describe the button functions in Figure 119 for the pur poses of describing how a button oper ates are a different set of numbers than those used in the r
105. ED will flash four times in the bottom line of the remote s LCD display and then the display will return to its normal condi tion When that happens the macro is erased and the remote is returned to normal operation Read a Macro To check the commands stored in the remote s memory for one of the macro buttons follow these steps 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button f for about three seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button will 29 remain illuminated in red Press the A Navigation Button until MACRO appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 78 Press the Set Button to enter the main macro menu branch At the next menu screen press the Navigation Button until the bottom line in the remote s LCD display shows READ A MACRO Figure 86 Press the Set Button to begin the process of reading a macro MACRO READ A MACRO A Figure 86 The next display screen Figure 87 is where you select the macro to be read Press the A W Navigation Button f until the name of the macro you wish to read appears For this example we will read back the Micro 1 macro created in a previous section When the name of the macro to be
106. EF3 8 T U V 8 4 GHA 9 WXYZS9 5 JKL5 0 0 There is a limit of nine characters includ ing spaces for any new device or button name e Renaming a device changes the name of the device only not any of the indi vidual key functions within that device memory To change the name of an individual device follow the instruc tions in the next section Renaming Individual Buttons Thanks to the programming flexibility of the CVR700R2 remote an individual but ton on the remote may be assigned a fea ture or function that is different from the name that appears as the factory default when the button is pressed With the Rename Button function it is possible to rename almost any button on the remote so that when the button is pressed you will see a more descriptive or appropriate name displayed To rename a specific button on the remote follow these steps For instance this example will show you how to pro gram the remote so that FULL SCREEN appears in the remote s LCD display when you press the Tone Button while in CABLE mode to match the original cable remote Of course remember that you will first have to learn the codes for that function into the Exit button following the instructions shown on page 78 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Butt
107. ESSION When MAXIMUM COMPRESSION is highlighted a more severe compression algorithm will be applied We recommend that you select the MEDIUM setting as a starting point and change to the MAXIMUM setting later if desired The Night mode may also be adjusted directly any time a Dolby Digital source is playing by pressing the Night Mode Button 4h When the button is pressed D RANGE will appear in the lower third of the video screen and in the Lower Display Line Press the W Navigation Controls 2 within 3 seconds to select the desired setting DOLBY DIGITAL NIGHT MODE DOFF MEDIUM COMPRESSION MAXIMUM COMPRESSION BACK TO DVD VIDEO MENU Figure 18a No additional adjustments are available for the internal DVD CD changer as the SOURCE A R line of Figure 10 is automatically set to b and may not be adjusted However the video input and aspect ratio video screen for external sources may be adjusted Scroll to the VIDEO INPUT line to select a composite video S video or for the CABLE SAT DIGITAL RECORDER and GAME CAMERA sources only a component video input for each external source In addition scroll to the SOURCE line to specify whether the source uses a 16 9 or 4 3 aspect ratio or select auto detection The SOURCES menu also contains a RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS line that allows you to 47 48 reset that source to the factory default settings Speaker Configuration
108. Figure 64 will appear This means that the codes for the product you are trying to program are not in the remote library and you will have to learn them into the remote following the instructions shown in the next section Press the Remote Menu Button f as instructed to exit the programming process REACH END POINT PRESS REM KEY Figure 64 If the device being programmed does turn off after following the instruc tions in Step 7 you will need to verify the code set by pressing the Numeric Keys in sequence as instructed in Figure 60 Point the remote at the device being pro grammed and press the 1 Button to see whether the device turns back on After pressing and releasing the 1 Button check to see whether the device has turned back on If it has skip to Step 12 If it does not turn off press the 2 Button fp or the next button in the numeric sequence if you are repeating the pro cedure as instructed by the LCD screen in Figure 65 Y gt SET N 2 gt 21 8 Figure 65 When pressing the 1 button does not turn the device being programmed back on repeat the procedure by try ing the remainder of the Numeric Keys gt in sequence each time pressing and then releasing the but ton to see whether the new device turns back on When it does skip to the next step However if you try all 10 numeric keys and find that the unit will not turn on y
109. L Cinema Vision remotes are designed to assume the duties of controlling different devices within your system by first pressing one of the 10 Selector Buttons A Ay Pressing one of these buttons places your remote control in a different page where the remote but tons are assigned control functions avail able for that specific purpose For exam ple all internal DVD changer functions are accessed by pressing the DVD Button A first and all CVPD50 Plasma Display functions are accessed by pressing the Screen Button A first and all overall audio and system commands for the CVR700 are accessed by first pressing the System Button A Throughout this manual you will see references to the system being active in DVD SYSTEM SCREEN CABLE SAT or other modes This means that one of these 10 keys is to be pressed first to place your remote in the prescribed mode before accessing any specific controls It is important to always remember to press the appropriate page selection button before trying to access any specific func tions for a system or source This may take a little bit of discipline and practice at first but it should become second nature in a very short time NOTES The function names shown here are each button s function when used with the CVR700 System its internal DVD changer DVD Main and the CVPD50 Screen Most buttons have additional functions when used with other devices and
110. LS submenu Figure 27 Once the SPEAKER LEVELS submenu appears on your video screen use the A V Navigation Controls WA to move the on screen gt cursor so that it is next to the TEST TONE line Press the lt gt Navigation Controls A so that OFF is highlighted This will turn off the test tone and allow you to use your external test disc or other source material as the reference Then use the A V Navigation Controls A to select the channels to be adjusted At each channel position use the lt gt Navigation Controls M A to change the output level Remember the goal is to have the output level at each channel be equal when heard at the lis tening position If you wish to reset all the levels to their original factory default of OdB offset press the A V Navigation Controls A so that the on screen cursor is next to the RESET line and press the Set Button Ad After the levels are reset resume the procedure outlined above to reset the levels to the desired settings When all adjustments are done scroll BACK TO MASTER MENU and then press the Set Button if you wish to go back to the main menu to make other adjustments If you have no other adjustments to make press the OSD Button A to exit the menu system NOTE Output levels may be separately trimmed for each surround mode If you wish to have different trim levels for a spe cific mode select that mode and then fol low the instructions shown above
111. Media are ei and or other countries her registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Kodak is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company TiVo is a trademark of TiVo Inc This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by disassembly is prohibited NOTES 115 JBL Consumer Products 250 Crossways Park Drive Woodbury New York 11797 USA www jbl com 2004 Harman International Industries Incorporated Part No COX1A9142 12 04 Harman International Company
112. Menu 57 Distances 30 37 50 Dolby Digital 31 34 47 60 62 Dolby Pro Logic 31 34 47 62 DSP Surround Modes 25 34 62 DTS 31 34 60 61 62 DTS Neo 6 31 34 62 DTS ES 62 DVI 22 23 44 45 55 56 76 DVD 12 13 15 16 46 47 53 55 57 60 63 66 69 70 DVD Audio 2 19 25 46 54 60 66 70 DVD Auto Picture Resize 57 58 DVD Setup 53 55 EzSet 25 31 51 84 85 Fan 21 53 Frame 13 28 35 57 58 Front Panel Controls 16 18 Front Panel Information Display 19 Front Panel Jacks 17 59 Front Panel Display Brightness 52 Hall 25 34 62 Headphones 18 60 HDTV 14 Installation 39 44 gt gt gt gt gt gt Installation Location 7 8 39 40 42 43 Installing CVPD50 39 41 IR Receiver 18 31 37 38 JBL 0n Screen Library 29 37 67 68 JPEG 12 14 73 Letterbox 13 27 34 57 58 Lip Sync 53 Loading Discs 66 Logic 7 25 34 47 60 62 acros 80 83 ain Menu 45 ain Remote Control 24 31 76 91 anual Mode Tuning 16 17 26 27 29 34 36 64 emory Backup 65 12 14 63 66 69 72 73 ute 31 33 59 ght Mode 29 34 47 63 n Screen Display 45 53 55 Operation 59 75 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Optical Digital Audio Jacks 17 22 23 26 37 43 44 46 61 OSD Time Out 53 Output Level Adjustments 50 52 Output Level Trim Adjustment 64 65 PCM 61 Picture in Picture PIP 22 29 35 55 56 Picture Setti
113. N WWV INi 3WVN NOLLOS ON lq L ISI uonouny LHOOZHAO 96 97 p10394 D10391 p10994 p1099H4 D10391 D10391 D10331 p10994 D10391 D10391 weJ5043 p10294 19 yr 161 161 09 U did qpue1s U99198 UMOQ U did Aqpueis 66 asned asned asneq asned asned asned asned asned asned asned asned asned asneq asned 86 dois awel4 dois N Ad dos 001 dois 001 0015 dois dois dos 001 001 1A4 8WE14 16 92991 97881 151114 0JU nuaj doy AVHOA OJUJ OPIL 15 JA4 929914 9G ony UD did df 9 gig oiny GG eld held eld Aeld eld held held Ya oaplV AL JES AL Md Induj AL ynduy AL aqng oepuVAL smes Joajasinduj oaplA AL O PIM AL Smels smejs PIA AL AEld uAd smeis dems did SpU0988 Z 10 pjoH dems did dems did did spu038S Z 10 ploH dems did did did 95E99H 9 88914 did did U881S 8BUEU indur did did 9 SseJj dld ZG J9ABS U99198 spuosas Z 10 PJOH Janes U99 98 X08191181 9 sselg Xoga LG May May May May May May asianay May May May May UMOQ aun PJEMDJJE uea PJEMJJEQ eun ueas 06 001 001 001 07 19109 1007 01 001 001 NOWSJAJ 007 007 6t 0 d ls 0 0 0
114. O A will cause the tuner to scan up or down and stop when you release the button even if there is no acceptable signal at that frequency In either Auto or Manual mode each tap of the Tuning Up Down Buttons 62 A A will move the frequency up or down in single step increments When the FM band is in use pressing the button so that the Tune Manual mode is activated will enable you to tune stations with weak signals by changing to monaural reception See page 64 for more informa tion on tuner operation 4h Letterbox Screen Saver Button This button performs the Letterbox func tion which enables you to adjust the screen to eliminate black bars that may appear on the top and bottom or sides of the image due to the aspect ratio of the program material differing from the 16 9 aspect ratio of the CVPD50 In most cases the CVR700 s video processor is able to automatically detect the aspect ratio setting of the program material and adjust the display automatically to fill the screen However in some cases the mate rial may be a movie displayed in wide screen format or the material may not contain embedded information necessary for the CVR700 to make an automatic adjustment The available letterbox modes are 16 9 This setting is used to display 16 9 program material in the full screen 16 9 mode on the CVPD50 This setting will also apply a linear consistent stretch to a 4 3 picture 4 3 LTRBOX TO 16 9 This mo
115. PAS ouvnim L umen temm CAM g FE um Tm WE ail d our sen a x peti MS 3 Q OO our COMPOSITE S VIDEO OZ 9 e OOHO ICABLE SAT MONITOR OUT g ki N our COMPONENT VIDEO o 00 0 660 ee OO Oo o NOTE To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to this illustration a larger copy may be downloaded from the Product Support section for this product at www jbl com Back Surround Speaker Outputs 7 1 channel only Side Surround 7 1 channel or Surround 5 1 channel Speaker Outputs Center Speaker Outputs Front Speaker Outputs Q Fan Slots Q Subwoofer Output DVI Computer Analog Audio Inputs Q Auxiliary Analog Audio Video Inputs Digital Recorder Analog Audio Video Inputs Digital Recorder Analog Audio Video Outputs VCR Analog Audio Video Inputs BB VCR Analog Audio Video Outputs B Cable Satellite Analog Audio Video Inputs Composite and S Video Monitor Outputs B Remote IR Output Remote IR Input Digital Recorder Component Video Inputs D Cable Satellite Component Video Inputs B Component Video Monitor Outputs Picture in Picture PIP Composite Video Input 3 Coaxial Digital Audio
116. PC for a personal com puter Any of these devices must be equipped with either a DVI video output or a VGA video output that you have con nected to the CVR700 s DVI HDCP Computer Video Input using the supplied VGA to DVI adaptor cable This menu affects the size and position of the DVI Computer source picture on the screen and it is set by the CVPD50 auto matically the first time you connect your computer or other device to the DVI video input After the first use these menu set tings are no longer user adjustable for the DVI Computer input HD amp PC SETTINGS Horizontal Frequency 31 3kHz Vertical Frequency 50 0Hz Pixel Clock 27 0MHz H V Polarities OW Auto Setup 0E 1 Horizontal Position on Vertical Position UE 31 Hirizontal Total 08 3 Vertical Resolutioin N 1 Phase Reset default settings Back to screen menu Figure 35a DVI SETTINGS Horizontal frequency 33 7kHz Vertical frequencv 59 9Hz Pixel polarities y Horizontal resolution MJA Vertical resolution EET Connected device HDCP DVD Back to screen menu Figure 35b This menu is also used to align an HDTV picture if necessary Great caution should be used to avoid ending up with a video able You may select the reset function you adjust these settings incorrectly The first four lines contain information only and are not adjustable The Phase ne simply reflects the settings of the incoming signal and is not adjustable
117. R1 remote has the same effect on the CVR700 CVPD50 and other devices as described earlier for the CVR700R2 remote control functions however functions may be combined on different keys Each key has an independent function depending on the device currently in use Be careful to press the input selector or the System or Screen mode selector corresponding to the device you wish to control prior to pressing a button to be sure that your button press will operate the desired function Refer to the function list on pages 96 through 97 for information on which function is assigned to a given key for a given device Power On All Press this button to power on the CVR700 the CVPD50 or another device you selected by first pressing the appropriate Input Selector Press and hold this button to place all devices including the CVR700 the CVPD50 and any other products whose codes vou have programmed into the remote into the Standbv mode A DVD Tuner Auxiliary VCR CBL SAT Input Selectors Pressing one of these buttons will perform two actions First the CVR700 will switch to the source selected Then the remote will switch to the control codes for the selected source In order to control the CVR700 again press the System Selector 4 and to control the CVPD50 screen press the Screen Selector Ai Press and hold any of these buttons to power on the CVR700 the CVPD50 and the source device and to begin play of the so
118. Rear Panel Front Panel 1 Rear Panel Front Panel 1 Rear Panel Rear Panel 1 om CD N pA 111 112 Outputs Composite CVBS Video S Video Y C Component Y Pb Pr or VUV Analog Audio L R Digital Audio Coaxial Digital Audio Optical Headphone LFE Subwoofer Speaker Level Outputs IR Audio Section Amplifier Type Two Channel Stereo Mode Five and Seven Channel Cinema Modes Input Sensitivity Impedance Signal to Noise Ratio FM Tuner Section Frequency Range Usable Sensitivity Signal to Noise Ratio Mono Stereo Distortion Mono Stereo Stereo Separation Selectivity Image Rejection IF Rejection AM Tuner Section Frequency Range Signal to Noise Ratio Usable Sensitivity Distortion Selectivity Video Section Television Format Input Level Impedance Output Level Impedance Video Frequency Response Composite and S video Component video General Power requirement Power Consumption Dimensions W x H x D Net Weight Rear Panel 2 Rear Panel 2 Rear Panel 1 Monitor Out Rear Panel 2 Rear Panel 1 Front Panel 1 Rear Panel 1 Front Panel 1 Rear Panel 1 7 pairs Rear Panel Rear Panel 1 Advanced PWM 100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 speakers 90Hz to 20kHz lt 0 15 100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 and CVCEN50 speakers 90Hz to 20kHz lt 0 15
119. Section Applicable disc sizes Applicable disc formats Video Audio Still Image Video Signal System Composite CVBS Video Output S Video Y C Output Y Luminance C Chrominance Component Y Pb Pr or YUV Video Output Y Pb U Pr V Video Digital to Analog Converters Audio Signal to Noise Ratio Audio Dynamic Range Audio Digital to Analog Converters Audio Processing Section Surround modes Inputs Composite CVBS Video S Video Y C Component Y Pb Pr or YUV DVI HDCP Analog RGB PIP Composite CVBS Analog Audio L R Digital Audio Coaxial Digital Audio Optical IR 5 12cm or 3 8cm DVD Video DVD R RW DVD R RW Video CD VCD DVD Audio CD CD R CD RW MP3 Windows Media 9 Dolby Digital and DTS Audio Discs JPEG Kodak Picture CD NTSC 1V p p 75 ohms sync negative polarity 1V p p 75 ohms sync negative polarity 0 286V p p 1V p p 75 ohms sync negative polarity 0 7V p p 75 ohms 0 7V p p 75 ohms 27MHz 10 bit 105dBA 96dB 16 bit 100dB 18 bit 105dB 20 bit 192kHz 24 bit Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic Ilx Dolby Pro Logic DTS ES 6 1 Matrix and Discrete DTS 5 1 DTS 96 24 DTS Neo 6 Logic 7 with 96kHz capability 3 DSP Modes Bass management for DVD Video and DVD Audio gt Front Panel 1 Rear Panel Front Panel 1 Rear Panel Front Panel 1 Rear Panel Rear Panel Rear Panel Front Panel 1
120. Surround Mode Indicators 87 Resetting the Remote 61 PCM Playback 88 Programmed Device Functions 61 Speaker Channel Indicators 89 CVR700R2 Remote Function List Table 62 Audio Surround Mode Chart 92 Programming the CVR700R1 Remote 92 Programming Product Codes 92 Direct Code Entry 92 Auto Search Method 93 Learning Codes 93 Erasing Learned Codes 93 Macros 94 Programmed Device Functions 94 Volume Punch Through 95 Channel Control Punch Through 95 Transport Control Punch Through 95 Resetting the Remote Memory 96 CVR700R1 Remote Function List Table 98 CVR700R1 Remote Setup Code Tables 109 Troubleshooting Guide 110 System Reset 111 Technical Specifications 113 Index See trademark acknowledgements on page 114 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION To reduce the risk of electric shock do not remove cover or back No user serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service personnel CAUTION To prevent electric shock do not use this polarized plug with an extension cord receptacle or other outlet unless the blades can be fully inserted to prevent blade exposure The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral tr
121. The digital outputs are active only when a digital signal is present and they do not convert an analog input to a digital signal or change the format of the digital signal In addition the digital recorder must be compatible with the output signal For example the PCM digital input from a CD player may be recorded on a CD R or MiniDisc but Dolby Digital or DTS signals may not Please obey the copyright restrictions on any material you copy Unauthorized duplication of copyrighted materials is prohibited by law Output Level Trim Adjustment Normal output level adjustment for the CVR700 is established using the test tone as outlined on pages 50 52 In some cases however it may be desirable to adjust the output levels using program material such as a test disc or a selection you are familiar with Additionally the output level for the subwoofer can only be adjusted using this procedure To adjust the output levels using program material first set the reference volume for the front left and front right channels using the Volume Control A If you are using a disc with test signals or an external signal generator as the source used when the output levels are being trimmed you may use the remote as SPL meter to guide you to the cor rect level settings To use the EzSet remote as an SPL meter follow the instructions on page 51 Once the reference level has been set press the Level Button A a
122. VCR When that device s name appears press the Set Button OLD DEVICE Ty a Figure 76 4 Once the old device type has been selected you need to tell the remote which set of remote codes to use as a replacement for the device just selected When the instructions shown in Figure 77 appear press the A V Navigation Button to scroll through the list of device categories to find the name of the device that you wish to use The old device name will remain on the left side of the LCD screen while the replacement device list will scroll to its right For example press the Navigation Button 2 until the display screen reads TIUOGK UCR to have the digi tal recorder Button transmit the com mands used to control a VCR Press the Set Button when the desired device combination appears NEU DEUICE TIVO lt UCR A Figure 77 Once the new device is selected the remainder of the process will select the codes for the specific brand to be used and for that reason they are identical to the way a device is programmed using manual entry Continue the process as outlined in the next few steps remembering that if the codes for your specific device are not found you may select any brand and then learn the proper codes into the remote using the process outlined on page 78 To begin the process start by selecting the brand of device as shown in Figure 57 Press the A V Naviga
123. VPD50 plasma display JBL recommends hat you point the remote control at the LED light on the front of the CVPD50 dis play for all functions as the CVPD50 will pass any non video command codes to he CVR700 Component Video Digital Recorder Inputs These inputs may be used with any video source device equipped with analog Y Pr Pb component video outputs These jacks are perma nently linked to the Digital Recorder Source input Component Video Cable Satellite Inputs These inputs may be used with any video source device equipped with analog Y Pr Pb component video out puts These jacks are permanently linked to the Cable Satellite source input Component Video Monitor Outputs If you are not using the CVPD50 or if you desire a secondary video display connect these outputs to the component video inputs of a video projector or monitor When a source con nected to one of the Component Video Inputs is selected the signal will be sent to these jacks NOTE The CVR700 is optimized to be used with the CVPD50 High Definition Plasma Display Composite S video and component video monitor outputs on the CVR700 are provided as a means of con necting an auxiliary display only On screen status messages and all digital video post processing including scaling de interlacing and upconversion features of the CVR700 are only available when used with CVPD50 Picture in Picture PIP Composite Video Input
124. a making of featurettes on a DVD The 96K or 192K indicators will light when a high resolution audio signal is detected This type of audio track may be found on some DVD Audio discs Programmed Play Indicators The CVR700 is capable of playing discs in a programmed order other than the order in which the tracks are found on the disc Tracks may be played in random order you may program some or all of the tracks on a CD to play in a playlist order In addition you may program the CVR700 to repeat play of some of the tracks on a disc an entire disc all discs or a pro grammed playlist Some of the pro grammed modes may not be available for certain disc formats See page 75 for more information Disc Indicators The circled num bers will light to indicate the positions of loaded discs and the indicator for the current disc will flash Lower Display Line Speaker Channel Input Indicators Surround Mode Indicators 2 Upper Display Line 3 Lower Display Line Depending on the unit s status a variety of messages will appear here In normal operation the current surround mode will appear on this line Speaker Channel Input Indicators These indicators are multipurpose indicat ing both the speaker type selected for each channel and the incoming data signal configuration The left center right right surround and left surround speaker indica tors are composed of two boxes while the subwoofer
125. a specific viewing medium The Broadcast settings are the most neu tral balanced and accurate and are opti mized for clarity The Movies settings are softer and less bright The Sports settings are more vibrant and optimized for fast moving action 4h Game Digital Recorder Computer Input Selectors Pressing one of these buttons will perform two actions First the CVR700 will switch to the source selected Then the remote Will switch to the control codes for the selected source In order to control the CVR700 again press the System Selector and to control the 33 34 CVPD50 screen press the Screen Selector Press and hold any of these buttons to power on the CVR700 the CVPD50 and the source device and to begin play of the source device Ay Mute Button Press this button to momentarilv silence the CVR700 Press it again or use the Volume Up Down Control to restore audio 4h Volume Up Down Control To raise the volume press towards the top of the button marked to lower the volume press towards the bottom of the button where it is marked W 4h Disc Direct Favorite Button DVD mode press this button and then press the numeric key corresponding to the position number of the disc you wish to play to immediately begin playback of that disc When used with cable television boxes or satellite receivers pressing this button scrolls through your list of preprogrammed favorite channel
126. able and satellite television to page quickly through on screen menus When a disc containing JPEG still images is being played using the internal changer press this button to scroll to the next image Distance Last Channel Button his button s function differs depending n whether it is used in the System mode or with another source OH In the Svstem mode this button is used to enter the distance from each speaker group to the listening position to avoid unnatural sound caused bv the speakers being placed at varving distances from the listener which could result in delav artifacts When this button is pressed DIST FRONT LOFT will appear in the Lower Display Line 3 with FRONT and LOFT both flashing Press the Set Button to select the front speaker group and F R 0 N T will stop flashing Use the A W Navigation Controls to select the desired distance and press the Set Button again to enter it Use the A Navigation Controls to scroll through the remaining speaker groups CENTER SIDE S side surround or BACK S back surround this setting may only be available after a 6 1 channel bitstream has been detected for example by playing a Dolby Digital EX DVD When used with most video sources this button returns to the previously selected broadcast channel Screen Setup Disc Menu Info Button This button is used in Screen mode to access the setup menus to con figure and adjust the
127. accessed and conventional audio tracks such as Dolby Digital 5 1 and 2 channel PCM will be available However when that same disc is played in a DVD Audio player only the DVD Audio menu may be accessed and the only available audio tracks will be in the high resolution DVD Audio formats JBL recognizes that there may be reasons why you would wish to have access to all of the materials on a DVD Audio disc To access the DVD Video materials on your DVD Audio disc change the DV D AUDIO line to You may switch back and forth between the ON and OFF settings at any time to access either set of materials The SLIDE SHOU line allows you to set the amount of time a JPEG still image will remain on screen before the CVR700 automatically advances to the next image on the disc You may set this time to 2 3 4 or 5 seconds This completes the setup of the internal DVD CD changer Screen Setup The CVPD50 plasma display screen uti lizes state of the art digital video pro cessing that is contained within the CVR700 and it is not possible to use the CVPD50 without the CVR700 processor Although the video processor is extremely flexible making adjustments to video display devices requires knowledge and experience to avoid making mistakes that could require professional assistance to correct Although you will not do any damage to the CVPD50 by making these adjustments you could set the picture in such a way that it is not pos
128. aker definitions When SMALL is selected low fre quency center channel sounds will be sent only to the subwoofer output If you choose this option and there is no sub woofer connected you will not hear low frequency sounds from the center channel When L ARGE is selected a full range output will be sent to the center speaker output and NO center channel signal will be sent to the subwoofer output NOTE If you choose Logic 7 as the sur round mode for the particular input source for which you are configuring your speakers the CVR700 will not make the L AR GE option available for the center speaker This is due to the require ments of Logic 7 processing and does not indicate a problem with your receiver When NONE is selected no signals will be sent to the center channel output The receiver will operate in a phantom cen ter channel mode and center channel information will be sent to the left and right front channel outputs When you have completed your selection for the center channel press the A W Navigation Controls A to move the cursor to SIDE SURROUNDS Press the lt p gt Navigation Controls to select the option that best describes the surround speakers in your system based on these speaker definitions When SMALL is selected low fre quency surround channel sounds will be sent to the subwoofer output only If you choose this option and there is no sub woofer connected you will not h
129. amber indi cating that it too is in Standby mode NOTE It is possible to see the LED on the front panel of the CVPD50 flashing red and yellow alternately even though you have unplugged the CVPD50 s power cord This is because the CVPD50 also receives power through its connection to the CVR700 in order to trigger turn on when the CVR700 is powered on for seamless operation this is normal However the CVPD50 s power cord must be plugged in for proper operation the LED will flash when the CVR700 is turned on to alert you that the power cord is unplugged If the CVPD50 does not turn on when the CVR700 is powered up and the LED on the CVPD50 is not flashing red and yellow then turn off both units unplug them both from AC power unplug the JBL Digital Link cable that connects them and then reconnect everything If this does not resyn chronize the components contact your authorized JBL custom installer or dealer for assistance 2 Remove the protective plastic film from the front panel lens If left in place the film will affect the performance of your remote control 3 Install the four supplied AAA batteries in the main remote as shown in Figure 5 Be certain to follow the and polarity indicators that are on the top of the bat tery compartment Figure 5 4 Press the Main Power On Off Switch EIC A to turn on the CVR700 and the CVPD50 5 The remote control contains several pre programmed
130. apart 2 Select the button on the remote that you wish to use as the device selector for the codes about to be entered This may be any of the Input Selectors A 3 Press the chosen Input Selector A A and the Learn Button A at the same time Hold these buttons until the light under the device selector but ton turns on Release the buttons 4 Press the button on the secondary remote that you wish to program 5 Within 5 seconds press and hold the button on the original remote that you wish to teach into the secondary remote When the light under the Input Selector A Ay blinks NOTE If the Input Selector A Ay flashes nine times during Step 5 the programming was not successful Repeat the steps to see whether the code will take 6 Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for each button on the source remote that you wish to transfer to the remote mi Once all codes have been transferred from the original source remote to the secondarv remote press the Input Selector A A you pressed in Step 2 It will blink three times and go dark exiting learning mode 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for anv addi tional remotes vou wish to teach into the secondarv remote Note on Learning Function Remote control signals can varv from one controller to the next due to different standard for mats adopted bv each manufacturer For example some manufacturers repeat the code sequence in the initial transmission and others
131. arge or severe AC line interference that has corrupted the memory or micro processor If these steps do not solve the problem consult your custom installer or an authorized JBL service center Display B as an indication that the unit has been successfully reset NOTE Resetting the processor will erase any configuration settings you have made for speakers output levels surround modes and digital input assignments as well as the tuner presets The unit will be returned to the factory presets and all settings for these items must be reen tered JBL CINEMA VISION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CVPD50 Display Size Diagonal Displayable Picture Size W x Resolution Viewing Angle Contrast Ratio Brightness Storage Temperature Operating Temperature Maximum Usable Altitude Power Requirements Dimensions W x H x DJ Display Screen Display Screen With Credenza Stand Net Weight Display Screen 50 1270 16 9 Widescreen format 43 1 2 x 24 1 2 932mm x 532mm 1366 x 768 pixels 160 3 000 1 1 000 cdl m 15 C to 60 C 5 C to 35 C 6 560 ft 2 000 meters 120V AC 60Hz 450W maximum 1W standby 48 3 4 x 29 3 4 x 3 1 2 4 with wall bracket 124cm x 76cm x 9cm 48 3 4 x 37 3 8 x 10 124cm x 95cm x 25cm 97 Ib 44kg Display Screen With Credenza Stand 110 Ib 50kg CVR7007 1 Channel A V Receiver Optical Disc Changer Video Processor Optical Disc Player
132. ate button Preprogrammed Macros Several macro type commands have been preprogrammed into the remote and they may be activated not by pressing one of the Macro Buttons but rather by pressing and holding certain other but tons as described below 1 Pressing and holding the Power On or Power Off buttons will execute the Power On All or Power Off commands to either turn on or turn off all devices whose product codes have been programmed into the remote Note that if you are not using any external devices you may simply power on the CVR700 and the CVPD50 screen will automatically be triggered to turn on as well N Pressing and holding certain Input Selectors will cause the CVR700 to switch to the selected source input device and the device will begin playing a Press and hold the DVD Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the internal DVD CD changer source If you do not enter the num ber for a disc you desire to play the last played disc will begin playing b Press and hold the CBL SAT Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected 81 82 to the cable satellite inputs If you have programmed the cable or satel lite set top box s remote control codes the device will be turned on Press and hold the VCR Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the VCR inputs If you have programmed the VCR s remote control codes the
133. ating the jack and Switch Do not turn the master power Switch to the 1 or on position until after all components have been connected Step Three Assemble the supplied AM Loop Antenna so that the tabs at the bottom of the antenna loop snap into the holes in the base Connect it to the AM Antenna Terminals D Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM 75 ohm Connection amp D The FM antenna may be an external roof antenna an inside powered or wire lead antenna or a connection from a cable TV system If the antenna or connection uses 300 ohm twin lead cable you must use an optional 300 ohm to 75 ohm adaptor to make the connection If you would like to install any external source devices in your system proceed to Step Four below Otherwise you are almost ready to begin enjoying your JBL Cinema Vision home theater system Step Four You may wish to install addi tional components to your system We re commend installing devices to the source input jacks labeled for the corresponding device type to benefit from both the pre assignment of digital audio inputs and the programming of the two remote controls Audio video components require that both an audio and a video connection be made The type of connection will depend on the capabilities of your component Audio connections may be analog or digi tal We recommend using digital audio connections whenever possible for supe rior sound reproductio
134. behind the front left and right speakers and no more than 2 feet above or below the tweeters of the left and right speakers This placement may be obtained by placing the CVPD50 screen and the left right and center speakers on a credenza using the included pair of CVTS50 table stands for the left and right CVSAT50 speakers and the included credenza stand for the CVPD50 screen and CVCEN5O center speaker The JBL Cinema Vision speaker system may be used in 5 1 or 7 1 channel appli cations Your system includes enough loudspeakers for a 5 1 channel system Additional pairs of CVSAT50 satellite speakers are available from your JBL dealer or custom installer along with pairs of CVSAT50 table stands should you wish to upgrade to a 7 1 channel system If desired a second subwoofer may be added to create a 5 2 or 7 2 system If so connect one end of a Y adaptor intercon nect to the Subwoofer Output and connect each end to the LFE input of a powered subwoofer In 5 1 channel applications two of the surround speakers should be placed slightly behind the listening position and ideally should face each other and be at a level higher than the listeners ears If that is not possible they may be placed on a wall behind the listening position facing forward In 7 1 channel applica tions place two of the surround speakers in the side positions and place the two surround back speakers on the rear wall It i
135. bers and elapsed time of the track for DVD Audio discs the title and chapter num bers and elapsed time of the chapter for DVD Video discs and the WMA MP3 or JPG file number and elapsed time for audio files Random Plav The CVR700 allows vou to randomiv plav the tracks on an audio CD or a VCD or MP3 or WMA compressed audio files Random plavback is not available for DVD Audio DVD Video JPEG discs When available Simply press the Random Button to enter Random mode a banner will appear on screen and again to exit Random mode Audio CDs You may enter or exit Random mode either while the disc is playing or after play has been stopped by pressing the Stop Button 6 A twice VCDs Random mode is only available in Stop mode after play has been stopped by pressing the Stop Button 69 Ay twice MP3 and WMA discs You may enter or exit Random mode either while the disc is playing or after play has been stopped by pressing the Stop Button 69 Ay twice The Random Indicator e will light when the CVR700 is in Random mode Repeat Play The CVR700 offers several repeat options that allow for unattended playback even on a continuous basis There are two basic types of Repeat modes conventional Repeat which allows you to repeat discs and their existing subdivisions and Repeat A B in which a passage you select is repeated The available Repeat modes will vary depending on the type of disc The conv
136. ble Feature presentation or to include other special features Press the Title Button P to see a listing of the titles on a disc When a disc has only one title pressing the Title Button 23 may show a list of the chapters DVD Audio discs a Title is referred to as a Group Many DVD Audio discs require you to press the Title Button P to access the disc menu WMA Files WMA Windows Media Audio is another audio compression format that was developed by the Microsoft Corporation for use with its Windows Media Player WMA files can be even smaller in size than MP3 files while maintaining similar quality The CVR700 is among the DVD players capa ble of playing discs containing WMA files Note that Windows Media Player uses other file formats however the CVR700 is only capable of playing files that end in the wma extension 16 CVR700 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS iE ei 18 O UBL AUDIO VIDEO RECEIVER VIDEO PROCESSOR OPTICAL DISC CHANGER ear Sess EE Em pms mm H mima jew em amr CA Nu M 9 1 2 4 MODE SELECT V iid a TUNING MODE TUNING PRESET BAND kasa 4 44 44 pepe gt MEMORY FM MODE POWER SLEEP DISPLAY Pr Y GAMEICAM L R H DIGITAL AUDIO S VIDEO e COMPONENT COMPOSITE AUDIO
137. btain the most recent software update for the source unit Sometimes it helps to simply turn off the CVR700 using the Main Power On Off Switch El turn off the master power switch on the CVPD50 depressed towards rear of unit unplug the JBL Digital Link cable and unplug the AC power cords from both units Then follow these steps in reverse order and often the unit will function normally Check AC power cord connections at wall and unit Check CVPD50 power switch should be depressed toward rear of unit See note on page 45 Reset the connection by switching sources on the CVR700 or by stopping and restarting the DVD Check all audio connections Check digital audio settings There is no audio playback on DVD discs during fast or slow modes Use analog audio outputs It is a normal artifact of DVD playback for pictures to jump or show some distortion during rapid play With most DVDs some functions are not permitted at certain times e g Track Skip or at all e g direct audio track selection 109 110 SYMPTOM The Feature Not Available message appears Picture is displayed in the wrong aspect ratio Remote control inoperative Disc will not copy to VCR System Reset In the rare case in which the unit s opera tion or the displays seem abnormal the cause may involve the erratic operation of the system s memory or microproces sor To correct this problem first try turn ing off the master power sw
138. ckward left button or forward right button through the tracks on a DVD Audio CD or VCD disc or the chapters on a DVD Video disc Press and hold either but ton for at least 1 second to search either backward left button or forward right button the current track or chap ter at 2x speed Press and hold again and release to increase the scan speed to 4x Repeat this procedure while in scan mode to cycle through these scan speeds 2x 4x 16x 100x 2x and so forth Press and release the button while scanning to skip tracks or chap ters To stop searching you must press the Play Button E the Stop Button IK or the other Search Button E To advance frame by frame while a DVD Video disc is playing press the Pause Button once and then each subsequent press of the Pause Button A will step one frame forward through the pro gram Reverse step is not available Press the Play Button ER CD A to resume normal play While a disc is stopped a Stop icon IB will appear on the left side of the Upper Display Line 2 During play back a Play icon e will appear and when the disc is paused a Pause icon 1 will appear During Search modes the Play icon will remain in the display and the Lower Display Line 3 will indicate that the disc is being scanned either forward or in reverse During normal play the Upper Display Line will indicate the track number and elapsed time for CDs the group and track num
139. cords into unswitched AC wall outlets When using the system for the first time you must make sure that the power switch on the underside of the CVPD50 next to the AC power cord is switched on to the 1 position Use a mirror to assist you in locating the switch and ascertain ing whether it is on or off This places the CVPD50 in a Standby mode as indicated by the amber color of the LED located on the front of the screen below the picture In addition the LED in the middle of the Main Power On Off Switch El on the CVR700 will turn red Once the units are in Standby you may begin a listening session by pressing the Main Power On Off Switch which will turn on both the CVR700 and the CVPD50 or press the Power On All Button f you hold it for 3 seconds all devices programmed into the remote will also turn on The LED in the center of the Main Power On Off Switch El will turn orange and the LED on the front of the CVPD50 will turn green This will turn the CVR700 on and return it to the input source that was last used The system may also be turned on from Standby by pressing and holding any of the Input Selector Buttons A Mi This will not only power on the CVR700 CVPD50 and any source unit associated with that button it will also begin play of the currently loaded disc if the internal DVD CD changer was selected as the source NOTE After pressing one of the Input Selector Buttons A to turn the
140. creen the image is compressed but no portion of the image is lost 2 35 LB TO 16 9 CROPPED This mode is an alternative adjustment for a widescreen film The image is not com pressed or scaled in any way but the outer edges are cropped sacrificing a slight amount of the original content in exchange for 100 accurate image pro portions 4 3 HDTV TO 16 9 As HDTV is new to the broadcast industry and there are still a considerable amount of older 4 3 stan dard recording and broadcast equipment in use 4 3 material is sometimes broad cast in HD 16 9 format with black or other color bars on its sides Since these bars are a part of the actual picture conven tional picture resizing techniques do not work in eliminating them This setting is specifically designed to address this prob lem It first crops the bars off of the sides of the 16 9 picture to render it a 4 3 pic ture and then performs a natural looking nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16 9 screen 4 3 This mode may be used with pro grams that are known to be in the 4 3 aspect ratio The image s original aspect ratio is preserved unaltered and black bars will appear on the left and right sides of the image to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 aspect ratio screen The difference between the Frame and Letterbox functions is that the Frame function allows access to the 4 3 and 4 3 TO 16 9 NL modes which are mainly useful for materials originating in the 4 3
141. ct oper ates properly Keep in mind that many manufacturers use a number of differ ent combinations of codes so it is a good idea to make certain that not only the power control but the vol ume channel and transport controls work as they should If functions do not work properly you may need to use a different remote code If a code cannot be entered to turn the unit off if the code for your prod uct does not appear in the tables in this manual or if not all functions operate properly try programming the remote with the Auto Search Method Auto Search Method If the unit you wish to include in the remote is not listed in the code tables in this manual or if the code does not seem to operate properly you may wish to pro gram the correct code using the Auto Search method that follows 1 Turn on the unit that you wish to include in the remote 2 Press the Input Selector A for the type of product to be entered and the Program Button at the same time Hold both buttons until the red light under the Input Selector A A stays lit The next step must take place while the light is on and it must begin within 20 seconds after the light appears c2 Point the remote toward the unit to be programmed and press either the A or Y Button A Each press will send out a series of codes from the remote s built in database When the unit being programmed turns off release the A Y Button as that is y
142. cursor box to the right of the device name Press the 4 Navigation Button 2 to return the blinking cursor to the far left side of the display line You may then retitle the device name as shown in the next step To enter the new name press the Alpha Numeric Keys The let ters above the numbered buttons indicate which letter or symbol will appear when the button is pressed during the renaming process The first press of the button will enter the first letter shown subsequent presses of the same button will change the dis play to the other letters above that numbered key For example since the first letter we need to rename the input to HDTV Tuner is an you would locate the H above the 4 button and press the button twice The first press shows a the second press changes it to an Consult the table at the end of this section to see which characters pressing a particular button generates After you enter the first letter of the new device name there are three options for entering the next character a To enter a letter that requires a dif ferent numeric key to be pressed simply press that button The cur sor will automatically move to the next position and the first letter accessed by the new button will appear Following our example the next letter needed is a D so you would press the 3 button once b To enter a letter that uses the same numeric key you must first
143. d and it will stay lit for another 5 seconds if any key is pressed while the backlight is on You may keep the backlight lit by holding the Light button but extensive use of the backlight will reduce battery life The LCD display will remain on for 10 seconds after a key is pressed and then turn off to conserve battery life When any button is held for more than 30 seconds the LCD will turn off and the remote will stop transmitting the codes to conserve battery life Programmed Device Functions Once the CVR700R2 remote has been programmed for the codes of other devices press the appropriate Input Selector 9 to switch the remote to control the audio section of the CVR700 System Selector B the CVPD50 screen Screen Selector the internal DVD CD changer of the CVR700 DVD Selector CD or to con trol additional products When you press any one of the selectors its name will appear on the upper line of the LCD Information Display to indicate that you have changed the device being controlled When operating a device other than the CVR700 or CVPD5O the controls may not correspond exactly to the function printed on the remote or button Some com mands such as the volume control are the same as they are with the CVR700 Other buttons will change their function so that they correspond to a secondary label on the remote For example the Slow Play controls also function as the Channel Up and Channel
144. d from a 30 position memory Station Selection 1 Press the Tuner Button on the remote to select the tuner as an input The tuner may be selected from the front panel by turning the Source Selector until the tuner is active 2 Press the Tuner Button or Tuner Band Selector E to switch between AM and FM so that the desired frequency band is selected 3 When using the front panel controls the Tuning Mode Button fi is used to select the function of the Tuning Preset Up Down Buttons EJ Press the Tuning Mode Button to toggle between TUNING and PRESET Press the Tuning Mode Selector Ax on the remotes to select manual or automatic tuning In either mode each press of the Tuning Selectors E1 5 A AA will increase or decrease the fre quency by one increment When the Tuning Mode Selector has been pressed so that AUTO TUNE appears in the Lower Display Line E pressing and holding the Tuning Selectors EJ D A will cause the tuner to scan for the next higher or lower frequency with an acceptable signal Release the button and AUTO TUNED will appear in the Lower Display Line H to indi cate that a station has been tuned AUTO ST TUNED will appear in the Lower Display Line for FM stereo stations When the Tuning Mode Selector has been pressed so that MANUAL TUNE appears in the Lower Display Line A pressing and holding the Tuning Selectors A will cause the t
145. d the Component Video Monitor Outputs B but not the other video outputs This setting allows you to compensate for errors in the disc authoring where proper maintenance of frame rate was not car ried out in the film to video conversion process The CVR700 s advanced adaptive inter lacer will handle most of these types of problems and it is therefore recom mended that you leave this line at the factory default setting of AUT However if you observe problems with vertical resolution on a specific disc experiment by selecting the FILM mode for programs originally created on film or the VI DE 0 mode for pro grams originating on video Parental Control The CVR700 s Password System is used to control viewing of restricted programs and offers the capability to change the password itself and the rating The CVR700 is shipped with 1234 as the default password and with the parental control settings off The following instructions will show how to change the password and lock the settings NOTE The DVD disc must be specifically encoded with rating information for Parental Control to work Password If you change the password from the factory default setting please remember to write the new password in a safe place You cannot access rated discs or rating password menus or change or clear the password see below without entering the correct password If you for get your password you can reset the CVR700
146. d to the Auxiliary source input Cable Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio Input Connect the coaxial digital audio output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compati ble computer sound card playing audio iles or streams LD player or CD player 0 this jack The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to this jack This input is permanently assigned 0 the Cable Satellite source input 2 DVI Computer Coaxial Digital Audio Input Connect the coaxial digital audio output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compati ble computer sound card playing audio files or streams LD player or CD player to this jack The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to this jack This input is permanently assigned to the DVI Computer source input 1 Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital Audio Input Connect the coaxial digital audio output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compati ble computer sound card playing audio iles or streams LD player or CD player 0 this jack The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to this jack This input is permanently assigned o the Digital Recorder source input
147. d you wish to return the remote to the original configuration after programming a Volume Punch Through you will need to repeat the steps shown above However press the same Input Selector in Steps 1 and 2 Channel Control Punch Through The secondary remote may be pro grammed to operate so that the channel control function for either the TV cable or satellite receiver used in your system may be used in conjunction with one of the other devices controlled by the remote For example while using and controlling the VCR you may wish to change channels on a cable box or satellite receiver without having to change the device selected by the CVR700 or the remote To program the remote for Channel Control Punch Through follow these steps 1 Press the Input Selector Button A for the device you wish to have the channel control associated with and the Volume Up Button 4 at the same time until the red light appears under the Input Selector A 2 Press and release the Input Selector Button A for the device that will be used to change the channels The Input Selector A 4h you pressed in Step 1 will blink three times and then go out to confirm the data entry Example To control the channels using your cable box or satellite receiver while the remote is set to control the VCR first press the VCR Input Selector Button and the Channel Up Button A at the same time Next release them and press the AUX Input Selec
148. de is used to adjust an image which is designed to display a 16 9 movie on a 4 3 screen In order to preserve the full width of the movie on a narrower screen the image is reduced in size and black bars appear above and below it This setting zooms in on the image enabling it to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 screen without losing any portion of the image The image is simply enlarged so that its two sides fit the edges of the CVPD50 16 9 screen and the black bars on top amp bottom are cropped off The image is stretched in a linear fashion evenly throughout the frame 2 35 LB TO 16 9 NL This mode is used to adjust an image from a widescreen film which is actually at a wider ratio than the CVPD50 s 16 9 ratio In order to fit on the smaller screen the image is compressed in a nonlinear fashion but no portion of the image is lost 2 35 LB TO 16 9 CROPPED This mode is an alternative adjustment for a widescreen film The image is not com pressed or scaled in any way but the outer edges are cropped sacrificing a slight amount of the original content in exchange for 100 accurate image pro portions 4 3 HDTV TO 16 9 As HDTV is new to the broadcast industry and there is still a considerable amount of older 4 3 stan dard recording amp broadcast equipment in use 4 3 material is sometimes broadcast in HD 16 9 format with black or other color bars on its sides Since these bars are a part of the actual picture conven tio
149. ded on the disc You may notice that the picture jumps as it is resized and this is normal If the pic ture has large dark areas particularly near the frame edges the picture may be resized frequently In that case you may prefer to turn off the Auto Resize function while watching that disc and use the Frame Button or the Letterbox Button to select a display Screen status LED Some people may find the status LED on the front panel of the CVPD50 to be distract ing while watching movies and this set ting allows you to turn the LED off If pos sible it is recommended that you leave the LED turned on to alert you to its sta tus such as flashing red and yellow to indicate that it has come unplugged 4 3 Scaling The 4 3 SCALING setting is only needed for sources where the original program material is in the 4 3 aspect ratio The default setting is NORMAL where 4 3 materials are displayed in their original aspect ratio with black bars appearing on the left and right sides of the image If you wish to have the image stretched to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 screen select LINEAR scaling to have the picture stretched at the same rate through out the frame or NON LINEAR to leave the center of the frame virtually untouched with the degree of scaling increasing towards the edges You may override this setting manually for a specific disc by using the Frame Button Ay NOTE Leaving the black bars on screen fo
150. dio Video Outputs Connect the left right analog audio and composite or S video RECORD IN jacks of a video recording device such as a VCR DVD Recorder or personal video recorder to these jacks The CVR700 s remote control has a VCR as the default device for this input but you may connect any video source such as an HDTV or cable set top box personal video recorder or other device to these inputs Note however that the VCR source is not associated with any digital audio inputs or component video inputs and should therefore only be used as a last resort for devices that have those capabilities The preferred system config uration is to connect an HDTV tuner or digital cable or satellite receiver to the Cable Sat source and to connect a per sonal video recorder such as a TiVo to the Digital Recorder source B Cable Satellite Analog Audio Video Inputs Connect the left right analog audio and composite or S video jacks of a video device to these jacks The CVR700 s remote control has a cable satellite or HDTV set top as the default devices available for this input but you may connect any video source such as a VCR HDTV or satellite receiver personal video recorder or other device to these inputs Note that if the source device offers either digital audio or com ponent video capability those connec tions must be made separately and the CVR700 configured accordingly 21 22 D Composite and S Video Monitor Output
151. display SET SPKR LEVELS E25eT DISABLE A Figure 105 4 Within 5 seconds press the Set Button to disable the SPL Select Button ID Once the Set Button is pressed the word EXITING will flash four times in the lower line of the LCD display and then it will return to normal operation Once these steps are completed when the SPL Select Button ID is pressed the remote will show EzSeT DISABLE and it will not be activated To restore the EzSet feature to normal operation repeat the procedure outlined above except that in Step 3 you should press the A Y Navigation Button so that EzSeT ENABLE appears in the lower line of the LCD display When that display appears press the Set Button D and the EzSet feature will be reacti vated You may then press the Remote Menu Button f to exit the remote s menu system and return to normal opera tion or press the Set Button again to immediately use the EzSet feature to calibrate the system as shown on page 51 Renaming While the names given to the buttons and inputs on the remote represent rec ognizable categories of audio video prod ucts system operation may be easier if the displays shown in the remote s LCD screen are customized to reflect the spe cific characteristics of a playback source s brand name or the new function given to a specific button when one remote s con trols are programmed into the remote The CVR700R2 remote allows you to change
152. dris 2810 ds asiq 0 81 19 ejday uAg 1e d u 1ID3 WEJHOJ nua doj asiq WeJ olq welBoig Bold Aejday HAd 99 ALOH IN3ISAS N33U S LYS 189 3WV9 saaa 909 AL NOLLNA 92 PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R1 REIVIOTE In addition to its powerful CVR700R2 remote control the JBL Cinema Vision system also includes a smaller CVR700R1 remote intended for everyday use This remote features many of the same func tions as the main remote including the capability of controlling most popular brands of audio and video equipment such as CD players cable boxes digital recording devices VCRs satellite receivers and HDTV set top tuners but in a more compact design The CVR700R1 remote control is capable of operating up to nine devices including the CVR700 In order to segregate the control commands for each device the remote s logic contains a separate page of commands for each device called up when that device s selector has been pressed For example in order to access the commands that control the CVPD50 screen such as Letterbox or PIP you must first press the Screen Selector Ay and an orange light underneath that but ton will light When you press another button on the remote that is used to con trol the screen the light underneath the Screen Selector Ay will blink to con firm the current mode Programmi
153. e 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button gt for about three seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD dis play and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the Navigation Button 2 until PUNCH THROUGH appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 88 Press the Set Button to enter the main punch through menu branch 3 At the next menu screen press the Navigation Button 2 until TRANSPORT appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 99 Press the Set Button to begin programming the remote for transport punch through PUNCH THROUGH TRANSPORT A Figure 99 4 The next display screen Figure 100 is where you select the device that will receive the punch through com mands In our example that is the System button as that is where we want the VCR s transport controls to be active Press the A W Navigation Button f until the name of the base device appears and then press the Set Button DEUICE IH USE M DUD A Figure 100 5 At the next display screen Figure 101 you will select the device whose transport commands will be used Press the A V Navigation Button until the desired device name appears to th
154. e 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears HOLD BUTTON FOR 3 SECONDS Figure 54 3 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the Set Button to begin the process of selecting a device and locating the proper remote codes MAIN MENU PROGRAM CODE A Figure 55 4 PROGRAM CODE will appear in the LCD display Figure 56 Press the A V Navigation Button f to scroll through the list of source inputs and press the Set Button 2 when the source you wish to set the codes for appears For this example we will select AUX to enter the codes needed to operate your HDTV tuner As a shortcut once the screen shown in Figure 56 appears you may jump to the desired source by pressing its Input Selector CD PROGRAM CODE AUX A Figure 56 NOTE Fach source may be programmed with certain device types AUX Used to program a TV HDTV tuner VCR TV VCR combination device exter nal DVD or CD player cable box or satel lite receiver e VCR Used to program a videocassette recorder or TV VCR combination device CBL SAT Used to program a cable tele vision box satellite television receiver or HDTV tuner GAME CAM Used to program a video game console or camcorder DR Used to program a digita
155. e CD R machines used to record discs on a computer it is possible that some discs may not play on the CVR700 even though they will work on a computer This is normal and does not indicate a fault with the unit When a multisession disc with both standard CD audio and MP3 or WMA content is in use the CVR700 will play only the CD audio sections of the disc Track numbers will be visible in the dis play but the files will not be decoded When a disc with multiple directories is playing only tracks from one directory can be displayed and played at a time Select the desired directory and press he Play Button 1 to start he first track To see and play tracks rom other directories first you must select that directory then select the rack and press the Play Button e Only stereo audio playback is available or MP3 and WMA discs Programmed Playback With MP3 or WMA Discs The CVR700 is capable of creating play lists of the files on a properly recorded disc To create a playback list for MP3 or WMA titles follow the same steps as for programming a playlist for any other format disc as described on page 75 JPEG Playback The CVR700 is one of the few available DVD players that is capable of recogniz ing JPEG still image files and displaying them When a disc containing JPEG files is loaded the CD ROM Disc Type Indicator FY will light The list of direc tories on the disc will appear and may be navigated in
156. e Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie DTS Neo 6 Cinema or Logic 7 Cinema surround modes depending on the source material NOTE Once a program has been encoded with matrix surround information it retains the surround information as long as the program is available in stereo Thus movies with surround sound may be decoded via any of the analog surround modes such as Dolby Pro Logic II or IIx Movie Logic 7 Cinema or DTS Neo 6 Cinema when they are broadcast via con ventional TV stations cable pay TV and satellite transmission Also a number of TV programs sports broadcasts and radio dramas are recorded in surround sound Even when a program is not listed as car rying intentional surround information you may find that the Dolby Pro Logic Il Logic 7 DTS Neo 6 and the Hall or Theater modes often deliver enveloping surround presentations through the use of the natural information present in all stereo recordings Surround modes may be changed at any time by using either the front panel or remote control To select a new surround mode from the front panel press the Surround Mode Selector ff repeatedly until the desired surround mode is selected To select a surround mode using the remote press the button for the surround mode group that includes the mode you wish to choose Dolby 6B DTS Digital G A DTS Neo 6 A Logic 7 A Stereo or DSP Surround A The first press of the button will show the curr
157. e if possible it is recommended that an HDTV receiver be used with the Cable Sat or even the Digital Recorder source so that a compo nent video connection may be made See page 46 for more information on configur ing an input for various source options Q Digital Recorder Analog Audio Video Inputs Connect the left right analog audio and composite or S video PLAY OUT jacks of a video recording device such as a VCR DVD Recorder or personal video recorder to these jacks The CVR700 s remote control has a variety of digital recorders avail able as the default devices for this input but you may connect any video source such as a VCR HDTV or cable set top box personal video recorder or other device to these inputs Note that if the source device offers either digital audio or component video capability those con nections must be made separately and the CVR700 configured accordingly See page 46 for more information on configur ing an input for various source options Digital Recorder Analog Audio Video Outputs Connect the left right analog audio and composite or S video RECORD IN jacks of a video recording device such as a DVD Recorder personal video recorder or VCR to these jacks VCR Analog Audio Video Inputs Connect the left right analog audio and composite or S video PLAY OUT jacks of a video recording device such as a VCR DVD Recorder or personal video recorder to these jacks B VCR Analog Au
158. e name of the device appears on the left side of the lower line in the LCD display For this example the first button we want to have the macro press is the Power On button so the DUD ZMAIH is selected Press the Set Button when the The next screen that appears Fig 81 is where you select the device for the first command that will be sent out as desired device name appears to move to the next programming step SELECT A DEVICE DUD MAIH A Figure 81 Begin entering the individual com mands for the macro in the order you wish them to be transmitted Remember that when you want to change devices you must first press the Input Selectors for that but ton and then press the Command or Function key 6 The next display Figure 82 and the subsequent screens are where the actual macro programming takes place The words at the left side of the top line of the display show the button that is being programmed e g one of the Macro Buttons 29 and the indication at the right side of the top line shows the number of macro steps available of 20 possi ble steps Following the instructions on the remote s LCD screen press the first key you wish to be transmitted in the macro In our example we first want the CVR700 to turn on so the Power Button should be pressed MICRO 1 na en PRESS A BUTTON Figure 82 7 Once the first command button for the macro has been pressed continue to press th
159. e while a disc is playing If you press the Status Bar in Stop mode an abbreviated Status Bar will appear see Figure 43 that only indicates the current title and does not permit you to change the title number Figure 43 e f you press the Audio Button the Subtitle Button A or the Angle Button 44 without the Status Bar being on screen the segment of the Status Bar relating to the function you selected will appear on screen by itself and you will be able to change the setting for that function by continuing to press the corresponding button See examples of the Subtitle segment in Figures 44 and 45 Figure 44 CI Figure 45 A different Status Bar is displaved on screen when a CD is plaving see Fig 46 This Status Bar only contains two items the current Track number followed bv the total number of tracks on the disc and the elapsed time When the Track number is highlighted vou mav use the Numeric Keys Ay to enter the number of a track you wish to skip to The Time Search function is also available for CDs Use the Numeric Keys to enter the hour minute second indication of the time at which you wish play to begin followed by the Set Button Playback from that point will begin immediately Figure 46 Status banners may also appear on screen briefly to display messages such as Disc Loading Play Stop Pause Feature Not Available or other status messa
160. e you wish to make a change and then press the lt gt Navigation Controls A until the desired setting appears The available choices for low frequency information to be sent to the subwoofer rather than to the main speaker channel are 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 120Hz and 200Hz Pick the choice that is identical to the information or your speakers or if an exact match is not possible pick the closest choice that is ABOVE the speaker s low frequency imit or crossover point to avoid the cre ation of a low frequency hole where your system will have no bass informa ion The setting for the crossover point or the LFE channel which is created to provide specific low frequency informa tion in many movies with digital sound racks may be set to match the cross over for any of the four speaker groups Since the crossover point commonly used in the creation of the LFE channel SUBWOOFER is 120Hz we recom mend that you select the speaker group whose crossover point is closest to 120Hz To do this press the A W Navigation Controls A until the 49 50 cursor is next to the SUBWOOFER line and then press the lt p gt Navigation Controls A until the name of the speaker group with the desired crossover frequency appears Of course you may also experiment with dif ferent settings to find the one that pro vides the smoothest and most complete bass response in your particular listening environment
161. e Control Selector flashes for some but not all buttons for a par ticular product it does NOT indicate a problem with the remote but rather that no function is programmed for the button being pushed Volume Punch Through The secondary remote may be pro grammed to operate the Volume Control Ay and Mute Ay functions of the CVR700 in conjunction with any of the devices controlled by the remote For example since the 700 will likely be used as the sound system for TV viewing you may wish to have the CVR700 s vol ume activated although the remote is set to run the TV The CVR700 or TV volume control may be associated with any of the remote s devices To program the remote for Volume Punch Through follow these steps 1 Press the Input Selector A for the unit you wish to have associated with the volume control and the Volume Button at the same time until the red light appears under the Input Selector A 2 Press either the System Selector A or the Input Selector A depending on which system s volume control you wish to have active for the punch through mode The Input Selector A you pressed in Step 1 will blink three times and then go out to confirm the data entry Example To have the CVR700 s vol ume control activated even though the remote is set to control the TV first press the Aux Input Selector and the Volume Up Button at the same time Next press the System Selector 4 NOTE Shoul
162. e DTS Neo 6 options In the Screen mode pressing this button automatically adjusts the screen s picture settings to preprogrammed settings that are recommended as optimal for viewing broadcast television programs NOTE The Sports Broadcast Movies Buttons A optimize picture settings for a specific viewing medium The Broadcast settings are the most neu tral balanced and accurate and are opti mized for clarity The Movies settings are softer and less bright The Sports settings are more vibrant and optimized for fast moving action ED DTS Digital Surround Mode Button In System mode when a DTS encoded digital source is playing each press of this button will scroll through the available DTS audio surround modes The specific choice of modes will vary accord ing to the type of encoding on the disc and your system s speaker configuration 5 1 channel or 6 1 7 1 channel See page 62 for more information on DTS modes B Dolby Surround Mode Button In System mode this button is used to select from the available Dolby audio sur round modes Each press of this button will select one of the Dolby Pro Logic available in 5 1 channel systems or IIx available in 6 1 7 1 channel systems modes Dolby 3 Stereo or Dolby Digital when a Dolby Digital encoded source is Each press of this button will croll through the available modes See page 62 for more information on Dolby modes GP Mute Button
163. e Set Button A A confir mation screen Figure 9 will appear giv ing you the opportunity to opt out of source configuration To continue scroll to the Y E line and press the Set Button A again Note that you may reset all sources to their factory default settings from this screen by scrolling to the RESET ALL SOURCES line and selecting it xx SYSTEM ARE YOU SURE YOU UANT TO CHANGE SOURCE SETTINGS p No YES RESET ALL SOURCES TO FACTORY SETTINGS Figure 9 Once you have confirmed that you wish to change source settings the SOURCES menu Figure 10 will appear The first line indicates the cur rently selected source SOURCES P SOURCE DVD CD CHNGR AUDIO MODE DVD V LOGIC 7 1 MOV DVD A BASS MANAGEMENT CD V LOGIC 2 7 1 MOV CD A LOGIC 7 7 1 MUS MP3 UMA LOGIC 7 1 MU SOURCE A R AUTO 16 9 RESET TO FACTORY SETTNG BACK TO MAIN MENU Figure 10 If you wish to change the current source or make adjustments to a different source then make sure that the gt cursor is next to the SOURCE line and select it by pressing the Set Button A A list of available sources will appear Figure 11 Scroll to the desired source and select it or to retain the previous source scroll to the BACK TO SOURCES MENU line and select it SOURCES CABLE SAT DVD CD CHANGER A V AUX VCR DIGITAL RECORDER DVI INPUT COMPUTER GAME CAMERA TUNER BACK TO SOURCES MENU Figure 11
164. e a movie or program into chapters that allow for quick access to specific parts of the program These chapters may be accompanied by thumbnail pictures of a scene from the specific chapter to help you select the desired spot on the disc When a disc is playing press the Disc Menu Button A to pause the playback and display the disc s menu As there are no hard rules about style and content for DVD menus the way they appear on the screen and the information they contain will vary from one disc to another However the following general rules apply to most menus e The first menu that appears is the Main Menu and you may move through the options with the Navigation A V 4p Buttons P A A as the disc s programming allows The option selected will typically be highlighted in a certain color or inside an outline box To select a highlighted option which may either play a portion of the disc or move to a submenu press the Set Button A or Play Button A some discs when you select the DVD menu during the playback of a movie the disc will return to the point in the program where the menu was selected by offering a Play Movie option Press the Set Button A or Play Button IR G A to resume play However not all discs offer this feature and selecting the menu while playing a movie may mean that you will either have to go back to the beginning of the program or the start of a chapter This feature is
165. e buttons you wish to be part of the macro in the order they will be used Press each button within 5 seconds of the last button remembering to press the Input Selector when you are chang ing device functions As the buttons on the remote are pressed the remote s display screen will show the steps in the macro as they are programmed Figure 83 IM DUDI POWER ON Figure 83 8 For our example we first want the CVR700 Power On button pressed followed by the Cable Box On fol lowed by the selection of the Logic 7 mode To do that press the buttons in this order e Power e Cable Sat Power System e Logic 7 As each button is pressed to enter it into the macro you will see the but ton names appear and then scroll up on the LCD display as your confirma tion of the key entry Figure 83 co When all commands for the macro have been entered press the Set Button to save the macro The display screen will show the button to which the macro has been pro grammed and the number of steps used and the word SAWED will blink four times in the lower line of the LCD display When the display returns to normal the macro has been entered and the remote is ready for operation 10 As the macro plays you will see the steps appear in the remote s LCD dis play Macros programmed into one of the four discrete Macro buttons may be activated at any time by pressing the appropri
166. e encoded for 5 1 Thus it is sometimes normal for a DVD with a Dolby Digital soundtrack to trigger only the L and R indicators NOTE Many DVD discs are recorded with both 5 1 and 2 0 and Dolby Digital and DTS versions of the same soundtrack When playing a DVD always be certain to check the type of material on the disc Most discs show this infor mation using icons on the back of the disc jacket When a disc offers multiple soundtrack choices you may have to make some adjustments usually with the Audio Select button or in a menu screen on the disc to access the full 5 1 Continued on page 63 61 AUDIO SURROUND MODE CHART MODE Dolby Digital Dolby Digital EX DTS 5 1 DTS ES 6 1 atrix Discrete Dolby Pro Logic Il usic ovie Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Movie Logic 7 Cinema Logic 7 Music Logic 7 Enhance TS Neo 6 Cinema TS Neo 6 Music C Theater Hall 1 Hall 2 Channel Stereo Channel Stereo Surround Off Stereo FEATURES Available only with digital input sources encoded with Dolby Digital data It provides up to five separate main audio channels and a special dedicated low Available when the receiver Dolby Digital When used with specially encoded soundtrac 6 1 7 1 operation and a Do encoding is not available to pro When the speaker configura audio only music or laser discs audio channels and a special When the speaker configu
167. e front of the CVPD50 is capable of receiving control commands for both the CVPD50 and the CVR700 enabling you to place the CVR700 inside a cabinet If you wish to control an external source component that is also hidden from view simply con nect the CVR700 s Remote IR Output Jack B to the Remote IR input jack on compatible equipment Now you may simply point the remote control at the plasma screen to send commands to any device in your JBL Cinema Vision system If the CVR700 is used without the CVPD50 and is placed inside a cabinet or other location that prevents the remote sensor from receiving commands an optional remote IR sensor may be connected to the Remote IR Input Jack SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NOTE remotely controlled compo nents must be linked together in a daisy chain Connect the IR OUT jack of one unit to the IR IN of the next to establish this chain You are now ready to power up the sys tem make minor configuration settings and then begin enjoying your JBL Cinema Vision system 1 Plug the AC power cords for the CVPD5O CVR700 and any source devices into unswitched AC outlets Make sure the master power switch on the underside of the CVPD50 next to the power cord jack is in the 1 position Use a small mirror to locate the switch The LED inside the Main Power On Off Switch El on the CVR700 will turn red indicating that the unit is in Standby mode The LED on the front of the CVPD50 will turn
168. e left and the numerical value is 0 the image is at maximum height Use the lt gt Navigation Controls A to adjust the vertical height of the image until it fills the screen When a composite or S video source is in use selecting the Input Settings will take you to the VIDEO SETTINGS menu Fig 36 The Video Standard line is informational only and will reflect the video standard for your country The VCR Stability feature may be set to either On or 0 f Turning it on improves the display of VCR materials VIDEO SETTINGS Video Standard Auto VCR Stability On back to input menu Figure 36 PIP Mode This line of the INPUTS PIP menu turns the pic ture in picture feature on or off In order to use this feature you must connect the composite video output of a source that you desire to monitor to the Picture in Picture PIP Composite Video Input A PIP mode is only available when the current source input is using composite video not component or S video PIP mode enables you to monitor the source connected to the PIP input while watch ing another video source When desired you may swap the images by pressing and holding the PIP Swap Button for several seconds This will display the main source in the PIP win dow and the PIP source in the main viewing area There are two available PIP modes in one mode a small inset window will appear on the CVPD50 screen and it will display the source c
169. e present for short periods of time with in the disc Producers will usually insert some sort of icon or graphic in the picture to alert you to the availability of multiple angle scenes Progressive scan If you are using the CVR700 with the CVPD50 display and with no external DVD players you may skip this section as the internal DVD player outputs a digital video signal that is passed directly to the CVPD50 using the proprietary interface cable The CVR700 offers progressive scan video outputs for use with compatible high res olution televisions and projectors Before DVD no consumer medium could store transmit or display video with full resolu tion To conserve bandwidth analog com pression interlacing is employed first the odd numbered lines of a frame are displayed followed by the even num bered lines The result is that only half of the video image is drawn at one time the viewers brain must reassemble the com plete image This is acceptable if the monitor is not too large and if there is not too much motion in the image Large dis plays and fast moving images reveal the limitations of this system Thanks to DVD s immense data capacity images are now stored intact progressively so that all the lines in each frame odd and even are shown at the same time But because most TVs cannot handle a progressive signal all current DVD players generate an interlaced output for compatibility The CVR700 is among the sel
170. e right of the device in use In our example that is the VCR When the desired combina tion of devices appears press the Set Button PUNCH THROUGH 884 M DUD Figure 101 6 When the Set button is pressed the display will change to show you that the new combination of control com mands is being saved to the unit s memory as shown in Figure 102 The word SAVED will flash four times and then the remote will return to normal operation SHS lt MZDUD TRS SAVED a Figure 102 7 Once the punch through is pro grammed the transport buttons of the second device named will be used when those buttons are pressed while the master device is in use Returning the Transport Control Settings to Default Operation If you wish to remove the Transport Punch Through so that the transport com mands are returned to the factory default setting follow the steps shown above except that in Steps 4 and 5 select the same device for both the DEWICE IN USE on the left side of the bottom line and the PUINCH THROLIGH device In the example used the display to return the remote to default settings will appear as shown in Figure 103 PUNCH THROUGH sys lt sys Figure 103 EzSet Configuration JBL s patented EzSet feature makes it easier than ever to calibrate the output levels on your new home theater system for maxi mum playback accuracy In addition to automatically setting the levels the remote s LCD display
171. e side you wish to play should be facing up Once a disc is properly loaded press the Eject Button i to close the disc drawer After the drawer closes you will need to instruct the CVR700 to play the disc by pressing the Play Button 1 A The Lower Display Line H will prompt you for a disc number You may enter the number of any loaded disc either by pressing its corresponding Disc Selector El or by using the Numeric Keys A If you don t select a disc the CVR700 will load the last disc played However if no other discs are loaded and you press the Play Button A instead of the Eject Button 2 to close the disc drawer the CVR700 will close the door and begin play of the disc you just loaded You will briefly see LOADING in the Information Display to alert you to the fact that the unit is determining the type of disc DVD DVD Audio CD VCD JPEG WMA or MP3 and is reading the data for track chapter title and other information about the disc Status Bar Once the disc s data has been read the type of disc will be displayed by the Disc Type Indicator and the disc will begin playing The disc s track timing information and other relevant data will appear in the Upper Display Line fil While a disc is playing you may access the Status Bar by pressing the Status Button Ax to view information on the current title and chapter to change the current title or chapter or to view time elapsed or
172. e which channels are contained in the digital bitstream For example for a Dolby Digital EX bitstream the L C R SL SR SBL SBR and LFE indicators will light with a line between the SBL and SBR boxes to indicate that those two channels are in mono This is the only indication of the number of channels present in the signal The Surround Mode Indicator that identifies the bitstream will also light The Lower Display Line H will indicate the sur round mode you have assigned to that source using the AUDIO MODE sub menu system or the remote When Dolby Digital 5 1 or DTS or DTS ES signals are being played the CVR700 will automatically switch to the proper sur round mode and no other processing may be selected When a Dolby Digital signal with 4 0 or 2 0 channels is detected you may select any Dolby surround mode When the digital audio data stream has been interrupted or is no longer present such as when a DVD disc is paused or stopped the Speaker Channel Input Indicators zl will flash to indicate that no signal is present This is normal and does not indicate any problem with your system PCM Playback PCM is the abbreviation for Pulse Code Modulation which is the type of digital signal used for standard CD playback and other non Dolby Digital and non DTS digital sources such as Mini Disc When a PCM signal is detected the Lower Display Line 3 will briefly show a message with the letters PCM in add
173. ear any low frequency sounds from the side sur round channels When LARGE is selected a full range output will be sent to the side surround channel outputs and NO surround channel signals will be sent to the subwoofer output When NONE is selected surround sound information will be split between the front left and front right outputs For optimal performance when no surround speakers are in use the Dolby 3 Stereo mode should be used When you have completed your selec tions for the side surround channels press the A W Navigation Controls A to move the cursor to BACK SURROUNDS Press the lt p gt Navigation Controls A to select the option that best describes the speakers in use at the left and right back surround positions based on these definitions When NONE is selected the system will adjust so that only 5 1 channel sur round processing decoding modes are available and the surround back amplifier channels will not be used This setting will override any setting made previously in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION submenu Figure 7 When SMALL is selected the system will adjust so that the full complement of 6 1 7 1 surround processing decoding modes are available and low frequency information below the crossover point will be sent to the subwoofer output If you choose this option and there is no subwoofer connected you will not hear any low frequency sounds from the sur round back channels When LARGE is se
174. earning remote that is capable of controlling the source devices in your system you will need to program it separately from the CVR700R2 remote with the codes for your other components It is already preprogrammed at the factory to control your CVR700 and its internal disc changer as well as the CVPD50 screen Power On All A DVD Tuner Auxiliary VCR CBL SAT Input Selectors Sports Broadcast and Movies Preset Selectors A V Navigation Buttons A Level DVD Setup Guide Button A 4P Navigation Buttons Set Button Exit Cancel Button Direct Brightness Window Button 4h Game Digital Recorder Computer Input Selectors 4h Mute Button 4h Volume Up Down Control Ax Disc Direct Favorite Button 4h Alphanumeric Keys 4h Angle Tuning Mode Tune Manual Button MA Screen Saver Letterbox Button 4h PIP On Off PIP Swap Button 4h Auto PIP Channel Up Button 4h Learn Screen Standby PIP Channel Down Button h Light Button Ax Program Record Button Freeze PVR List Button Pause Button Ax Frame Stop PVR Live Button Forward Play Button Status TV Video PVR Play Button Ax Tuning Down Reverse Search Button Memory Zoom Button Tuning Up Forward Search Button A Preset Page Up Down Forward Reverse Skip Buttons Ax Disc Skip Last Channel Buttons Picture Channel Up Down and Slow Play Forward Reverse Button System Selector Ay Screen Selector Ax Tone Mode Color List Button Ax OSD
175. eceiver TiVo PVR DVR or VCR this button allows you to select between the television signal or one of the device s video inputs See the device s owner s manual for more infor mation on the use of this function B Light Button Press this button to activate the remote s backlight for ease of use in darkened rooms The light will remain active for 7 seconds after this but ton has been pressed and will remain lit for an additional 7 seconds after any other button on the remote has been pressed 1 Macro A B C Buttons Press these buttons to store or recall a Macro a sequence of commands that you may pro gram into the remote See page 80 for more information on programming and using macros These buttons have unique functions when used with game con soles cable TV boxes and PVRs See the owner s manual for the appropriate device for further information B Sleep PIP Move Button This but ton has different functions depending on which device is in use when it is pressed n the System mode the Sleep function is activated to automatically place the CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode after a period of time Each press of the button changes the time until turn off 90 minutes 80 minutes 70 minutes 60 min utes 50 minutes 40 minutes 30 minutes 20 minutes 10 minutes Sleep mode Off and then cycling back to 90 minutes and so forth When the Sleep timer is in use the front panel displays will d
176. ect few DVD players with true progressive scan video output for use with compatible TVs and CRT projectors and with all plasma LCD and DLP display devices via the compo nent video output The result is 4096 greater light output than a conventional TV and a stunningly detailed high defini tion image along with an almost com plete absence of visible scanlines and motion artifacts The CVR700 s sophisti cated pixel by pixel processing is a major advancement over the previous genera tion s line by line processing bringing out even greater detail in your favorite video presentations Of course traditional Y Pr Pb component video S video and composite video outputs are included for use with conventional televisions and projectors Reading This is a message that you will see when you first press the Play Button It refers to the fact that the player must first examine the contents of the disc to see whether it is a CD or DVD and then extract the information about the type of material on the disc such as languages aspect ratios subtitles num ber of titles and more The slight delay while the contents of the disc are read is normal Resume The operation of the Stop Button IF A on the CVR700 works differently from what you are used to on CD players On a traditional CD player when you press the Stop button the unit does just that it stops playback On a CD player when you press the Start butto
177. ect the device that will receive the punch through commands In our example that is the Game Cam button as that is where we want the CVR700 s volume controls to be active Press the A V Navigation Button until the name of the base device appears and then press the Set Button DEUICE IN USE TU A Figure 90 5 At the next display screen Fig 91 you will select the device whose Volume Up Down and Mute com mands will be used Press the A W Navigation Button until the desired device s name appears to the right of the device in use In our example that is the CVR700 indicated by DUD When the desired combination of devices appears press the Set Button PUNCH THROUGH GAMEX M DUD x Figure 91 6 When the Set button is pressed the display will change to show you that the new combination of control com mands is being saved to the unit s memory as shown in Figure 92 The word SAVED will flash four times and then the remote will return to normal operation GAMEX M DUD VOL SAVED Figure 92 7 Once the punch through is pro grammed the Volume Up Down and Mute buttons of the second device named will be used when those con trols are pressed while the mas ter device is in use Returning the Volume Control Settings to Default Operation If you wish to remove the Volume punch through so that the commands for Volume and Mute are returned to the factory default setti
178. ects directly over them Cleaning When the unit gets dirty wipe it with a clean soft dry cloth If necessary wipe it with a soft cloth dampened with mild soapy water then a fresh cloth with clean water Wipe immediately with a dry cloth NEVER use benzene aerosol cleaners thinner alcohol or any volatile cleaning agent Do not use abrasive cleaners as they may damage the finish of metal parts Avoid spraying insecticide near the unit face When placing the unit on a shelf Unpacking Cartons and shipping materials used to protect your new system components during shipment are specially designed to cushion them from shock and vibration We suggest that you save the carton and packing materials for use in shipping if you move or should the unit ever need repair To minimize the size of the cartons in storage you may wish to flatten them This is done by carefully slitting the tape seams on the bottom and collapsing the carton down to a more two dimensional appearance Other cardboard inserts may be stored in the same manner Packing materials that cannot be collapsed should be saved along with the carton in a plastic bag If you do not wish to save the packaging materials please note that the carton and other sections of the shipping protec tion are recyclable Please respect the environment and discard those materials at a local recycling center Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma Display Always make
179. ects the relative vertical position of the PIP window on the CVPD50 screen When the dark square is towards the right side of the bar the win dow is positioned toward the top of the screen and when the square is towards the left side of the bar the window is positioned toward the bottom of the screen Use the lt gt Navigation Controls A to adjust this setting Pressing the Set Button A repeat edly will only move the window upwards but not downwards Picture Settings With the SCREEN MENU Fig 33 on screen scroll down to the PICTURE SETTINGS line and select it by pressing the Set Button A The PICTURE SETTINGS submenu Figure 37 will be displayed PICTURE SETTINGS Digital Video Input Mode Broadcast Contrast Brightness Sharpness 1x3 Color 15 3 3 DNC 5 7 Photo off Reset input Back to screen menu Figure 37 Vou mav wish to use a test disc to guide vou through the adjustment process Several are available from Internet retailers Alternativelv we recommend that vou select one of the three factorv preset modes designed for optimal displav of various tvpes of programs These modes are also directiv accessible from both remote controls The Sports mode is designed for the tvpes of images normallv used in sporting events the Movies mode displavs the images found in manv movies which are often darker than normal and the Broadcast mode offers the best displav of broadcast
180. ed scroll down to the AUDIO MODE menu Figure 14 AUDIO MODE BACK TO AUDIO MODE MENU Figure 14 The options available for the DVD Audio disc audio modes differ from the other disc types because the DVD Audio format outputs 5 1 channel audio that is not sub ject to further surround processing How ever as indicated by the available options shown in Fig 15 you may select whether to pass the audio output directly to the speakers without any bass management processing DIRECT or you may select the BASS MANAGEMENT mode which passes the digital audio to the CVR700 s processor so that low fre quency portions of the audio may be steered to the appropriate speakers depending on the capabilities of your specific speakers If you are using the JBL Cinema Vision speaker system you may leave the DVD Audio disc audio mode at the default BASS MANAGEMENT setting If you are using other speakers you should select DIRECT and make sure to configure your speakers using the SPEAKERS submenu as described on page 48 DVD AUDIO x DIRECT BASS MANAGEMENT BACK TO SOURCES MENU Figure 15 The available audio modes for DVD Video audio CD Video CD and com pressed audio discs are reflected in Figure 16 Note however that the options shown each encompass a suite of surround modes Although a more com plete explanation of the available sur round modes may be found on page 62 the DOLBY surround m
181. ed You may choose to remove the status banners from view after 2 3 4 or 5 seconds or you may choose the Off setting in which they are not displayed at all Show Startup Screen This setting may be set to or 0ff and it determines whether the JBL logo screen appears when the CVPD50 is powered up OSD Transparency This tem perature bar reflects whether the Screen menus appear transparent so that the current video image may be seen behind them dark square to the left or opaque so that they have a black background that blocks any view of the video image dark square to the right There is a reset line hat may be used to reset the settings in his menu only DVD auto picture resize JBL recommends that you eave this setting in the default On posi jon so that images video and still on DVDs VCDs and JPEG discs will be auto matically resized by the CVR700 to fill the CVPD50 screen This setting only applies o the CVR7005 internal disc changer for external video sources you will still need to use the Frame Button 39 or the Letterbox Button Ax to select a dis play mode for each source that fills the screen Also note that some DVDs include a letterboxed version in which black bars above and below the picture are part of the 57 58 movie frame For this reason it is not possi ble to remove those black bars and you may prefer to watch a non letterboxed ver sion of the movie if provi
182. eeting factory specifications Handle the AC Power Cord Gently When disconnecting the power cord from an AC outlet always pull the plug never pull the cord If you do not intend to use the unit for any considerable length of time disconnect the plug from the AC outlet Do Not Open the Cabinet There are no user serviceable compo nents inside this product Opening the cabinet may present a shock hazard and any modification to the product will void your guarantee If water or any metal object such as a paper clip wire or a staple accidentally falls inside the unit disconnect it from the AC power source immediately and consult an authorized service center Installation Location m o ensure proper operation and to avoid the potential for safety hazards place the unit on a firm and level sur be certain that the shelf and any mounting hardware can support the weight of the product m Make certain that proper space is pro vided both above and below the unit for ventilation If this product will be installed in a cabinet or other enclosed area make certain that there is sufficient air movement within the cabinet m Do not place the unit directly on a carpeted surface m Avoid moist or humid locations m Avoid installation in extremely hot or cold locations or an area that is exposed to direct sunlight or heating equipment m Do not obstruct the ventilation slots on the sides of the unit or place obj
183. emote receives IR codes to be learned through a receiver behind the lens See page 93 for more information on learning remote codes INSTALLING AND CONNECTING THE EQUIPIVIENT Before unpacking and placing the JBL Cinema Vision components it is impor tant to select appropriate locations for each component Make sure that all power switches are turned off and all equipment remains unplugged from AC power until the system is completely installed and connected in order to pre vent electric shock or transient signals that may damage equipment IMPORTANT NOTES Never attempt to lift the CVPD50 plasma screen by yourself Always make sure an assistant is available to lift the plasma screen with you Do not block the ventilation holes of the CVR700 and make sure that air can circulate freely around it Read through this manual before begin ning installation Remember to observe the color coding when connecting audio and video cables Recommended Placement The JBL Cinema Vision system will provide the best results when installed in a rectangular room with the screen installed on one of the shorter walls The front speakers should be placed the same distance from each other as they are from the listening position They should be placed at about the same height from the floor as the listeners ears will be or they may be angled toward the listeners The center channel speaker should be placed slightly
184. ent mode from that group if it is already in use or the first available mode if you are cur rently using another mode To cycle through the available modes in that group press the button again until the desired mode appears in the Lower Display Line 3 and in the front panel Surround Mode Indicators The Dolby Digital Dolby Digital EX DTS 5 1 DTS ES Matrix and DTS ES Discrete modes may only be selected when a digi tal input is in use In addition when a digital source is present the CVR700 will automatically select and switch to the correct mode regardless of the mode that has been previously selected For more information on selecting digital sources see the Digital Audio Playback section below When a DVD Audio disc is in use there is no surround processing as the analog output signal from a DVD Audio disc is carried straight through to the preamp section To listen to a program in traditional two channel stereo using the front left and right speakers only plus the subwoofer if installed and configured press the Stereo Mode Select Button A until SURROUND OFF appears in the Lower Display Line 3 From the front panel press the Surround Mode Selector E until SURROUND OFF appears in the Lower Display Line B Digital Audio Playback Digital audio is a major advancement over analog surround processing systems It delivers up to six discrete channels and each channel reproduces full frequency range
185. entional Repeat modes are accessed by repeatedly pressing the Repeat Button to cycle through the available modes or exit Repeat mode DVDs The conventional Repeat modes are only available while the disc is play ing Each press of the Repeat Button 39 will cycle through the Chapter Repeat On Title Repeat On and Repeat Off modes Audio CDs The available conventional Repeat modes vary depending on whether the disc is in Play mode or Stop mode While a disc is playing each press of the Repeat Button 29 will cycle through the Repeat One Track Repeat All Tracks Repeat All Discs and Repeat Off settings as displayed on screen in a banner and on the front panel The selected Track or disc will be repeatedly played until play is stopped or the Repeat mode is exited In Repeat All Discs mode if the CVR700 detects a DVD in a succeeding tray it will play it but it will automatically end Repeat mode In Stop mode only the Repeat All Tracks and Repeat All Discs modes are available VCDs The conventional Repeat modes are only available in Stop mode As with audio CDs only the Repeat All Tracks and Repeat All Discs modes are available MP3 and WMA discs The conventional Repeat modes are available in both Play and Stop modes Unlike other disc types the folders and files on a compressed audio disc are displayed on screen and may be navigated see page 72 Thus it is possible to program Repeat One File mode while the
186. er Off All Power On All LCD Information Display Input Selectors Screen Selector Q System Selector B Surround Mode Selector B Test Tone Button Logic 7 Mode Sports Preset Button SPL Select Button QD Audio Input Selector D Direct Brightness Window Button lt Tone Mode Color List Button D OSD Contrast Button 9 Angle Tuning Mode Button Level Guide Button A W 4 9 Navigation Disc Exit Cancel Button Set Button 10 Preset Page Down Reverse Skip Button Volume Up Down Control Tuning Down Reverse Search Button 2 Record Stop Pause Transport Controls 20 Status Settings Button 22 Title Freeze Button Random Letterbox Button Repeat Frame Button A B Auto Button Program PVR Replav Button Disc Skip PVR List Button Audio Screen Saver Button Subtitle TV Video Button Light Button Macro A B C Buttons B Sleep PIP Move Button T3 Night Mode PIP Channel Down utton Disc Direct PVR Live Button Remote Menu PIP Channel Up utton DVD Setup PIP On Off PIP Swap Button JBL On Screen Library Favorite Button G Play Transport Control Button Tuning Up Forward Search Button Channel Slow Play Up Down Control Preset Page Up Forward Skip Button Last Channel Distance Button Screen Setup Disc Menu Info Button Zoom Memory Button Alphanumeric Keys Stereo Mode Movies Preset Button DTS Neo 6 Mode Broadcast Pres
187. er out put levels The EzSet remote also has a manual SPL meter function to assist with manual setting of the output levels or trimming the settings to an external source See page 51 for more information on EzSet 25 26 Audio Input Selector Press this button to select one of the digital audio inputs for use with its source or to select the analog audio input for that source It is not possi ble to reassign a digital audio input to another source See page 60 for more information on using digital inputs B Direct Brightness Window Button Press this button when the tuner is in use to directly enter a stations fre quencv or when a CD is in use to directiv enter a track number After pressing this button press the appropriate Alpha numeric Keys to select a station or track When the Screen mode is active press this button to adjust the brightness of the CVPD50 Use the lt gt Navigation Controls 2 A to increase or decrease the brightness setting See page 55 for more information on screen adjustments This button also activates the Window function for TiVo players See your TiVo owner s manual for more information on the Window function D Tone Mode Color List Button This button controls the tone settings enabling adjustment of the bass and tre ble boost or cut You may also use it to disable the tone controls for a flat response The first press of the button isplays a TONE IN message
188. er point is set by the design of your speakers Depending on the design and driver complement of your speakers it is usually the lowest possible frequency the speaker is capable of reproducing but it may be different for speakers that include a powered woofer section intended to reproduce the LFE channel Before making any changes to he settings for the crossover point we suggest that you find the crossover point or the speakers in each of the four groupings front left right center front side surround and back surround by look ing at the specifications page of each speaker s owner s manual by getting that information from the manufacturer s Web site or by contacting your dealer or the manufacturer s customer service depart ment You will need this figure to accu rately configure the next group of settings Note that when any speaker group other than the front left right speakers is set to LARGE the crossover may not be adjusted as the feed will be full range with no sound being derived for the sub woofer at that position The factory default setting for all speaker positions is 90Hz To change one of the settings return to the SPEAKERS submenu Figure 20 and then scroll to the CROSSOVERS line and select it The SPEAKER CROSSOVERS submenu Figure 22 will be displayed To change the setting for any of the four speaker groups press the A W Navigation Controls A until the cursor is next to the speaker group wher
189. er that requires a dif ferent numeric key to be pressed simply press that button The cur sor will automatically move to the next position and the first letter accessed by the new button will appear Following our example the next letter needed is U so you would press the 8 button twice b To enter a letter that uses the same numeric key you must first press the gt Navigation Button to move the blinking cursor block to the next position Then press the Alphanumeric Key as required to enter the desired letter This is the way you would enter the second L in the word FULL To enter a blank space press the p Navigation Button twice The first press will move the cursor to the right and the second press will move the cursor one more space to the right leaving a blank space between the last letter and the next one ca 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 as needed to complete entering the needed letters numbers characters and spaces 10 When the text entry is complete press the Set Button The new name will be entered into the remote s memory replacing the default name 11 At this point you have two options a The screen shown in Figure 113 will appear prompting you to con tinue renaming Press the Set Button to select CONTINUE RENAME BUTTON CONTINUE A Figure 113 The remote will return to the FRESS A BUTTON menu option Fig 111 as shown in Step 6 Repeat the in
190. ers forward or back ward through the list To start play of the track selected on the list press the Set Button Ad or Play Button FIG A During MP3 WMA playback some of the standard CD DVD playback controls oper ate in their normal fashion You may skip forward to the next track on the disc by pressing the Skip Forward Button 9 A You may skip back to the current or previous track on the disc by pressing the Skip Reverse Button FIED A once or twice e Press the Pause Button PIED A to momentarily stop playback Press the Play Button A to resume play Press the Stop Button 69 A twice to enter stop mode You may search through tracks forward or in reverse by pressing the appropri ate Search Buttons 6D A A You may play an MP3 or WMA disc in random mode like a normal CD see page 68 The Repeat function may be accessed during playback of an MP3 or WMA disc NOTES ON MP3 AND WMA PLAYBACK During playback the front panel display and the time indicator on the screen above the list will show the elapsed time of the track being played Other time display options are not available with MP3 WMA playback The CVR700 is only compatible with standard MP3 and WMA encoded discs Other compressed audio formats used for Internet audio downloads will not play on the CVR700 Due to the differences in various ver sions of the MP3 and WMA formats and the many differences between th
191. es JPEG stands for the Joint Photographic Experts Group which devel oped a standard for compressing still images such as photographs JPEG files may be created on a personal computer by importing images from a digital cam era or scanning printed photographs These files may be burned onto a com pact disc The CVR700 is among the DVD players that are capable of recognizing JPEG files and enabling you to view them your video screen MP3 Files MP3 is an audio compression format that was developed by the Motion Picture Experts Group as an adjunct to the MPEG 1 video compression format A number of encoding software programs are available for transferring CDs and other audio programs into the MP3 for mat The main benefit of MP3 is that it reduces the size of audio files consider ably depending on the amount of com pression selected during the encoding process enabling you to store many more songs on one compact disc than in the standard audio CD format The CVR700 is capable of playing MP3 files and display ing the filenames on screen Multiple Angle DVDs have the capabil ity to show up to four different views of the same scene in a program When a disc is encoded with multiple angle infor mation pressing the Angle Button A will enable you to switch between these different views Note that at present few discs take advan tage of this capability and when they do the multiple angle technology may only b
192. es Such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third ground ing prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your out let consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus 1 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manu facturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart appa ratus combination to avoid injury from tip over 13 Unplug this apparatus during light ning storms or when unused for long periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified serv ice personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped 15 Do not use attachments not recom mended by t
193. es JBUNL Jas JBUNL Jeg1eun egjeun jegjeun j un jegjeun jegjeun jegjeun JASJBUNI jegieun JBUNI Jes JBUNL Jeg1eunj IBUNIJJAW JAH 10 195 GAC 195 GAG 195 GAG 195 195 les GAG S GAC 195 les a a 195 qid Ies GAG 195 GAC Sad les GAC 195 195 90 les 195 195 185 195 195 195 les jeg u33J U93S usejg jeg J U II ueeng U88J9S U88J9S U88J9S U88J2S U88J9S U88J9S Jes 099125 9 U89 9S U89 2S 60 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 jeg J9S WAJSAS uejs og JOS WAJSAG jag WAJSAG jeg uejs g jas walshg WAJSAS W9JSAS uejs o ulejs S W9 SAS W9 SAS WAJSAS jeg uejs S jeg WaysAS WAJSAS TO an ain an an an an an an an any 0 9 04 JO ISMOd 30 9 30 19 4 HOMOJ HOMOJ 0018 15 dois J04ewog HOMOJ HOMOJ 09 0 Jewog JSMOd H0 19 04 20 ug Jamog UQJJOMOd ujjewog ugjewog ugiewog ugiewog doig ueis held JaMog ugiewog ugjewog UQJAMOg 1 M0d UQ Jamog UQ Jamog up 10 WINN NIVIN JINVN MGH 131535 N33H9S IVS 149 Yd 0 WYJ 3IWV9 SHAG 9 UJA N WV WJ NOLLf8 ON ISI uonouny ZHOOZHAO dems
194. esired aspect ratio for viewing program materials independent of the aspect ratio encoded on the disc The following settings are available 16 9 This setting is used to display 16 9 program material in the full screen 16 9 mode on the CVPD50 4 3 TO 16 9 NL This mode adjusts a 4 3 aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50 s 6 9 screen while creating a more natural looking picture This is accomplished by stretching the two sides of the picture more than the center of the picture where most of the content is 4 3 LTRBOX TO 16 9 This mode is used to adjust an image which is designed to display a 16 9 movie on a 4 3 screen In order to preserve the full width of the movie on a narrower screen the image is reduced in size and black bars appear above and below it This setting zooms in on the image enabling it to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 screen without losing any portion of the image The image is simply enlarged so that its two sides fit he edges of the CVPD50 16 9 screen and he black bars on top and bottom are cropped off 2 35 LB TO 16 9 NL This mode is used o adjust an image from a widescreen film which is actually at a wider ratio han the CVPD50 s 16 9 ratio In order to fit on the smaller screen the image is compressed but no portion of the image is lost 2 35 LB TO 16 9 CROPPED This mode is an alternative adjustment for a widescreen film The image is not com pressed or scaled in any
195. ess the A W Navigation Control A to change the setting to TONE OUT which is flat response without the tone controls being active When the tone controls are active the bass and treble boost cut may be adjusted by first pressing the Tone Mode Button B until the desired setting BASS MODE or TREBLE MODE appears in the 59 60 Lower Display Line 9 Next use the A W Navigation Control A to change the setting as desired The unit will return to normal operation within 5 seconds after the setting is changed For private listening plug the 1 4 stereo phone plug from a pair of stereo headphones into the front panel Headphone Jack When the headphone s plug is connected the word HEADPHONE will scroll once across the Lower Display Line BA and all speakers will be silenced When the headphone plug is removed the audio feed to the speakers will be restored Surround Mode Selection One of the most important features of the CVR700 is its ability to reproduce a full multichannel sound field from digital sources analog matrix surround encoded programs and standard stereo programs Selection of a surround mode is based on personal taste as well as the type of program source material being used For example motion pictures or TV programs bearing the logo of one of the major sur round encoding processes such as Dolby Surround or DTS Stereo may be played in either the Dolby Digital Dolby Pro Logic II Movi
196. ess the Set Button 4A to select the front speaker group and FRONT will stop flashing Use the a W Navigation Controls A to select the desired distance and press the Set Button again to enter it Use the A Navigation Controls A to scroll through the remaining speaker groups CENTER SIDE S side surround or BA CK S back surround available only after a 6 1 channel bit stream has been detected Menu Info Audio Input Selector In DVD mode this button accesses the menu on the current disc enabling you to select the main feature or accompanying featurettes for playback or make other selections depending on how the disc is programmed In System mode press this button to assign one of the Digital Audio Inputs to a source See page 60 for more information on using digital inputs 37 38 A Power Off All Press this button to place the CVR700 and CVPD5O or a selected device in the Standby mode Press and hold this button to place all devices including the CVR700 the CVPD50 and any other products whose codes you have programmed into the remote into the Standby mode IR Transmitter Receiver The infrared emitters and receivers behind the plastic lens at the top of the remote communicate the remote codes to the CVR700 and other programmed devices Be certain that the lens is not covered when using the remote and point the lens toward the CVR700 for the best results In learning mode the r
197. est of this manual to describe the button functions for the main remote Figure 119 OO JBL Zoo 6 5 CVR700R2 89 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ee 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 c L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L le auo dwa 10 09 001 uwogdunp umay 1p3 Aejdsiq saydeyy 1x9N 15 BU poyy 1S 1009 3u0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 6 6 6 8 6 6 S 8 G 8 G E E 5 8 Y Y Y Y Y y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y weiBolg 10910 ssaulybug dqdwnp smopuiM lt Paq JILL 19910 pag ulM ybug oaig En vC jndu olpny jndu oipny indu oipny jndu oipny A UMOQ SIN 08181S S N K N JISNAI umu MO S Noway oipny uwogejeg ejdsig YORI 19 091915 08181S S IA0W 09191S Z 19edsy 9 09 510 ISEJPEOJQ Jv Add diis WO AL9N 40799 umog dois 9 08N SIC 9 9NSIQ 1 9 9 08N 1 0c uondeg 1 21601 5100 uoi de XEJN AL 10V xepu X N UMOQ JJEJS 1 21601 1 960 900 2160 6 dS 145 195 8 dn pie yoeg punouns 10 eg MOPUIM yoeg N
198. et Button Gogoo06000 w 90900 090909 9 e 8 BOGS B 89 9 eeeoo B amp DTS Digital Surround Mode Button EB Dolby Surround Mode Button Mute Button ON OFF IBL HOLD PRESS amp HOLD FOR SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Gss ox se B A D M TEST SURR DOLBY DTSSURR O SPE ETISPORTS DTS NEQ 6 B CAST ST MOVIES AUDIO INPUT ABC DEF O Q 0 0O DIR BRIGHT WIN GHI JKL MNO Q O TONE COLR LIST PQRS TUV WXYZ l B 0O OSD CONTRAST ANGLE TUNE 2 200M MEM PRESET PAGE DN STATUS SETTINGS LTRBOX FREEZE RANDOM TITLE ON OFF REPEAT AB PIP svar FRAME AUTO Fes PROG D SKIP D DIRECT MENU Fo z e em SCRN SVR TV VIDEO SLEEP NIGHT CVR700R2 M 3zSet GGG EzSet Microphone Sensor EB IR Transmitter Receiver O CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS IMPORTANT NOTE The JBL Cinema Vision remotes are powerful devices capable of controlling virtually your entire home cinema system In comparison to a traditional system of the same capabili ties these remotes can replace up to 10 Separate remote controls and therefore end the confusion and clutter associated with having a different remote for each of your system components In order to achieve this goal the JB
199. etting will also apply a linear consistent stretch to a 4 3 picture 4 3 LTRBOX TO 16 9 This mode is used to adjust an image which is designed to display a 16 9 movie on a 4 3 screen In order to preserve the full width of the movie on a narrower screen the image is reduced in size and black bars appear above and below it This setting zooms in on the image enabling it to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 screen without losing any portion of the image The image is simply enlarged so that its two sides fit the edges of the CVPD50 16 9 screen and the black bars on top and bottom are cropped off The image is stretched in a linear fashion evenly throughout the frame 2 35 LB TO 16 9 NL This mode is used to adjust an image from a widescreen film which is actually at a wider ratio than the CVPD50 s 16 9 ratio In order to fit on the smaller screen the image is compressed in a nonlinear fashion but no portion of the image is lost 2 35 LB TO 16 9 CROPPED This mode is an alternative adjustment for a widescreen film The image is not com pressed or scaled in any way but the outer edges are cropped sacrificing a slight amount of the original content in exchange for 10096 accurate image pro portions 4 3 HDTV TO 16 9 As HDTV is new to the broadcast industry and there is still a considerable amount of older 4 3 stan dard recording and broadcast equipment in use 4 3 material is sometimes broad cast in HD 16 9 format wit
200. everse Search Buttons T Each press will increase the scan speed by one step cycling through the available scan speeds for each disc type see below If you press the opposite direction search button while in Search mode the CVR700 will begin to scan in the opposite direction Press the Play Button to stop scanning For DVD Audio and DVD Video playback there are four forward and reverse search speeds Fach press of the Forward Reverse Search Buttons 6 26 A will cycle to the next speed in the following order 2x 16x 64x 200x For CD and VCD playback there are three forward and reverse search speeds 2x Ax Ox For MP3 and WMA compressed audio file playback there are four forward and reverse search speeds 2x 4x 8x 16x For DVD Video discs only you may play the program material in forward or reverse slow motion Press the Slow Play Forward Reverse Controls BA to cycle through the three available speeds 1 2x 1 4x 1 8x NOTE There will be no audio playback during forward or reverse fast or slow play of DVDs as it isn t possible to decode and process the digital audio streams during these modes However audio will be heard during fast play of audio CDs slow play is not available for CDs The front panel Skip Search Buttons EJ function slightly differently than the remote buttons When the disc changer is the source press and release these buttons to move skip either ba
201. eydeu jeaday dns dnjeg aping janay dmas QAQ 1 S N S N 0 sepeoJg yseopeog 60 500 sods 80 195 195 195 195 195 les 195 Ies 195 195 195 195 195 195 195 Ies 1VS 189 1VS 189 lvs 18 1vs 18 1vs 18 lvs 189 i1vs 18 1vs 18 1vsS 18 18 19 15 9 1vs 18 18 19 1VS 189 1VS 189 1VS 189 1VS 189 10 S HJA S HJA 195 HOA 195 HOA S HJA 88 HOA S 195 HOA 195 HOA 195 HOA S HJA S HJA 88 S 88 S HJA HJA 90 xny xny Jegxny jeg xny 85 xny 85 xny 85 xny Jes xny Jegxny Jes xny xny 85 xny xny 85 xny xny xny G0 jas jeunj jeg jeunj jes munj jeg ieunj jeg jeunj jag uni jes ieunj jes sunj guni jes jeunj jes ueunj jes jeunj jes ieunj jes meunj jeg jeunj Jes eunj INV NJ IAV Wi Y N YO 88 QAQ 88 QAQ lesqAd 195 GAG 88 QAQ 95 GAG 195 95000 195 195 9 9 GAG 95 GAG 9 88 QAQ a a 0 JaMog 19wog 30 01ewog HOMOJ 015 615 dos 30 1 jjQJewOg Jamog H0 Jamog H0 Jamog HO IV 20 U J9MOg upjewog ugsaMog ugJewog ugiewog 015 615 held ugjewog ugiewog UQJAMOg UO JaMog UQ Jamog UQ Jamog up 10 HINAL ALAH WJLSAS N33H9S LVS 19 tAd OAIL 3WNV9 SHAG aaa d 05 UJA
202. f the remote s display will show the output level of the speakers as the test tone circulates The level will show as a direct SPL indication between 66dB and 79dB Below 66dB the remote will read LO and above 79dB it will read HIGH 4 When all channels have an equal vol ume level the adjustment is complete When you are finished with all adjust ments press the Test Tone Button gt to return the remote to normal operation The word EXITING will blink four times and the remote will switch to the DUD ZMAIN mode NOTE The subwoofer level is not adjustable when the normal test tone is in use The subwoofer output level may be adjusted when the channel levels are being trimmed to a program source rather than the test tone The output levels may also be adjusted at any time using the remote control and front panel display To adjust the output levels in this fashion press the Test Tone Button As soon as the button is pressed the test tone will begin to cir culate as indicated earlier The correct channel from which the test noise should be heard will be shown in the Lower Display Line 3 While the test noise is circulating the proper channel position will also be indicated in the Speaker Channel Input Indicators 9 by a blinking letter within the correct channel To adjust the output level press the A Navigation Controls until the desired level is shown in the display Once the buttons are released the test no
203. f the video set tings and allow the CVPD50 and CVR700 to automatically display your materials using the factory default settings As you become more familiar with the system and desire to tweak it you may wish to explore some of these settings Inputs and Picture in Picture Settings Scroll to the INPUTS PIP menu and select it The INPUTS PIP menu Figure 34 will be displayed INPUTS PIP Main input Digital Input settings PIP mode Off PIP size E PIP horiz pos PIP vart E Back to screen menu Figure 34 Main Input TheMain Input line is informational only and you should not attempt to change it The setting will reflect the video format of the current source For the internal DVD CD changer this setting will read Digital Forexternal sources this setting will indicate which video input is in use i e component video composite video or S video Input Settings The Input Settings line will not be accessi ble when the internal DVD CD changer is in use The available settings will vary depending upon the video format of the current source For DVI sources selecting Input Settings takes you to either the HD amp PC SETTINGS menu Figure 35a or the DVI SETTINGS menu Figure 35b depending on the type of source device you have connected to the DVI Computer input Scroll down to the Connected device line and select the appropriate source type DVD HDCP HD tuner or
204. f your CVPD50 screen 1 85 1 and 2 35 1 The aspect ratio of your screen is 1 78 1 which is very close to the 1 85 1 film ratio that is found in many movies recorded on DVDs or broadcast on television and these programs will fill your screen However some movies are filmed in the wider 2 35 1 ratio Check the jacket of your DVD to find its aspect ratio When playing such a DVD on your JBL Cinema Vision system if you have turned off the DVD Auto Resize feature or if your analog video signal is of higher resolution than 480i or DVI you may need to repeatedly press the Letterbox Button A on your remote con trol to select either the 2 35 LTRBOX TO 16 9 or 2 35 LB TO 16 9 CROPPED mode choosing the mode that provides the picture most pleas ng to you Note that the cropped mode may leave out portions of the frame in order to fit the image to the screen and you may prefer the scaled mode even though black bars will appear on the top and bottom of your Screen If you have turned off the DVD Auto Resize feature you may also choose how to view 4 3 ratio images You may view the image as is in which case black bars will appear on the left and right sides of the screen You may set the system to stretch the image to fill the screen using either linear the stretch is even across the entire image or non linear the stretch is more pronounced towards the edges of the image leaving the center nearly unmodified scaling W
205. g ea ogul aping p ng aping p ng epo eeg paads say 1ejdeu ejdsig epip epino 8pip Jewe X epmo ene jenej eping 8E 00 00 001 pOW uoreeg uo07 181U3 181 4007 01 00 00 Mowa w007 7 LE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 N 0 0Ud ur 994 ajbuy SES apoy q Aeidsiq aS0 080 JSEJJU0 aso aso Oju ogul kejdsig kejdsig aso JajdEUQ naud aso kejds g as0 aso aso 1SE1U0J QSO ve HINAL 3IWVN W3ISAS N33H9S 10 19 tAd OAIL INYO 3WV9 SHAG u d UJA N WV WJ NOLLf8 ON 90 91 0N 9 AW e 9 6 LL 8 eng a 9 2 9 SAMA Snid Y W L GL 161 vL UMOQ uMog Bolg UMOQ UI did YuBIN UMOQ U did P10294 XIND did U did JUBIN JU IN U9 did dae s dee g QpUEJS U99 98 A0N did MOJS le9 ay JEJINJEN MOJS leui jo ugepngng MOJS deis deg s dae s J 8 S 8A0N did ZL HOMAL 1wjesindu VS AL e ge AL induyA 9pngns 08PIM ALHO UQ 12 indu YOA AL HOMAL Snngns o piA Al llnqn s n oipny J ABS 125 oipny oipny JeAes OL df U did df U did a a ANQ Bue 294 dn 6029 49 did U9 did nue WAY Y9 did 69 81e 3 NT HAd MANT ds WO eed kejdsig q AD 159102810 2810 199 0 281 13310 Q AHAd 89 15 151 dni diis LY yareas ds 11 2810 018 2910
206. g on whether the internal disc changer DVD Main mode or the Screen mode is active To use this button be careful to press only on the upper portion of the button as other functions are accessed by pressing on the lower portion of the button In DVD Main mode press this button for playback in random order The Random function is not available when playing DVD Audio or DVD Video discs unless a playlist has been programmed and it is not available at all for JPEG discs In Screen mode when using the internal DVD changer this button is only active if the Auto Resize feature is turned off via the SCREEN MENU see page 57 This button performs the Letterbox function which enables you to adjust the screen to eliminate black bars that may appear on the top and bottom or sides of the image due to the aspect ratio of the program material differing from the 16 9 aspect ratio of the CVPD50 In most cases the CVR700 s video processor is able to auto matically detect the aspect ratio setting of the program material and adjust the display automatically to fill the screen However in some cases the material may be a movie displayed in widescreen 2 35 1 format or the material may not contain embedded information necessary for the CVR700 to make an automatic adjustment The available letterbox modes are 16 9 This setting is used to display 16 9 program material in the full screen 16 9 mode on the CVPD50 This s
207. g sessions to aviod burning a still image into the plasma display When used with a PIP capable device whose composite video output has been connected to the Picture in Picture Composite Video Input 0 pressing this button changes the channel of the PIP device to the next lower one It has no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50 Light Button Press this button to activate the remote s backlight for ease of use in darkened rooms The light will remain active for 7 seconds after this but on has been pressed and will remain lit or an additional 7 seconds after any other button on the remote has been pressed A Program Record Button In the DVD mode press this button to access he screen for programming play lists The Record function is used when the DR Input Selector 4b has been activated or use with an external recorder Freeze PVR List Button In Screen mode you may use this button to pause playback of the video picture while allow ing the audio playback to continue unin terrupted When a PVR is in use press this button to list recorded materials Refer to your PVR s owner s manual for information A Pause Button This button may be used with the internal disc changer or with an external DVD or CD player or other playback device Pressing the Pause button will pause play allowing you to step forward frame by frame through a DVD with each press of the Forward Skip Button Press the Pause B
208. ges These messages are generated by the DVD changer section of the CVR700 and are separate from banner messages generated by the CVPD50 screen Selecting a Disc For Playback There are several methods for playing a loaded disc in the CVR700 e Turn on the CVR700 by pressing the Main Power On Off Button El Any discs already loaded in the changer will be indicated by the Disc Indicators JB The indicator for the last disc played will be flashing Note that the Upper Display Line 1 will indicate that the unit is in Stop mode even when no discs are loaded Check for lit Disc Indicators B to deter mine whether any discs are available for play Play will not begin automati cally If you press the Play Button HO you will be prompted on the Lower Display Line 3 to enter the number of the disc you wish to play If you enter a disc number using the Numeric Keys or the Disc Selectors E the CVR700 will play that disc If you do nothing the CVR700 will play the last selected disc whose Disc Indicator B will be flashing If you wish to play a different disc you may skip to the next numbered disc by pressing the Disc Skip Button D Ax If you wish to skip to a differ ent disc press the Disc Direct Button KJ A and then enter the desired disc number using the Numeric Keys P A If there is no disc in that location the CVR700 will do nothing JBL On Screen Library With five disc positions available i
209. gital audio system capable of delivering 5 1 or 6 1 discrete or matrix sound field reproduction Although both DTS and Dolby Digital are digital they use different methods of encoding the signals and thus they require different decoding circuits to convert the digital signals back to analog DTS encoded soundtracks are available on select DVD and LD discs as well as on audio only DTS discs The CVR700 s internal DVD CD changer will automati cally detect and play any DTS encoded DVD loaded into it and no external con nections need to be made If you are con necting an external device to the CVR70O be aware that you may use any LD or CD player equipped with a digital output to play DTS encoded discs with the CVR700 All that is required is to connect the player s output to either an Optical or Coaxial Input on the rear panel or front panel EI In order to listen to DVDs encoded with DTS soundtracks the DVD player must be compatible with the DTS signal which is indicated by the DTS Digital Out logo on the player s front panel Some early DVD players were not able to play DTS encoded DVDs This does not indicate a problem with the CVR700 as those play ers cannot pass through the DTS signal If you re in doubt as to the capability of your DVD player to handle DTS discs consult the player s owner s manual NOTE Many DVD players have a default setting that does not pass through the DTS data even though
210. h black or other color bars on its sides Since these bars are a part of the actual picture con ventional picture resizing techniques do not work in eliminating them This setting is specifically designed to address this problem It first crops the bars off the sides of the 16 9 picture to render it a 4 3 picture and then performs a natural look ing nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16 9 screen 2 The Letterbox adjustment is temporary and will only apply to that disc We encourage you to experiment with the modes to find one that suits you for a given presentation Additional aspect ratio adjustments are available using the Frame Button 39 Repeat Frame Button This but ton s function differs depending on whether the internal disc changer DVD Main mode or the Screen mode is active To use this button be careful to press only on the lower portion of the button as other functions are accessed by press ing on the upper portion of the button In DVD mode pressing this buttons accesses the Repeat functions You may repeat a chapter track title disc file or programmed playlist For JPEG discs you may repeat one file or one folder but the repeat disc function is not available In Screen mode when using the internal DVD changer this button is only active if the Auto Resize feature is turned off via the SCREEN MENU This button performs the Frame function which enables you to set the d
211. he MAIN MENU and will be described on page 53 Output Level Adjustment Output level adjustment is a key part of the configuration of any surround sound product It is particularly important for a digital system such as JBL Cinema Vision as correct outputs ensure that you hear soundtracks with the proper direc tionality and intensity IMPORTANT NOTE Listeners are often confused about the operation of the sur round channels While some assume that sound should always be coming from each speaker most of the time there will be little or no sound in the surround channels This is because they are only used when a movie director or sound mixer specifically places sound there to create ambience a special effect or to continue action from the front of the room to the rear When the output levels are properly set it is normal for surround speakers to operate only occasionally Artificially increasing the volume to the rear speakers may destroy the illusion of an enveloping sound field that duplicates the way you hear sound in a movie the ater or concert hall Before beginning the output level adjust ment process make certain that all speaker connections have been properly made The system volume should be set to the level that you will use during a typ ical listening session While the CVR700 allows you to set output levels manually we recommend that the EzSet system be used when the CVR700 is first installed to establish
212. he UNIT OF MEASURE line on the menu Then press the lt p gt Navigation Controls f A so that METER is highlighted When the change in measurement units is made press the A W Navigation Controls to return the p gt cursor to the FRONT position With the on screen p gt cursor pointing to FRONT press the lt gt Navigation Controls DA until the distance from the front left and right speakers to the preferred listening position is entered Next scroll down to the CENTER line and enter the dis tance from the main listening position to the center speaker Repeat the procedure for all active speaker positions Note that only the speaker positions that have been set to LARGE or SMALL in the SPEAKER CONFIGURATION submenu Figure 21 may be adjusted The appearance of five dashes next to a speaker position in place of a distance setting indicates that you have not config ured an active speaker for that location When the delay time for all speaker posi tions has been set you may return to the master menu by scrolling to BACK TO MASTER MENU and then pressing the Set Button A However if you have a digital video source or a digital video display that causes lack of lip sync you may use the Lip Sync adjust feature to delay the audio signal as it is sent to all channels as opposed to the individual settings so that the picture and sound are brought back together That adjust ment is available in the LIP SYNC submenu of t
213. he final press will begin play of that file If no disc is found the STOP MODE DISCI message will appear and you will need to open the drawer to insert a disc IP Memory Pause Button The func tion of this button varies depending on whether you have selected the tuner or the disc changer as the input source When the tuner is the source press this button to store the currently tuned station as a preset Two flashing underlines will appear in the Upper Display Line x Press the Tuning Mode Button fii until PRE SE T appears in the Lower Display Line H to indicate the function of the Tuning Preset Buttons E then press either of the Preset Buttons until the desired preset location appears in place of the flashing underlines Press the Memory Button FJ again to store the station in the preset location displayed When the disc changer is the source pressing this button during playback freezes a picture for DVD and VCD discs and pauses the playback signal Pressing the Pause Button PJ twice places the DVD changer in the Step Forward mode in which each subsequent press of the Pause Button P advances the picture one step or frame Press the Play or Stop Button 8 to exit the Step Forward mode FM Mode Stop Button The func tion of this button varies depending on whether you have selected the tuner or the disc changer as the input source When the tuner is the source press this button to sw
214. he product manufacturer as they may cause hazards 16 This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home consult your product dealer or local power company For products intended to operate from battery power or other sources refer to the operating instructions 17 If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up static charges Article 810 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 provides information with regard to proper ground ing of the mast and supporting structure grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit size of grounding conductors location of antenna dis charge unit connection to grounding electrodes and requirements for the grounding electrode See Figure A 18 An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits When installing an outside antenna system extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal 19 Do not overload wall outlets exten sion cords or integral convenience recep tacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric sh
215. hen the 4 3 ratio image consists of a letterboxed movie you may simply zoom in to remove the black bars at the top and bottom of the screen Chapter DVD programs are divided into chapters and titles Chapters are the sub sections programmed into a single title on a disc Chapters may be compared to the individual tracks on an audio CD Press the Menu Button C A to see a listing of the chapters on a disc On DVD Audio discs a Chapter is referred to as a Track Component Video This form of video signal eliminates many of the artifacts of traditional composite video signals by splitting the signal into a separate lumi nance channel the Y signal channel and two color difference signals the Pr and Pb signal channels With a component video connection you will see greater picture resolution and eliminate many picture imperfections such as the moir patterns often seen on check patterned cloth However in order to benefit from component video you must have a video display with Y Pr Pb component video inputs Do not connect the component video outputs of the CVR700 to the stan dard composite or S video inputs of a TV or recorder NOTE The CVR700 is optimized to be used with the CVPD50 High Definition 14 Plasma Display Composite S video and component video monitor outputs on the CVR700 are provided as a means of con necting an auxiliary display only screen status messages and all digital video
216. hold the Remote Menu Button amp T5 for about three seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD dis play and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the Navigation Button 2 until USER RESET appears on the bot tom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 114 MAIN USER RESET Figure 114 3 Press the Set Button to reset the remote Note that once the Set button is pressed the process may not be stopped A RESETTING message will appear in the upper line of the remote s LCD screen as shown in Figure 115 while the remote s memory is being cleared It may take a few minutes for the reset process to take place and the length of time will vary depending on how much customization and programming has taken place Please be patient as long as the message appears in the display the remote is functioning properly RESETTING Figure 115 4 When the remote has been totally reset and returned to the factory default condition a REMOTE RESET COMPLETE message will appear Figure 116 briefly and then the remote will return to normal operation REMOTE RESET COMPLETE Figure 116 If the remote locks up for some reason and you wish to reset it without losi
217. holding the button again returns the PIP source to the inset and the main source to the main display JBL On Screen Library Favorite Button This button performs different functions depending on whether it is used with the internal DVD changer or another source In DVD Main mode this button accesses the JBL On Screen Library which displays on screen a thumbnail image and descrip tion of each disc currently loaded in the CVR700 s internal changer including disc type and title if available Use the 4 VW 4 W Navigation Controls f2 and the Set Button to conveniently select and play any loaded disc When used with cable television boxes or satellite receivers pressing this button scrolls through your list of prepro grammed favorite channels Play Transport Control Button This button is used with the internal DVD changer or an external DVD player VCR tape deck digital recorder CD player or any other device with a transport mecha nism to begin playback Tuning Up Forward Search Button This button has different func tions depending on whether the tuner or another source is in use Press this button when the tuner is in use to change the station to one with a higher frequency Each tap of this button will increase the frequency by one increment When the tuner receives a strong enough signal for adequate reception M ANUAL TUNED will appear in the Lower Display Line A When the tuner is in
218. i tion to a readout of the sampling frequency of the digital signal n most cases this will be PCM uu kHz or PCM 48kHz though in the case of specially mastered high resolution audio discs you will see a PCM HbKHz indication During PCM playback you may select any surround mode except one of the Dolby Digital or DTS DTS ES modes Speaker Channel Indicators n addition to the bitstream indicators he CVR700 features channel input indi cators that show how many channels of digital information are being received and or whether the digital signal is inter rupted see Figure 41 Fri LECT TR LUE 0 s 1 La Figure 41 These indicators the L C R LFE SL SR SBL SBR letters that are inside the center boxes of the Speaker Channel Input Indicators zl on the front panel When a standard analog sig nal is in use only the L and R indica tors will light as analog signals have only left and right channels Digital signals may have two five six or seven channels depending on the pro gram material its method of transmission and the way in which it was encoded When a digital signal is playing the let ters in these indicators will light in response to the signal being received It is important to note that although Dolby Digital for example is referred to as a 5 1 system not all Dolby Digital DVDs or programs ar
219. iangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance Typographical Conventions In order to help you use this manual with the remote controls front panel controls and rear panel connections certain conventions have been used EXAMPLE bold type indicates a specific remote control or front panel button or indicator or rear panel connection jack EXAMPLE OCR type indicates a message that is visible on the front panel information display or screen EXAMPLE Synchro type indicates a message that is visible on the CVR700R2 remote s LCD display E number in a square indicates a specific front panel control number in an oval indicates a button or indicator on the CVR700R2 remote control number in a circle indicates a rear panel connection VA letter in a square indicates an indicator in the front panel information display number in a triangle indicates a button or an indicator on the CVR700R1 remote control read first Important Safety Precautions 1 Read these instructions 2 Keep these instructions 3 Heed all warnings 4 Follow all instructions 5 Do not use this apparatus near water 6 Clean only with a dry cloth 7 Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufac turer s instructions 8 Do not install near any heat sourc
220. igure 2 Once the bracket has been installed Two people may carefully lift the CVPD50 screen and lower it onto the bracket so that the two hooks on either side of the bracket engage in the openings on the underside of the CVPD50 Installing the CVPD50 Plasma Display On the Included Credenza Stand If wall mounting the CVPD50 plasma Screen is not convenient or practical you may prefer to install the CVPD50 on a cre denza or other sturdy piece of furniture using the included credenza stand In addition to offering an elegant appear uu 40 ance that matches that of the optional CVTS50 speaker stands the stand includes a cradle for placement of the center speaker IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES e he credenza stand consists of three main parts two metal columns and a glass base Be extremely careful in handling the fragile glass base to avoid breakage that might result in personal injury The credenza stand is only intended for use with the CVPD50 plasma screen Attempting to use the stand with any other model plasma screen or any other device is unsafe and may result in personal injury and damage to the equipment The stand must be placed in a safe location protected from young children and pets who might topple the stand possibly resulting in serious injury Never place the stand so that any part of it is sticking out over the edge of the credenza table shelf or other sur face underneath it Make certain that yo
221. im to half brightness In the Screen mode this button places the CVPD50 display in Standby mode without affecting use of the CVR700 This function may be preferred for audio only listening sessions to prevent burning the plasma display When a composite video output from a PIP capable device such as a cable box has been connected to the Picture in Picture Composite Video Input T pressing this button enables you to move the PIP inset display around the CVPD50 screen using A W gt Navigation Disc 2 Night Mode PIP Channel Down Button This button s function differs depending on the device in use when it is pressed When pressed in the System mode this button activates the Night mode preserv ing dialogue center channel intelligibility at low volume levels when available in specially encoded Dolby Digital sources When used with a compatible device whose video output has been connected to the Picture in Picture Composite Video Input it changes the channel of the PIP device to the next lower one It has no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50 J Disc Direct PVR Live Button This button s function differs depending on which device is in use when it is pressed In DVD Main mode press it and then press the numeric key corresponding to the position number of the disc you wish to play to immediately begin playback of that disc When a PVR is in use this button switches
222. imity to standing water dripping water spray water and rain Do not install this equipment out doors near a hot tub or in a bathroom Do not put any vessels that are filled with water such as vases on the unit If you connect an external antenna to any device connected to the CVR700 ensure that no water can penetrate the cable Protect this equipment from heat heat accumulation and direct sunlight Avoid placing the unit near fire heat sources or ovens Maintain sufficient space on all sides of the unit for proper ventilation Do not drape curtains over the unit Do not mount the unit in an enclosed cabinet or wall Failure to follow these instructions may lead to personal injury or death due to electric shock and or fire caused by overheating and or irreparable damage to the unit that is not covered under warranty Power Connection and Operator Control The CVPD50 plasma display and the CVR700 are completely disconnected from electrical power only when the power cables are removed from both units and or the wall outlets and the JBL Digital Link cable connecting the CVR700 to CVPD50 is unplugged Only connect the CVPD50 plasma display and he CVR700 to a plug receptacle that has been installed in compliance with local regulations regarding proper grounding and which provides 120V Make sure that the power plug and outlet are accessible at all times Use only the power cord supplied with the CVPD50 plasma displa
223. input name will also appear in the Main Information Display When an audio source is selected the last video input used remains routed to the VCR Video Outputs B the Digital Recorder Video Ouptuts p and the Video Monitor Outputs D This permits you to simultaneously view and listen to different sources When a video source is selected the video signal for that input will be routed to the CVPD50 for viewing and if it is a composite or S video source the video signal will be routed to the Video Monitor Output B and may be viewed on an external TV monitor connected to the CVR700 Volume Control Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using the front panel Volume Control or remote Volume Up Down Buttons A To temporarily silence all speaker out puts press the Mute Button This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the headphone jack but it will not affect any recording or dub bing that may be in progress When the system is muted the word MUTE will flash in the Main Information Display Fi Press the Mute Button Ay again or adjust the volume to return to normal operation The unit s tone controls may be taken out of the signal path by pressing the Tone Mode Button Ay The first press will show a message in the Lower Display Line 3 with the cur rent status of the tone controls The system default is T ONE IN which indicates that the bass and treble controls are active Pr
224. interfere with AM radio reception In any event as mentioned elsewhere in this manual it is preferable to leave the screen off to avoid burn in when no video signal is present and the startup screen may be displayed for a long time Therefore when the AM tuner band is selected as the source the CVPD50 will automatically enter the standby mode To wake it simply select any other source including the FM tuner band Recalling Preset Stations To manually select a station previously entered in the preset memory press the Numeric Keys 4A for the desired station s memory location To manually scroll through the list of preset stations press the Preset Stations Selector Button EHIED CD A on the front panel or remote When using the front panel controls remember to first press the Tuning Mode Selector Ef to select Preset as the function of the Tuning Preset Buttons E Recording In normal operation the audio or video source selected for listening through the CVR700 is sent to the record outputs This means that any program you are watching or listening to may be recorded simply by placing machines connected to the Digital Recorder Analog Audio Video Outputs D or VCR Analog Audio Video Outputs B in the record mode When a digital audio recorder is connected the Digital Audio Outputs Ced you are able to record the digital signal using a CD R MiniDisc or other digital recording system NOTES e
225. is button s function varies depending on whether you have selected the tuner or the disc changer as the current input source When the tuner is the source press this button to select the function of the Tuning Preset Buttons E Each press will alternate between the tuning function and the preset selections func tion with the current choice displayed on the Lower Display Line B When the tuning function has been selected each press of one of the Tuning Preset Buttons EJ will tune the next higher or lower frequency regardless of whether an acceptable signal is avail able Press and hold the Tuning Button to scan up or down through the fre quencies until a station with acceptable signal quality is located Tap the Tuning Button E again to end the scan When the preset selection function is in force each press of one of the Tuning Preset Buttons E will tune the next higher or lower preset station that was previously stored in the CVR700 s memory See page 64 for information on storing preset stations When the disc changer is the source press this button to open or close the Disc Drawer EJ The Lower Display Line 3 will prompt you to press a disc number Press the Disc Selector E cor responding to the number of the drawer you wish to access Front Panel Optical Digital Audio Output Connect the optical digital input of an audio or video product to this jack EJ Tuning Preset Skip Search Buttons The fu
226. is setting to 0 will remove all color and make the picture appear monochrome black and white Increasing it will brighten the intensity of the colors It may be adjusted using a blue filter and color bars If you do not have access to a test pattern you may adjust this setting so that red objects are not too bright and fuzzy around the edges DNC This temperature bar and numeri cal value ranging from 0 to 15 is used to adjust dynamic noise control Leave this setting at its factory default unless you have a video image with interference that is causing video noise This setting may be used to reduce the amount of noise displayed The reset line may be used to reset all of the settings in this menu for the current video input Display Settings With the SCREEN MENU Fig 33 on screen scroll down to the DISPLAY SETTINGS line and select it by pressing the Set Button A The DISPLAY SETTINGS submenu Figure 38 will be displayed DISPLAY SETTINGS Color Temperature Ideal Picture Contrast Ideal User color temp red 124 m User color temp green 127 A User color temp blue 113 3 3 Back to screen menu Figure 38 This menu enables you to precisely adjust the color display Color Temperature This setting has four options Ideal Cold Warm and User The factory default set ting is named Ideal and is what we recommend for most installations However you may prefer the colors to appear more blue overal
227. is taken during the manufacturing process it is possi ble that your CVPD50 plasma display will at some point develop some minor pixel dropouts It is extremely unlikely that this will occur or be noticeable and as such in most cases it will not be considered a sufficient defect for warranty replacement repair of indi vidual pixels is not possible Should you have any concerns kindly contact your custom installer for further guidance 3 Over a long period of time the natural consumption of the phosphorous layer may result in a slight loss of brightness or contrast This is normal and should not be noticeable 4 There are ergonomic concerns that apply generally to reduce viewer fatigue and eyestrain e The optimal viewing distance for the 50 inch CVPD50 plasma display is 12 to 16 feet e The background lighting in the room should be sufficient to read by as too much light reduces the contrast and too little light is difficult for your eyes to adjust to When using the CVPD50 plasma dis play with your computer select fonts and backgrounds that are rich in con trast such as a black font on a white background to avoid eye fatigue that can result from using red or blue fonts on a dark background 4 42 Basic Installation The JBL Cinema Vision system offers a vari ety of entertainment options including play back of DVDs and CDs and radio listening and it may be enjoyed with no additional equi
228. ise will begin to circulate again in 5 seconds When all channels have the same output level press the Test Tone Button again to complete the process NOTE Output level adjustment is not available for the Surround Off mode Advanced Settings The ADVANCED SETTINGS sub menu Figure 29 may be accessed from the MAIN MENU Figure 6 It con tains some additional settings that will enhance the convenience of the CVR70O It is not necessary to make these adjust ments during the initial setup and you may skip this section returning to it later when you have more experience with the system ADVANCED SETTINGS p FRNT PNL BRGHTNESS FULL VOLUME DEFAULT VOL DEFAULT LEVEL 25 MAIN MENU TIMEOUT 20 FAN MINIMUM NOISE RESET ALL OF THE ABOVE TO FACTORY SETTINGS BACK TO MAIN MENU Figure 29 Front Panel Brightness The CVR700s front panel displays and indicators are set at a default brightness level that is sufficient for viewing in a normally lit room However you may wish to occasionally lower the brightness of the display or turn it off completely The FRNT PNL BRGHTNESS setting defaults to full brightness but you may adjust it to dim the display to half bright ness or turn the display off altogether The LED inside the Main Power On Off Button El will always remain lit to remind you that the unit is turned on The setting is temporary and will only remain in effect until the unit is turned off
229. it is recommended that you test the newly learned codes with the source component If the code was not learned correctly try relearning it Usually after several tries the code can be learned correctly Changing Devices In the factory default settings the remote is programmed so that the commands transmitted correspond to the device selected by pressing one of the Input Selectors This is logical as you want the remote to control the device you have selected However in some circum stances you may have configured your system so that the devices connected to the CVR700 do not correspond to the default device settings and the legends printed on the remote For example if your system has two VCRs you may connect the second VCR to the digital recorder input There is no problem in doing that but in normal operation the commands issued after selecting the digi tal recorder input are not for a VCR The remote allows you to correct that sit uation through the Changing Devices process This enables you to assign the codes from one type of device to a differ 80 ent button For example in the steps below we will explain how to program the digital recorder buttons to provide the commands to operate a VCR 0f course you may program the remote to have any of the devices take on the code set of any other device as your system requires And with the remote s Edit function you can even change the way the name
230. itch between Stereo and Mono modes for FM radio reception When weak reception is encountered select the Mono tuning mode Press again to switch back to Stereo mode See page 64 for more information When the disc changer is the source press this button once to stop playback of the current disc and enter Resume mode In Resume mode the CVR700 will remember the point on the disc where play was stopped and the next time the disc is played it will commence playback from this point unless the unit was turned off another disc was selected or another source was selected To fully stop the disc press this button twice There may be a 1 or 2 second delay before Stop mode takes effect Resume mode is not available for CDs VCDs MP3 discs or WMA discs If one of those disc types is playing a single press of this button will place the disc in Stop mode as indicated by the solid square and the word STOP appearing in the Upper Display Line 1 Front Panel Audio Video Inputs The front panel inputs give you the flexi bility to temporarily connect a device to the CVR700 This capability is useful for such applications as viewing home movies directly from the camcorder or playing a video game For video devices connect one of the composite video S video or component video outputs of the device to the corresponding front panel input and connect the left and right audio outputs to the analog audio inputs Do not make more than
231. itch on the underside of the CVPD50 depressed toward the front of the unit and unplug ging the JBL Digital Link cable and the power cords for both the CVR700 and the CVPD50 and wait at least 3 minutes After the pause reconnect the AC power cords and the JBL Digital Link turn the CVPD50 s master power switch to the On position depressed toward the rear of the unit and check the system s opera tion If the system still malfunctions a System reset may clear the problem POSSIBLE CAUSE Requested function not available at this time Incorrect match of aspect ratio settings disc or video signal Weak batteries e Sensor is blocked Copy protection To clear the CVR700 s entire system memory including tuner presets output level settings delay times and speaker configuration data press the Main Power On Off Button El to place both units in Standby mode and then press and hold the Mute Button for 5 seconds The unit s software version number will flash in the Information SOLUTION Certain functions may be disabled by the DVD itself during passages of a disc Change aspect ratio settings see pages 13 and 27 using the Frame Button AA or Letterbox Button e Change both batteries Clear path to sensor or use optional outboard remote sensor Many DVDs are encoded to prevent copying to VCR If the system is still operating incorrectly there may have been an electronic dis ch
232. ivided into tracks CD R RW Compatibilitv e 12cm 5 discs e Linear PCM MP3 32kbps 320kbps or Windows Media WMA 16kbps 192kbps digital audio May contain JPEG still images up to 5 megapixels file size up to 5mb e linear PCM discs are generally divided into tracks like an audio CD MP3 WMA and JPEG discs or discs that contain more than one of these for mats are divided into files which may be organized into folders depending on how the disc was created VCD Compatibility e 12cm 5 discs Linear PCM MP1 MPEG 1 Layer 1 MP3 MPEG 1 Layer 3 digital audio MPEG 1 digital video May contain JPEG still images Video CD Version 2 0 e Some discs may contain menus and chapters while other discs simply con tain tracks Version 2 0 discs may offer interactive playback control However it will NOT play the following DVD discs with a Region Code other than that indicated on the rear panel DVD ROM data discs DVD RAM discs e CD I discs e CD G discs e SVCD discs Kodak Photo CD discs Kodak Picture CD discs which are available to con sumers contain files in the JPEG for mat which may be viewed using the CVR700 NOTE Due to differences in the format ting of certain discs it is possible that some discs mav include features that are not compatible with the CVR700 Similarly although the CVR700 is capable of a wide range of features not all discs inc
233. ker See page 42 for more information Front Speaker Outputs Connect these outputs to the matching or ter minals on your left and right speakers When making speaker connections always make certain to maintain correct polarity by connecting the color coding white for front left and red for front right terminals on the CVR700 to the red terminals on the speakers and black terminals on the CVR700 to the black terminals on the speakers see page 42 for more information Q Fan Slots These ventilation holes are the output of the CVR7005 airflow System To ensure proper operation of the unit and to avoid possible damage to del icate surfaces make certain that these holes are not blocked and that there is at least three inches of open space between the vent holes and any wooden or fabric surface It is equally important to make sure that the holes in the top and bottom covers of the unit are not blocked either It is normal for the fan to remain on at all times at one of three speeds depending on the selection you make in the ADVANCED SETTINGS submenu By selecting the default MINIMUM NOISE setting the fan will run at its slowest speed at volumes below 20dB and at its slightly faster medium speed at higher volumes This setting should only be selected when the CVR700 is placed on a shelf and not within an enclosed space When the CVR700 is placed inside a cabinet or other enclosed space select
234. ker with older color coding while the tan terminal should be connected to the red terminal on the Back Surround Right speaker with the older color coding Connect the black terminal on the CVR700 to the matching black negative terminals for each back surround speaker See page 42 for more informa tion on speaker polarity Side Surround Speaker Outputs Connect these outputs to the matching and terminals on your side surround 7 1 channel system or Surround 5 1 channel system speakers Conforming to CEA color code specifications the blue terminal is the positive terminal that should be connected to the terminal on the Side Surround Surround Left speaker with older color coding the gray terminal should be connected to the red terminal on the Side Surround Surround Right speaker with the older color coding Connect the black termi nals on the CVR700 to the matching black negative terminals for each side sur round speaker See page 42 for more information on speaker polarity Q Center Speaker Outputs Connect these outputs to the matching and terminals on your center channel speaker In conformance with the CEA color code specification the green terminal is the positive terminal that should be con nected to the red terminal on speakers with the older color coding Connect the black terminal on the CVR700 to the black negative terminal on the spea
235. ker before continuing and a blinking on screen cursor will appear next to the name of each speaker location when the sound is at that speaker Alternatively you may leave the test tone turned off and play a favorite piece of program material such as a CD music selection or a DVD movie With the SPEAKER LEVELS submenu on screen you will be able to adjust the out put levels using the source material as a reference 51 52 NOTE Remember to verify that the speakers have been properly connected As the test noise circulates listen to make certain that the sound comes from the speaker position shown in the Lower Display Line 3 If the sound from a speaker location does NOT match the position indicated in the display stop the test tone by pressing the Test Tone Button 4h twice then turn the CVR700 off using the Main Power Switch check the speaker wiring to make certain that each speaker is con nected to the correct output terminal After checking for speaker placement let the test noise circulate again and listen to see which channels sound louder than the others Using the front left speaker as a reference press the lt gt Navigation Controls f A to bring all speakers to the same volume level When the lt p gt Navigation Controls A are pressed the test noise circulation will pause on the channel being adjusted to give you time to make the adjustment When you release the button the circula ti
236. l or more red overall Select the C o 1 d setting for more blue content or the m setting for more red content Alternatively if you prefer to adjust the degree of red green and blue more precisely select the USER setting which will activate user color temperature settings for each color Picture Contrast This set ting has three options Ideal Light and Dark The factory default setting is named Ideal andis what we recom mend for most installations However you may prefer images to appear either lighter or darker User Color Temp red This setting is only active when the User settings has been selected at the Color Temperature line above The temperature bar and numeri cal value ranging between 0 and 255 reflect the intensity of the red pixels User Color Temp green This setting is only active when the User settings has been selected at the Color Temperature line above The temperature bar and numeri cal value ranging between 0 and 255 reflect the intensity of the green pixels User Color Temp blue This setting is only active when the User settings has been selected at the Color Temperature line above The temperature bar and numeri cal value ranging between 0 and 255 reflect the intensity of the blue pixels Advanced Settings Menu With the SCREEN MENU Fig 33 on screen scroll down to the ADVANCED line and select it by pressing the Set Button A The ADVANCED submenu Figure 39 wil
237. l be or they may be angled toward the listeners The center channel speaker should be placed slightly behind the front left and right speakers and no more than 2 feet above or below the tweeters of the left and right speakers It may be convenient to place the center speaker in the cradle of the CVPD50 credenza stand as shown in the drawing The JBL Cinema Vision system may be used in 5 1 or 7 1 channel applications In 5 1 channel applications two of the surround speakers should be placed slightly behind the listening position and ideally should face each other and be at a level higher than the listeners ears If that is not possible they may be placed on a wall behind the listening position facing forward NOTE In 5 1 channel systems the two rear speakers are called simply the surround speakers whether they are placed to the sides of or behind the listening position In 7 1 channel systems there are four surround speakers two of which are referred to as side surround speakers due to their placement to the sides of the listening position The two remaining speakers are referred to as back surround speakers as they are placed in back of behind the listening position In 7 1 channel applications place two of the surround speakers in the side positions and place the two back surround speakers on the rear wall In Dolby Digital and DTS systems such as JBL Cinema Vision it is best to aim all of the speakers
238. l be displayed ADVANCED Screen menu time out 205 Screen Status 3s t Show startup screen Yes OSD Transparency CC DVD auto picture resize On Screen status LED On 4 3 scaling Non Linear Reset all Back to screen menu Figure 39 This menu is used to adjust the appear ance of the on screen menus Screen menu time out This setting allows vou to adjust the amount of time the Screen menus remain on screen with options of 20 40 or 60 sec onds available It is particularly important with plasma displavs to avoid leaving a still image such as a menu on screen for an extended period of time as the image may be burned into the screen perma nently Therefore it is not possible to set the menus to remain on screen indefinitely On Screen Status time out This setting allows you to adjust the amount of time the various system status banners remain on screen or to disable them altogether These banners appear when a source is selected and a new audio or video signal is detected The aspect ratio banner will first display the aspect ratio of the source and then the aspect ratio in which it will be dis played depending on how you have con figured the system The source banner will display the name of the source the audio input and the video input or other information as appropriate This setting does not affect the status bar displayed by the CVR700 s internal DVD CD changer when a disc is being play
239. l calibration Six A V inputs with composite video and S video three HDTV compatible component Y Pr Pb inputs one DVI input Ten digital audio in front panel optical Front panel compo addition to conven and S video inputs Picture in picture c puts including and coaxial inputs nent video inputs in ional audio video apability for simul taneous viewing 0 two video sources Accommodates 4 3 aspect ratio pro grams with intelligent options for fit ting to 16 9 full screen display Universal programmable learning remote with LCD text display Secondary remote for everyday use SAFETY INFORMATION Verify Line Voltage Before Use Your CVR700 and CVPD50 have been designed for use with 120 volt AC cur rent and the plugs are specifically designed for 120 volt applications Connection to a line voltage other than that for which the unit is intended can create a safety and fire hazard and may damage the unit If you have any questions about the volt age requirements for your specific model or about the line voltage in your area contact your selling dealer before plug ging the unit into a wall outlet Do Not Use Extension Cords We do not recommend that extension cords be used with this product As with all electrical devices do not run power cords under rugs or carpets or place heavy objects on them Damaged power cords should be replaced immediately by an authorized service center with cords m
240. l indicate AUTO TUNED When an FM Stereo station is tuned the display will read AUTO ST TUNED When the tuner is in Manual Mono mode you may press and hold this button to scan downward through the frequencies and the tuner will stop immediately when you release this button even if no acceptable signal is detected at that frequency See page 64 for more information on using the tuner When an optical player source such as the internal DVD changer is in use press this button to search quickly forward through the current track or chapter Depending on the type of disc used in the internal DVD changer each additional press will cycle through the available scan speeds as follows available scan speeds may differ for external optical source devices DVD Audio and DVD Video discs 2x 4x 16x 100x CD and VCD discs 2x 4x 8x MP3 and WMA discs 2x 4x 8x 16x See page 68 for more information on using the internal DVD changer trans port controls Ay Preset Page Up Down Forward Reverse Skip Buttons When used with the tuner these buttons scroll through the preprogrammed station presets When used with optical sources such as the internal disc changer or an external CD player press the forward button once to skip to the beginning of the next track Press the reverse button once to return to the beginning of the current track and once again quickly to skip to the begin ning of the previous track When the Pau
241. l recorder such as a DVD recorder CD recorder D VHS recorder TiVo or personal video device digital video recorder containing a hard disc drive DVI COMPUTER Used to program an external device equipped with a digital video interface DVI video output such as an external DVD player cable televi sion box satellite television receiver or HDTV tuner 5 SELECT A DEVICE will appear in the LCD display Figure 57 Press the A V Navigation Controls to scroll through the list of device types available for the source you have selected and press the Set Button when the device you wish to set the codes for appears For this exam ple we will select HDTV Tuner to enter the codes needed to operate your HDTV set top tuner SELECT DEUICE HDTU TUNER A Figure 57 If you make a mistake at any time press the Exit Cancel Button to return to the previous menu screen or press the Remote Menu Button T to exit the remote menu system 6 At the next menu screen on the remote Figure 58 press the Set Button to enter the Manual mode which means that you will select the brand name of the device from the list programmed into the remote s memory PROGRAM CODE MANUAL A Figure 58 7 The next menu screen on the remote Figure 59 will show the start of the list of available brands Press the Navigation Buttons until the brand name of the device you are programming into the re
242. lease the Numeric Keys DD shown on the menu screen one at a time starting with the 1 button After you press the 1 Button ID the remote s LCD screen will briefly go blank as the code is being transmitted but you will see the transmit icon in the upper right corner of the display to serve as confirmation that the remote is send ing out commands PRESS HUMBER CODE 1 OF 18 A Figure 60 9 After you press and release the num ber key watch the device being pro grammed to see whether it turns off As shown in the instructions that will appear on the next menu screen Figure 61 if your device has turned off press the Set Button and then skip to Step 11 If the unit does not turn off proceed to Step 10 POWER OFF Y SET N NEXT OR CLR A Figure 61 NOTE Since game consoles and cam corders have no remote control power on off codes the test command used to program a remote code will be different In order to program codes for a game console or camcorder which do not have remote controlled power on off codes you must insert a disc or tape and begin play For a game console the remote will ask whether the game has stopped For a camcorder the remote will ask whether the camera has zoomed in 10 If the device being programmed into the remote does not turn off after you have pressed the 1 Button repeat Steps 8 and 9 by pressing the available numeric keys shown until
243. lected the system will adjust so that the full complement of 6 1 7 1 surround processing decoding modes are available and a full range signal will be sent to the surround back channels with no low frequency informa tion sent to the subwoofer output When you have completed your selection for the back surround channels press the A V Navigation Controls A to move the cursor to SUBWOOFER Press the lt gt Navigation Controls to select the option that best describes your system The choices avail able for the subwoofer position will depend on the settings for the other speakers particularly the front left right positions If the front left right speakers are set to SMALL the subwoofer will automatically be set to ON If the front left right speakers are set to LARGE two options are available f no subwoofer is connected to the CVR700 press the lt gt Navigation Controls A so that OFF appears in the on screen menu When this option is selected all bass infor mation will be routed to the front left right main speakers If a subwoofer is connected to the CVR700 you have the option to have the front left right main speakers reproduce bass frequencies at all times and have the subwoofer operate only when the CVR700 is being used with a digital source that contains a dedicated low frequency effects or LFE soundtrack This allows you to use both your main and subwoofer speakers to take advantage
244. ll images is being played using the internal changer press this button to scroll to the previous image Volume Up Down Controls To raise the volume press towards the top of the disc where it is marked 4 Vol and to lower the volume press towards he bottom of the disc where it is marked w Vol The left and right arrows on this isc have different functions depending on the source in use See Channel Slow Play Up Down Control below for more information ct Tuning Down Reverse Search Button This button has different func tions depending on whether the tuner or another source is in use Press this button when the tuner is in use to change the station to one with a lower frequency Each tap of this button will decrease the frequency by one increment When the tuner receives a strong enough signal for adequate reception MANU AL TUNED will appear in the Lower Display Line 3 When the tuner is in the Auto Stereo mode press and hold the button to cause the tuner to scan for the next lower station with acceptable signal strength and stop The Lower Display Line 3 will indicate AUTO TUNED When an FM Stereo station is tuned the display will read AUTO ST TUNED When the tuner is in Manual Mono mode you may press and hold this button to scan downward through the frequencies and the tuner will stop immediately when you release this button even if no acceptable signal is detected at that frequency
245. lt the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help NOTE Changes or modifications may cause these units to fail to comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and may void the user s authority to operate the equipment CAUTION The CVR700 uses a laser sys tem To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam do not open the cabinet enclosure or defeat any of the safety mechanisms provided for your protection DO NOT STARE INTO THE LASER BEAM To ensure proper use of this product please read this owner s manual carefully and retain it for future use Should the unit require maintenance or repair please contact your local JBL service center Refer servicing to qualified personnel only The following is important safety infor mation that you should read carefully in order to prevent the possibility of person al injury to yourself or others or damage to the equipment Errors in installation or connection may lead to damage to the CVPD50 the CVR700 or other devices in your system Never allow children to use the CVPD50 CVR700 or any other electrical appliances without supervision Take care to install hese devices where they are safe from children and pets Never operate the CVPD50 plasma dis play in environmental conditions other han those listed in the technical specifi cations on pages 111 112 of this manual Protect the CVPD50 plasma display and the CVR700 from moisture including high levels of humidity prox
246. lude everv capabilitv of the DVD svs tem For example although the CVR700 is compatible with multi angle discs that feature is only possible when the disc is speciallv encoded for multiple angle plav In addition the CVR700 is capable of plaving back both Dolbv Digital and DTS soundtracks but the number and tvpes of tracks available will varv from disc to disc To make certain that a specific fea ture or soundtrack option is available please check the options noted on the disc jacket e Plavback capabilitv for CD or DVD recordable discs mav varv due to varia tions in the quality of the disc and the recorder used to create the disc e The CVR700 is compatible with most discs recorded with files encoded using MP3 or Windows Media 9 as well as JPEG still images However note that variations in the encoder or codec used and the bit rate of the encoding mav affect the CVR700 s ability to play back a specific disc As a result we cannot guarantee complete compatibility with all encoders and versions of the codecs For best results we recommend that MP3 files be encoded at bit rates rang ing between 32kbps and 320kbps WMA files should be encoded at bit rates between 16kbps and 192kbps JPEG files should contain no more than 5 megapixels and the file size should be no larger than 5Mb Note on DVD Audio Discs Due to the newness of this format and some author ing issues it is possible that some DVD Audio discs will n
247. ly measures and calibrates sound levels for a perfectly balanced sound field presentation Although the CVR700 is designed to be used with the internal DVD changer and CVPD50 display it also includes a full complement of inputs and outputs that are normally found only on standalone audio video receivers It includes audio video source inputs for two record ing devices a cable television satellite receiver HDTV tuner a personal computer and an auxiliary device A sixth source may be connected to the front panel jacks which include not only analog audio and video inputs but S video com ponent video and optical and coaxial digi tal audio inputs A front panel optical dig ital audio output enables recording with compatible portable devices Dedicated rear panel digital audio inputs 4 optical and 4 coaxial are pre assigned to the sources and 2 outputs 1 optical and 1 coaxial are also provided An HDCP high definition copy protected DVI video input may be used with a DVl enabled HDTV tuner a satellite or cable set top box or a DVD player or with a personal computer featuring a DVI or Analog VGA video output A composite video input may be used with the PIP picture in pic ture function for simultaneous viewing of two video sources using either a tradi tional small screen inset or a split screen A universal remote control operates all devices and may be programmed to operate other components in your sys
248. main video source Erasing a Macro Once a macro has been created and stored in the remote s memory you have the option of erasing it except the pre programmed macros You may do this at any time by following these steps 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button amp 5 for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the A Navigation Button f so that MACRO appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 78 Press the Set Button to enter the main macro menu branch 3 At the next menu screen Figure 84 press the A V Navigation Button until the bottom line in the remote s LCD display reads ERASE MACRO Press the Set Button to begin the process of erasing a macro MACRO ERASE A MACRO Figure 84 4 next display screen Figure 85 is where you select which macro will be erased Press the A V Navigation Button until the number of the macro you wish to erase appears For this example we will erase the Power On macro created in the previous sec tion When the name of the macro to be erased appears press the Set Button ERASE A MACRO MICRO 1 i Figure 85 5 The word ERAS
249. making sure the disc is properly seated in the tray s insert If the disc is not correctly centered you may damage both the disc and the player when the drawer closes When loading discs please note the following The CVR700 will play discs with the following logos as well as most WMA and JPEG discs It will play Kodak Picture CDs but not Photo CDs DO NOT attempt to play another type of disc AUDIO VIDEO DVD ai al ise DIGITAL AUDIO uj VIDEO COMPACT COMPACT NP3 DIGITALAUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO Recordable ReWritable Kodak PICTURE CD COMPATIBLE The CVR700 will play discs in the NTSC and PAL video formats Playback capability for CD RW DVD RW or DVD RW discs will vary according to the quality of the disc On some occa sions it is possible that these discs may not play on the CVR700 This does not indicate any problem with the CVR700 The CVR700 will only play discs that are coded for Region 1 or discs that are open to being played in all regions Discs that contain any other Region Code will not play e Both 5 inch 12cm and 3 inch 8cm discs may be used When loading CD audio discs load the discs with the label side up When loading DVD discs with printed labels load them label side up e Some DVD discs are double sided The title information for these will be printed on the inner ring of the disc very close to the center hole The title for th
250. may perform a soft reset by removing the cover from the bat ery compartment and gently pressing the small black rectangular button visible hrough the opening where the battery cover normally latches This should return he remote to normal operation 95 UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ UMOQ uwog uwoquo07 UMOQ UMOQ uwog m w007 UMO UMO UMOQ UMOQ 8uinioA 8uinoA 8uinjoA 8uinioA 8uinjoA 8uinjoA 8uinjoA M UBJS 8uinioA 8uinoA M ueas JLWNJOA IWNJOA 8uinjoA Ie dn jauueu dn jauueyg dfjjeuueuj dn j uueu9 mojs ueas dq dn vos d jjeuueu df N0 S MO S NO S 331 d 0 jeg uejs sg jag WAJSAG uejs g jag usis jeg WAJSAG jag uejs g jeg WAJSAG jag WAJSAS jag WAJSAG jag WAJSAS jag uejs g jag uiejsAg Jas uejs g jag uejs s jas WAJSAS 9 WAJSAS uais S 62 any ain ain ain any MN an any MN MN any MN 97 dn awnjo dm eunjoA dn dfjeunjoA 7
251. meric Keys on the remote The track selected will be played at once You can skip through tracks forward or backward by pressing the Forward Reverse Skip Buttons E1 19 A In Stop mode the Upper Display Line I will show the number of tracks recorded on a CD and the total time on the disc During normal play the Upper Display Line I will indicate the track number and elapsed time The Lower Display Line H will indicate the currently selected audio surround mode CD Status Bar While a CD is loaded you may view its Status Bar by pressing the Status Button A If the CD is in Stop mode the Status Bar will display the total number of tracks on the disc and the total time of the disc If the CD is playing the first item shown will be the current track num ber followed by a slash and then the total number of tracks on the disc The second item shown will be the elapsed track time see Figure 46 To skip directly to a specific track make sure the remote control is in DVD mode by pressing the DVD Input Selector A then enter the number of the track you wish to play using the Numeric Keys If the Status Bar is on screen you must press the Set Button D A after the track number to enter it If the Status Bar is not on screen the CD will immediately skip to the track you entered The Time Search function enables you to begin play at a specific time point on the disc Press the Status But
252. mit you to access the disc menu using the Menu Button Ay However pressing the Title Button 22 or the Audio Button may provide menu access In addition you may simply place the disc in Stop mode and play the tracks in order Zoom Feature The CVR700 s advanced digital video pro cessing circuits include a Zoom feature that allows you to enlarge the image for closer examination of a particular part of the picture Four steps of enlargement are available use the Zoom feature press the Zoom Button Gy while a disc is playing or paused Each press of the button will increase the zoom in effect When you have zoomed through all four steps the picture will return to normal size When in any of the Zoom modes you may use the Navigation AW p Buttons P A A to navigate around the frame e Some discs are created in a way that prevents the Zoom feature from operat ing In addition the Zoom feature will not operate on disc menus and may not operate on subtitles The Zoom function is not available for VCD or JPEG discs CD PLAYBACK Audio CD Playback Features When playing audio CDs your DVD player has the same features as a CD player including track skip repeat play and programmed playback as described on pages 68 69 You may also access these functions directly using the remote control Selecting a Track During Stop Resume or Play mode enter the track number directly with the Nu
253. mmands to either turn on or turn off all devices whose product codes have been programmed into the remote Note that if you are not using any external devices you may simply N power on the CVR700 and the CVPD50 screen will automatically be triggered to turn on as well Pressing and holding certain Input Selectors A A will cause the CVR700 to switch to the selected source input device and the device will begin playing a Press and hold the DVD Selector A and the CVR700 will switch to the internal DVD CD changer source If you do not enter the number for a disc you desire to play the last played disc will begin playing Press and hold the CBL SAT Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the cable satellite inputs If you have programmed the cable or satel lite set top box s remote control codes the device will be turned on Press and hold the VCR Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the VCR inputs If you have programmed the VCR s remote control codes the device will be turned on and the play command will be transmitted to it Press and hold the DR Digital Recorder Selector and the CVR700 will switch to the source device connected to the DR inputs If you have programmed the DR s remote control codes the device will be turned on and the play command will be transmitted to it Press and hold the AUX Selector 4 and the CVR7
254. mote appears on the lower line of the display and then press the Set Button As shortcut once the screen shown in Figure 57 appears you may jump to the first letter of the desired brand name by pressing the corresponding Alphanumeric Key repeatedly until the brands beginning with the desired letter appear For example to jump to the brand simply press the 7 key three times until the first brand beginning with an R appears and then scroll to the desired name SELECT A BRAND RCA A Figure 59 NOTE If the brand name for the product you wish to program does not appear in the list the codes may still be available as some manufacturers share codes If the desired brand is not listed press the Exit Cancel Button to exit the programming process and skip to the instructions shown at right for the Automatic method of programming the remote If desired or if the codes for your brand are not part of the remote library at all you may still use the remote to program most infrared controlled prod ucts by learning the commands from the product s original remote into the remote The instructions for Learning Commands are on page 78 8 The next step is important as it determines which codes will operate the source device or display Point the remote at the device being pro grammed and following the instruc tions shown in the remote s LCD Information Display Figure 60 press and re
255. n You may also wish to make analog audio connections as a backup Video connections for most devices may be composite video yellow jacks S video four pin connector or component Y Pr Pb green red and blue jacks video Choose only one type of video connection for each source component Whenever possible we recommend using component video connections for the best quality S video provides an excellent alternative and composite video may be used when neither S video or component video signals are available As mentioned above the CVR700 will upconvert each video format to the proper digital video format for the CVPD50 However if you are using another display device you will need to make a video monitor output con nection to the display corresponding to each type of video format used by your source components NOTES The input source selectors and their associated control codes on each of the two remotes are preprogrammed to operate only certain types of devices as listed below although you may con nect any compatible audio video device to any of the inputs Although you may reprogram an input selector on the main remote control so that its device type matches the device you wish to connect the secondary remote s input selectors may not be reprogrammed Therefore we recommend that you con nect compatible devices to each source Input Device Types Preprogrammed Source In Main Remote AUX TV HD Tuner
256. n again the disc starts from the beginning With the CVR700 however you have two options when playing DVD discs Pressing the Stop Button 69 A once will stop the playback but it actually puts the unit in the Resume mode This means that when you press the Play Button the next time the disc will resume or continue from the point on the disc where the Stop Button A was pressed This is helpful if you are watching a movie and must interrupt your viewing session but wish to pick up where you left off Pressing the Stop Button A twice will stop the machine in a traditional manner and when the disc is played again it will start from the beginning Note that the Resume function will be canceled if you shut the unit off place it in Standby mode change to another disc or select a different source Also there may be a brief 1 to 2 second delay between the second press of the Stop Button 69 A and the CVR700 acknowledging the mode change in the Upper Display Line T The resume function is not available for CDs VCDs or JPEG files For DVDs only the resume function will be retained even after the CVR700 has been placed in Standby mode by pressing the Power Off Button IQA Title For a DVD a title is defined as an entire movie or program There may be as many chapters within a title as the pro ducers decide to include Most discs include only one title but some may have more than one to give you a Dou
257. n Selector Press this button to select the control codes for the CVPD50 screen System Selector Press this button to select the control codes for the CVR700 DSP Surround Mode Selector In System mode press this button to select one of the DSP audio surround modes such as Hall 1 Hall 2 or Theater Each press of the button selects another mode See page 62 for descriptions of the vari ous surround modes Test Tone Button Press this button to activate the CVR700 s test tone that is used to calibrate speaker output levels See pages 50 51 for more information on calibrating speaker output levels Logic 7 Mode Sports Preset Button When the System Selector is active press this button to select from among the available Logic 7 sur round modes See page 62 for descrip tions of the various surround modes When the Screen Selector is active press this button to select the CVPD50 picture settings that were preset at the factory for optimal viewing of sporting events NOTE The Sports Broadcast Movies Buttons OBD ED A optimize picture settings for a specific viewing medium The Broadcast settings are the most neu tral balanced and accurate and are opti mized for clarity The Movies settings are softer and less bright The Sports settings are more vibrant and optimized for fast moving action SPL Select Button This button activates the EzSet function to quickly and accurately calibrate the speak
258. n configuration menus to scroll through options lists and to select various settings such as delay speaker configurations surround modes digital inputs etc To use the button sim ply press it left right up or down in the direction indicated by the 4 W 4 P icons printed on the disc D Exit Cancel Button When pro gramming the remote press this button to cancel the current function and return to the previous remote function When using the remote to enter frequencies for direct tuner access or track numbers for direct access on a CD press this button to clear previous entries Set Button This button is used to enter settings into the CVR700 s memory or to confirm a selection while setting delay distances speaker configuration and output level adjustments It is used as the Enter or OK button for most other devices 20 Preset Page Down Reverse Skip Button This multipurpose button has a different function depending on the source in use When used with the tuner this button scrolls through the preprogrammed sta tion presets When used with optical sources such as the internal disc changer or an external CD player press this button once to return to the beginning of the current track and again quickly to go to the beginning of the previous track The Page Down function is used with cable and satellite television to page quickly through on screen menus When a disc containing JPEG sti
259. n screen menus while using the DVI Computer source IMPORTANT The Screen Saver function does not operate when using the DVI video input Therefore to prevent an image from burning into your CVPD50 screen it is extremely important that you activate the Screen Saver function on your PC or other DVI device If none is available we recommend you place the CVPD50 screen in Sleep mode by press ing the Screen Standby Sleep Button D A on either remote when you anticipate that a still image will remain on screen for more than a few minutes AN Auxiliary Source Input An auxiliary audio video source input is provided in case you have an additional component you d like to connect to your JBL Cinema Vision system such as an additional cable television box satellite receiver HDTV tuner laserdisc player or any other audio video device Do not con nect a turntable to this input unless you are using it with a phono preamp with conventional analog audio outputs Connect the coaxial or optical digital audio output of the device to the Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input or the Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio Input As a backup you may wish to connect the device s analog audio outputs to the Auxiliary Analog Audio Inputs If the device has composite or S video outputs connect one or the other to the corresponding Auxiliary Analog Video Input Main Room Remote Control Extension An infrared receiver located on th
260. nal Function 9 Night Mode This button activates the Night mode which preserves dialogue center channel intelligibility at low vol ume levels when available in specially encoded Dolby Digital sources 0 Sleep Timer The Sleep function is activated to automatically place the CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode after a period of time Each press of the button changes the time until turn off 90 minutes 80 minutes 70 minutes 60 min utes 50 minutes 40 minutes 30 minutes 20 minutes 10 minutes Sleep mode Off and then cycling back to 90 minutes and so forth When the Sleep timer is in use the front panel displays will dim to half brightness 4h Angle Tuning Mode Tune Manual Button When the DVD mode is active press this button to select an alternate camera angle if available on the current DVD When the tuner is in use press this but ton to change the tuner mode between manual and automatic When the button is pressed so that TUNE AUTO appears in the Lower Display Line B only stations with acceptable signal quality will be tuned when scanning and the tuner will play FM stations in stereo when available In the Auto mode when the Tuning Up Down Buttons 62 A are pressed the unit will automatically search for the next avail able station with good signal strength When this button is pressed so that TUNE MANUAL appears in the Lower Display Line A pressing and holding the Tuning Up Down Buttons HO
261. nal picture resizing techniques do not work in eliminating them This setting is specifically designed to address this problem It first crops the bars off the sides of the 16 9 picture to render it a 4 3 picture and then performs a natural look ing nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16 9 Screen The Letterbox adjustment is temporary and will only apply to that disc We encourage you to experiment with the modes to find one that suits you for a given presentation NOTE The Letterbox and Frame func tions are not available with the internal DVD CD changer unless the DVD Auto Resize function has been turned off using the Screen setup menus See page 57 for more information When pressed and held for at least two seconds this button places the CVPD50 display screen in Screen Saver mode in which a JBL logo will appear to move around the screen It is important to turn on the Screen Saver any time a still image is likely to remain on screen for more than a few minutes as a still image such as a menu display may be burned into the display causing perma nent damage to the plasma screen that is not covered under warranty This danger is not present when a moving image is displayed 4h PIP On Off PIP Swap Button When used with a PIP source whose composite video output has been con nected to the Picture in Picture Composite Video Input press this button once to turn on the PIP function and again to turn it off
262. nction of these buttons varies depending on whether you have selected the tuner or the disc changer as the current input source and in what con text you press it When the tuner is the source press the left button to tune lower frequency sta tions and the right button to tune higher frequency stations Each tap of the but tons will increase or decrease the fre quency by one increment Press and hold the button and the tuner will scan for a station with acceptable signal strength When the next higher or lower frequency station with a strong enough signal is tuned the frequency scan will pause Press the button again to stop scanning When the tuner is the source and you have pressed the Tuning Mode Button 3 so that PRESET appears in the Lower Display Line pressing these buttons enables you to scroll through the list of stations that have been previously stored in the CVR700 s memory See page 64 for more information on using the tuner When the disc changer is the source press and release these buttons to move skip either backward left button or for ward right button through the tracks on a DVD Audio CD or VCD disc or the chapters on a DVD Video disc Press and hold either button for at least 1 second and then release to search either back ward left button or forward right but ton the current track or chapter at 2x speed Press and hold again and release to increase the scan speed to 4x Repeat
263. nd SP LEVEL FL Q will appear in the Lower Display Line 3 with FL O flashing To change the level first press the Set Button A to select the front left FL channel and then use the A Navigation Controls A to raise or lower the level DO NOT use the volume control as this will alter the reference setting Once the change has been made press the Set Button A and then press the a v Navigation Control A to select the next output channel location that you wish to adjust To adjust the subwoofer level press the A w Navigation Control q A until SP LEVEL SUB D appears in the Lower Display Line B Repeat the procedure as needed until all channels requiring adjustment have been set When all adjustments have been made and no further adjustments are made for 5 seconds the CVR700 will return to normal operation The channel output for any input may also be adjusted using the on screen menu system First set the volume to a comfortable listening level using the Volume Control 0ED A Then press the OSD Button Ay to bring up the MASTER MENU Fig 1 Use the A V Navigation Controls A to scroll down to the SPEAKERS line and press the Set Button to select it The confirmation menu Figure 18 will appear and you should scroll down to the Y ES line and select it This will cause the SPEAKERS menu Figure 19 to be displayed Scroll down to the LEVELS line and select it which will bring up the SPEAKER LEVE
264. nder warranty 10 What s Included CVPD50 Carton Contents One CVPD50 50 Inch Plasma Display Screen shown with credenza stand One wall mount bracket for the CVPD50 screen One power cord for the CVPD50 screen packed with CVPD50 Eu One JBL Digital Link cable to connect the CVPD50 screen to the CVR700 3 meters 5 and 10 meter lengths available separately packed with CVPD50 One VGA to DVI cable for analog PCs 3 meters packed with CVPD50 gt CVR700 Carton Contents One CVR700 audio video receiver video processor optical disc changer with owner s guide quick start guide and warranty cards 00000 loop antenna 2 ON OFF MUTE ALL HOLD PRESS amp HOLD FOR SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Con GD GAE IGHT CVR700R2 lI SzSet 3 D S a2 e 3 TIR iE ji E a e CER e fis EDE SINUS alo 4 E E Tight CVR700R1 What s Included continued One CVR700R2 remote control One CVR700R1 remote control 11 DISC FORIVIATS SUPPORTED BY THIS PLAYER The unit can play the following types of discs DVD It DVD CD 8cm 3 disc 8cm
265. ng any programming or removing and replac ing the batteries you may perform a soft reset by removing the cover from the bat tery compartment and gently pressing the small black rectangular button labeled RESET This should return the remote to normal operation Additional Notes on Configuring and Operating the Remote e n normal operation the last selected device will appear in the upper line of the LCD Information Display After one minute with no activity the remote will go into standby mode and the display will go blank to conserve power Simply press any button to return the remote to normal operation When the remote is being programmed it will automatically time out if no button is pressed within a 30 second period The message shown in Fig 117 will appear briefly and the remote will then exit the feature being programmed and any data entered will be lost TIME OUT OR REM KEY PRESSED Figure 117 The programming or configuration process may also be stopped at any time by pressing the Remote Menu Button The message shown in Figure 117 will appear the data entered in the current process will be lost and the remote will return to nor mal operation Any process that was underway when the button will be pressed must be restarted In most situations you may press the Exit Cancel Button to simply exit the current function and return to the previous menu screen The Cancel function i
266. ng follow the steps shown above except that in Steps 4 and 5 select the same device for both the DENICE IH USE on the left side of the bottom line and the PLIHCH THROLIGH device In the example used the display to return the remote to default settings will appear as shown in Figure 93 PUNCH THROUGH GAME lt GAME A Figure 93 Channel Control Punch Through Channel punch through allows the Channel Up Down buttons to send com mands to a different device than the one that has been selected for other com mands For example you may wish to use a cable box or satellite receiver as the source for a VCR so you would want the Channel Up Down Controls to transmit commands to the cable box even though the other button commands are programmed to operate the VCR To program the remote for channel punch through follow these steps This example will show how to program chan nel punch through so that the commands programmed for Channel Up Down for the Cable device will be transmitted when the VCR device has been selected as the current device 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button f for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button DD will remain illuminated in red Press the
267. ng Product Codes The remote is factory programmed for all CVR700 functions as well as those of JBL DVD players In addition by following one of the methods below you may program the remote to operate a wide range of devices from other manufacturers The Input Selectors A each may be programmed with one of several device types as listed in the table below Unlike the main remote control the device types on the secondary remote control may not be reassigned It is important to program your external devices into the correct cor responding source buttons so that the desired remote control commands will be available for use with your device Source Device Types Button AUX TV HDTV VCR DVD CD Cable Satellite VCR VCR CBL SAT Cable Satellite HDTV Game Game Camcorder Cam DR DVD R CDR DVHS TIVO PVD DVR PVR Personal Video Recorder DVI DVI DVD DVI CBL DVI SAT The DVD Tuner Screen and Svstem selec tors mav not be reprogrammed Direct Code Entrv This method is the easiest wav to program vour remote to work with different products 1 Use the tables in the following pages to determine the three digit code or codes that match both the product type e g VCR TV and the specific brand name If there is more than one number for a brand make note of the different choices 2 Turn on the unit you wish to program into the secondary remo
268. ngs 56 57 Picture Settings Menu 56 Power Switches 16 25 33 37 45 59 Preset Stations 16 17 26 30 37 64 Processor Reset 110 Programmed Device Functions 88 91 94 96 97 Programmed Play 75 Programming Product Codes 76 78 92 93 Progressive Scan 14 15 Punch Through Programming 83 84 94 95 Random Play 27 68 69 Rear Panel Connections 20 23 Recalling Preset Stations 16 17 26 30 37 64 Recording 64 Remote Controls 24 38 76 108 Remote Control Batteries 45 Remote Control Function Lists 89 91 96 97 Remote Control Setup Code Tables 98 108 Repeat A B 28 Repeat Play 28 69 Resetting the Remotes 87 95 Resume Mode 15 68 Safety Information 4 7 9 Satellite Television 21 22 43 44 76 108 Screen Menu 55 Screen Saver 28 34 35 40 41 Screen Setup 30 55 58 Screen Standby 29 35 40 41 71 Secondary Remote Control 32 38 92 108 Setting Stations 64 Sleep 16 29 59 Source Configuration 46 48 Source Selection 18 25 33 46 59 Speaker Configuration and Bass Manager Menu 48 Speaker Crossovers 49 Speaker Crossovers Menu 49 Speaker Distances Menu 50 Speaker Levels Menu 51 Speaker Menu 48 Speaker Placement 42 43 Speakers Polarity 42 Speaker Setup 48 51 Speaker Sizes 48 50 Speaker Wire 42 Speaker Channel Input Indicators 19 61 SPL Selector 25 51 84 85 Subwoofer 21 42 43 Surround Mode Selection 18 25 30
269. not appear to issue the correct command If this is the case repeat the procedure outlined above but if more than one numeric key selection is suggested in Step 8 try a different num ber to see whether the remote operates correctly Although the remote is prepro grammed with an extensive library of codes for many major brands it is also possible that you may have attempted to program a product that is too new or too old and thus not all of its commands will be in the code library You may fill in the codes for any button that does not oper ate properly by using the learning tech nique shown on this page Automatic Code Entry In addition to manual code selection using the brand name list it is also possible to automatically search through all the codes that are stored in the remote s library to see whether a device will respond even if it is not listed among the brands that appear when you program the remote manually To automatically search through the codes that are available for a specific device type e g DVD VCR follow these Steps 1 Turn on the power to the device you wish to program into the remote This is important because in a later step you will need to see whether the device turns off to determine whether the remote has been programmed for the proper remote codes In order to pro gram codes for a game console or camcorder which do not have remote controlled power on off codes you must insert a disc o
270. nterrupted and the sound mutes you will need to manually Switch to the analog audio input by pressing the Audio Input Button D Av and using the A V Navigation Buttons to select the analog audio input for the current source Press the Set Button A to enter your selection and return to normal operation When switching to a digital channel follow the same procedure except select the appropriate digital audio input for the source This switching is not a fault of either the CVR700 or the cable box as it is caused by the use of different audio technologies on different chan nels by the cable company or program supplier Although the CVR700 will decode virtu ally all current DVD movies CDs and HDTV sources it may not be compatible with future digital sources When a digital source is playing you may not be able to select some of the analog surround modes such as Dolby Pro Logic Il Dolby Pro Logic Ilx Hall Theater or Logic 7 When a Dolby Digital or DTS source is playing it is not possible to make an analog recording using the Digital Recorder Analog Audio Video Outputs or the 63 64 VCR Analog Audio Video Outputs B However the digital signals will be passed through to the Digital Audio Outputs BAAD Tuner Operation The CVR700 s tuner is capable of tuning AM FM and FM Stereo broadcast sta tions Stations may be tuned manually or they may be stored as favorite station presets and recalle
271. number entrv without anv VCD menu shown on screen has no effect even when the Status Banner is on When playing VCD discs it is possible to view the Status Bar Press the Status Button Ad to see the Status Bar Note however that when the PBC is on some features mav not be available with that VCD Vou will be able to see the current track number followed bv a slash and the total number of tracks on the disc Vou will also be able to see the elapsed time for the current track However vou mav not be able to change the track number or uti lize the Time Search function as with an audio CD Use of functions when the PBC is on will varv according to the disc tvpe Note that if the disc was created with Plavback Control PBC see below it is not possi ble to change track numbers directly Plavback Control VCD discs made under the Revision 2 0 specification will usuallv offer PBC plav back control The PBC ON banner will appear when the disc is plaved With PBC vou can select titles and navigate the disc as with DVDs However the access to some functions mav be prohibited bv the PBC plavback control in that case the FEATURE NOT AVAILABLE banner will appear on screen When the VCD is made without PBC the disc can be controlled the same as an audio CD but direct track access by entering a number is not possible without opening the Status Bar With PBC many discs include chapter selection menus
272. o that the word SCREEH appears in the upper line of the LCD Information Display Most of the programming functions in this section begin by using the remote control s own menu system which is accessed by pressing and holding the Remote Menu Button until the Main Menu appears In order to access this function you must first press the System Selector Programming Product Codes Thanks to the remote s advanced technol ogy and two line LCD display it is no longer necessary to look up cumbersome codes when programming the remote fol lowing the steps outlined below you sim ply search for the brand name from the remote s memory We recommend that you first try the preprogrammed code entry method If that procedure is not successful then try the code learning method Preprogrammed Code Entry The easiest way to program the remote for operation with a source device from another brand is to follow these steps 1 Turn on the power to the device you wish to program into the remote This is important as in a later step you will need to see whether the device turns off to determine whether the remote has been programmed for the proper remote codes In order to program codes for a game console or cam corder which do not have remote controlled power on off codes you must insert a disc or tape and begin play 2 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button gt for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figur
273. o slow play speeds are available for CDs or other disc types A System Selector Press this button to select the control codes for the CVR700 A Screen Selector Press this button to select the control codes for the CVPD5O screen Tone Mode Color List Button This button controls the tone settings enabling adjustment of the bass and tre ble boost or cut You may also use it to disable the tone controls for a flat response The first press of the button displays a IN message in the Lower Display Line A To disable the controls press the A W Navigation Controls until the display reads TONE OUT To change the bass or tre ble settings press this button again until the desired control appears in the Lower Display Line 3 and in the on screen display and then press thea W Navigation Controls A until the desired setting appears When the Screen mode is active press this button to adjust the picture settings of the CVPD50 display See page 55 for more information on screen adjustments This button also activates the List func tion for TiVo players See your TiVo owner s manual for more information on the List function NOTE The Sports Broadcast Movies Buttons GD A optimize picture settings for a specific viewing medium The Broadcast settings are the most neu tral balanced and accurate and are opti mized for clarity The Movies settings are softer and less bright The Sports settings a
274. ock 20 Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Figure A Example of Antenna Grounding as per National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 lt 21 The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus 22 Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards Refer all servicing to quali fied service personnel 23 When replacement parts are required be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or that have the same characteristics as the original part Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire electric shock or other hazards 24 Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition 25 The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer Antenna Lead In Wire Ground Clamp Electric Service Equipment Ground Clamps NEC Art 250 Part H Part No HCGUL1492 6500 04 2004 EN Antenna Discharge Unit NEC Section 810 20 Grounding Conducto
275. ode submenu serves as a good example Figure 17 Note that some modes may not be avail able depending on how you set your system configuration in the SYSTEM submenu above Figure 7 For example the DIGITALEX PL IIx MOVIE landPL IIx MUSIC 1 modes are only available for 7 1 channel systems In addition the DIGITAL 5 land DIGITAL E X modes only available when source materials that are encoded in the Dolby Digital 5 1 or Dolby Digital EX format are actually playing CD VIDEO x LOGIC 7 DOLBV BACK TO SOURCES MENU Figure 16 mus PL II MOVIE 5 1 PL IIx MOVIE 751 PL II MUSIC 5 1 PL II MUSI PL II EMUL 3 STEREO C 7 1 5 1 BACK TO SOURCES MENU Figure 17 Although you are encouraged to experi ment with the various audio surround modes as you become more familiar with your system at this time it is recommended that you select Logic 7 Cinema Movie for DVD Video and VCD discs and for video sources such as cable television and Logic 7 Music for audio CDs MP3s WMAs the AM FM tuner and other audio only sources to complete the setup process Select the 7 1 version if your System is in 7 1 channel operation or the 5 1 version if you are using 5 1 channel operation Note that the audio mode setup for DVD Video discs is slightly different than for the other disc types With the SOURCES menu Figure 10 on screen instead of scrolling to the AUDIO MODE line as for the other disc types
276. of eight rating steps as set by the DVD creators These additional steps allow for more critical control of program playback for all audiences Level 8 All DVDs including adult materials can be played Levels 7 to 2 DVDs for general audi ences children can be played Level 1 DVDs for children can be played DVDs for adults general audiences are prohibited After you have entered or changed the password you may set the level of access see Figure 31 The lowest set ting 1G refers to materials targeted for a general audience and considered to be appropriate for all Higher ratings are given to materials targeted toward older more mature audiences those materials may not be appropriate for younger view ers as described above More informa tion about ratings is available at www mpaa org movieratings Press the Set Button repeatedly to scroll through the rating levels When the desired level appears simply use the AW Navigation Controls A to scroll to another line and the setting will be retained The DVD AUDIO line may be set to enable playback of DVD Audio discs or disable playback of those types of discs Some DVD Audio discs contain different materials including menus and audio tracks that are only available depending on the capabilities of the player For example when such a DVD Audio disc is played in a DVD Video player that doesn t have DVD Audio capability a special DVD Video menu may be
277. of the special bass sounds created for some movies Note however that the subwoofer will only play the LFE information Press the lt gt Navigation Controls A so that ON appears in the on screen menu The BASS MGR setting allows you to use the same speaker configuration set tings for all inputs or to have different settings for each input In most cases the factory default setting of GLOBAL will be appropriate as most listeners do not need to have individualized speaker set tings However some listeners particu larly those with full range front speakers that are used for both movies and music may prefer that different bass manage ment settings be used when listening to music through a CD player as opposed to a movie from a DVD player VCR or cable satellite set top Use the lt gt Navigation Controls A to change this setting to INDEPENDENT You may now change the source input and return to the SPEAKER CONFIGURATION menu and adjust the speaker sizes to suit the source Speaker Crossover Configuration When all initial speaker size settings have been made you now have the option to take advantage of the CVR700 s Quadruple Crossover system which allows individual crossover settings to be made for each speaker grouping Again if you are using JBL Cinema Vision loud speakers you may skip this submenu as the factory default settings are appropri ate for your speakers The low frequency crossov
278. om your new home the ater system we urge you to read this manual A few minutes spent learning the functions of the various controls will enable you to take advantage of all the power these components are able to deliver If you have any questions about these products their installation or operation please contact your retailer or custom installer as they are your best local sources of information CVPD50 50 Inch High Definition Plasma Display Monitor The CVPD50 is a state of the art true high definition plasma display that may be used to display HDTV cable or satellite television signals as well as movies played using the CVR700 s internal DVD changer or it may be used with a person al computer as well as other external devices such as video gaming consoles and recording devices The sophisticated processor automatically configures 4 3 video sources for full screen 16 9 display but purists may manually set the proces sor to display 4 3 video images without scaling or adjustment The CVPD50 offers stunning picture quality even under nor mal lighting conditions thanks to its 3 000 1 contrast ratio and 1 000cd m brightness rating The digital video processor on board the CVR700 outputs a digital video signal via a single propri etary connection to the CVPD50 display The CVPD50 display requires the CVR700 control center for operation CVR700 7 x 100 Watts System Control Center The CVR700 i
279. on appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD dis play and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the A Y Navigation Button until RENAME appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 106 At the next menu screen press the Navigation Button 2 until RENAME BUTTON appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 109 Press the Set Button to continue 29 RENAME RENAME BUTTON A Figure 109 4 The next display screen Figure 110 is where you select the device within which the button to be renamed exists Press the A W Navigation Buttons e until the name of the base device appears In our example since we want to rename a button within the DVD device memory DUDAMAIH should appear in the lower line of the LCD When the desired device name appears press the Set Button EJ SELECT DEUICE DUD MAIN A Figure 110 At the next menu screen you will select the first button within the device to be renamed as instructed in the display shown in Figure 111 Select the button in this case the Exit Cancel Button by simply pressing it on the remote PRESS BUTTON Figure 111 B Depending on whether or not the but ton pressed already has a named function within the device selected one of two things will happen a If the button to be renamed already has a pre prog
280. on This but ton has different functions depending on which device is in use Press it to display the CVR700 system s status or an external DVD recorder s status When the internal disc changer or tuner or an external cable television box is in use press this button to access the cur rent settings for the device For digital VCRs and game consoles this button performs the Back function For some PVRs DVRs this button performs the Instant Replay function Title Freeze Button This button s function differs depending on whether the internal disc changer DVD Main mode or the Screen mode is active To use this button be careful to press only on the upper portion of the button as other functions are accessed by pressing on the lower portion of the button In DVD Main mode press this button while a disc is playing to display the cur rent title number Press it again to jump to the next numbered title on the disc This function may be available even when the disc s software prohibits title jumping using the Forward Reverse Skip Buttons T Many DVD Audio discs require you to press this button to access the disc menu In Screen mode you may use this button to pause playback of the video picture while allowing the audio playback to con tinue uninterrupted enabling you to cap ture an instance or frame of the video 29 Random Letterbox Button This button s function differs dependin
281. on will resume after 5 seconds Continue to adjust individual channels until the vol ume level sounds the same from each speaker Adjustments should be made with only the lt gt Navigation Controls 2 NOT the main volume controls If you are using a sound pressure level SPL meter for precise level adjustment set the volume so that the meter reads 75dB on the C Weighting Slow scale Using the Remote as an SPL Meter The EzSet feature on the main remote may also be used as an SPL meter to assist in accurate setting of the output levels when either the internal test tone or favorite source material such as a test disc is used To use the remote as an SPL meter follow these steps 1 Press and hold the SPL Select Button 0 until the red LED under the Set Button lights and the LCD screen in the remote changes to the display shown in Figure 24 You may also nav igate to the screen shown in Figure 24 by pressing and holding the Remote Menu Button amp T5 for 3 seconds until the main remote menu appears then scroll to the SET SPER LEVELS option and press the Set Button 2 Press the A W Navigation Controls to change the bottom line of the remote s LCD display to read MANUAL SPL as shown in Figure 28 SET SPKR LEUELS MANUAL SPL A Figure 28 3 Press the Set Button within 5 seconds to activate the remote s manual mode so that it functions as an SPL meter The right corner of the bottom line o
282. one type of video connection In addition to the analog audio connection you may also connect an optical or coaxial digital audio output from the device to the CVR700 You will then need to press the Input Select Button to select the desired audio input analog optical or coaxial and specify the correct video input using the audio on screen menu system Press the System Selector and then the OSD Button to enter the menu sys tem Select the SOURCES submenu and make sure the GAME CAMERA source is selected or select the 18 SOURCE line to adjust it Scroll down tothe VIDEO INPUT line and select it to configure the CVR700 to use the video input you connected your device to KE Headphones Jack This jack may be used to listen to the CVR700 s output through a pair of headphones Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1 4 stereo phone plug or that you use an adapter as needed to convert the plug on your headphones to the 1 4 jack used on the CVR700 When the head phone jack is in use the main room speakers will automatically be turned off and the unit will output a standard stereo signal For more information on head phone listening see page 60 WA Front Panel Door The door may be closed to hide the front panel jacks when they are not in use for a smoother appearance To open the door gently push on the bottom of the door in the center to swing it down towards you or gen
283. onnected to the PIP input The second mode splits the screen into two equal halves displaying the main video signal on the left side and the PIP source on the right Press the Set Button A repeatedly while at the PIP Mode line to cycle through these modes and the 0 f f setting The remaining settings in the INPUTS PIP menu enable you to adjust the size and position of the PIP window Size The temperature bar at this line reflects the size of the PIP win dow When the dark square is towards the right side of the bar the window is increased in size and when the square is towards the left side of the bar the win dow is decreased in size Use the lt p gt Navigation Controls A to adjust this setting Pressing the Set Button gt repeatedly will only increase the size of the window but not decrease it PIP Horiz Pos The tempera ture bar at this line reflects the relative horizontal position of the PIP window on the CVPD50 screen When the dark square is towards the right side of the bar the window is positioned toward the right side of the screen and when the square is towards the left side of the bar the window is positioned toward the left side of the screen Use the lt p gt Navigation Controls f A to adjust this setting Pressing the Set Button A repeatedly will only move the window towards the right but not towards the left PIP Vert Pos The tempera ture bar at this line refl
284. ormal and it confirms that EzSet is doing its job of changing the levels to match the desired reference If a channel cannot be adjusted to the proper reference level you will see FAIL displayed in the remote s bottom LCD line before the test tone moves to the next channel This is usually an ndication that the volume control was set too low When EzSet stops circulat ng the tone through all channels and returns to normal adjust the volume level and repeat the procedure from Step 3 6 After the test noise has circulated once through each channel it will send the tone to each channel once again to verify the settings 7 After two complete circulations of the tone the levels are set Upon comple tion of the second circulation the LCD Information Display will flash COMPLETE four times and then go out The tone will stop and the CVR700 will return to normal operation If you find that the output levels cho sen by EzSet are either uncomfortably low or high you may repeat the proce dure Return to Step 2 and adjust the master volume either slightly higher or lower to accommodate your particular room layout and your tastes You may repeat this procedure as many times as necessary to achieve a desired result In order to prevent possible damage to your hearing or your equip ment it is important to avoid setting the master volume above OdB NOTE The subwoofer output is not adjusted when the test tone is in
285. ot play or that all fea tures and menus may not be available Note that in many cases in order to access the disc menu instead of pressing the Menu Button A it is neces sary to press the Title Button or the Audio Button In addition many DVD Audio discs provide two menus a DVD Audio menu and a DVD Video menu intended for use on older players that do not support the DVD Audio format If you wish to view the DVD Video menu and access surround modes and other fea tures only available through that menu such as Dolby Digital 5 1 or PCM audio tracks you will need to temporarily dis able the CVR700 s DVD Audio capability using the DVD Setup menu see Fig 31 TERMINOLOGV Home theater equipment has changed a great deal since the first VCR was intro duced about 30 vears ago Some of the terms used to describe and configure your CVPD50 PDP plasma display monitor and the internal DVD CD changer in your CVR700 may be unfamiliar Some of these terms are described in this section Since they share some of the characteris tics and technology of CD players many of the terms and operational concepts used in a DVD player are similar to what you may be familiar with from CD players and changers or older video disc formats such as Laser Disc However if this is your first DVD product some of the terms used to describe the features of a DVD player may be unfamiliar The following explanations should solve some of the
286. ou won t be able to use this method to program the device Press the Remote Menu Button to exit the programming process You ll need to follow the Learning Commands instructions below to enter the codes for this device into the remote When pressing one of the numeric keys in Step 11 or 12 causes the device being programmed to turn back on follow the instructions shown in Figure 65 and press the Set Button within five seconds of the device turning on After you press the Set button the top line of the LCD display will read SAVING and then the word SAWED will flash four times in the center of the bottom line 14 When the codes are saved the remote will return to normal opera tion and whenever you press the Input Selector Button that was just programmed the codes for the new device will be used Learning Commands On occasions when the remote does not contain the codes for a particular prod uct s remote in its built in library or when you wish to program a missing or special function into one button of a device the remote learning capability allows you to do that To teach commands from one product s remote into the remote follow the steps below The process requires that both the device s original remote and the CVR700R2 remote be available Before pressing any buttons on either remote place them so that the IR transmitter on the remote from the device to be pro grammed is facing the Infra
287. our indi cation that the correct code is in use 4 Press the Input Selector A the light under it will flash three times before going dark to confirm the entry 5 Try all of the functions on the remote to make certain that the product oper ates Keep in mind that many manu facturers use a number of different combinations of codes and it is a good idea to make certain that not only the power control works but also the volume channel and transport controls as appropriate If all func tions do not work properly you may need to Auto Search for a different code or enter a code via the Direct Code Entry method For future reference enter the setup codes for the equipment in your system here Product Code Device Type Source Button AUX VCR CBL SAT GAME CAM DR DVI COMP Learning Codes In addition to using codes from the remote s internal code library the remote is able to learn codes from remotes that may not be in the code library Also you may use this function to learn over the codes from a preprogrammed device to add functions not included in the prepro grammed codes To learn or transfer codes from an original remote to the sec ondary remote follow these steps 1 Place the front of the original remote with the code being sent so that it is facing the IR Transmitter on the secondary remote head to head The remotes should be between 1 and 3 inches
288. output LEARH CODE DUI DUD A Figure 57 4 The next menu screen Figure 68 will prompt you to select the button on the remote that you wish to program Press that button on the remote PRESS BUTTON TO BE PROGRAMMED Figure 58 you press the button to be pro grammed on the remote press and hold the button on the remote control for the device to be programmed within five seconds as instructed on the next menu screen Figure 69 PRESS BUTTON ON ORIGINAL REMOTE Figure 69 6 Continue to hold the button on the original remote until the menu on the CVR700R2 remote s LCD screen changes If the code is successfully learned you will see the display shown in Figure 70 CODE LEARHED COHTINUE dd Figure 70 If you see that menu proceed to Step 9 If the code is not successfully learned you will see the display shown in Figure 71 If that menu appears proceed to Steps 7 and 8 CODE FAILED AGAIN A Figure 71 If you don t attempt to teach a remote code to the CVR700R2 remote within 5 seconds the words TIME OUT will appear briefly on the second line of the LCD display and you will be prompted to start over by pressing a button on the CVR700R2 remote see Figure 68 You may exit the process at any time by pressing the Remote Menu Button f 7 8 co If the message shown Figure 71 appears in the display press the Set Button to
289. oway yeaday dnojeg um u yoeg punouns 10 punounssiq uns sig 1 UMOQ UMOQ 1999 UMOQ np ssed g qumul quny d0doS uomy Aqiog Aqiog Aqjoq 9 qi 231129 punong 1e9 dn quny diqunyj ZI dues opny 38S 40 df qunuj punouns Ang q yseq auo 159 0ju 199 adoy NI indui 613331 QAQ AL 8U0 158 aud 189 189 95 95 195 195 195 195 195 95 dwog 95 95 95 195 195 duoo AG duoj g dwog aq duoj g dwog jaq dwog iaq duop IAQ ANI duoj Ag duoj Ag dwog Aq dwog iAq duoo Ad 15 dWOJ JAQ 195 dWOJ JAQ duo Ag 195 195 ua les ud 195 les ud les ua 195 dd 195 les les 195 dd les da 195 ud 195 ua 195 dd 195 ud 95 95 les 195 195 195 ag 95 jagued 98 85 95 195 195 195 les wej awey weg awen weg aweg weg awen euer uej euer wej awey ue euler wej awey weg awen weg aweg wej awej wej awes wey awey 95 95 195 195 195 195 195 95 195 95 95 95 195 195 15 199 15 19 lvs 89 1vS 18 18 18 1vS 18 IVS 18 1VS 18 1vS 18 lvS 18 15 19 1vS 18 15 199 18 19 les 18 19 198 LWS 189 15 18 0 195 195 195 195 195 195 88 HJA 195 195 195 HJA 18S 195 195 195 195 195 HJA 60 195 XIV 195 xny 195 XIV 195 XIV 195 XIV 195 XIV 95 xny 195 xny 195 xny 195 xny Jes xny 195 XIV 195 XIV 195 XIV 195 XIV 195 XIV XIV 80 J
290. pment However it is also compatible with most available audio video devices IMPORTANT NOTE For your personal safety and to avoid possible damage to your equipment and speakers it is always a good practice to turn off and unplug the CVR700 CVPD50 and ALL source equipment from AC power before making any audio or video system con nections Step One Connect the Front Center Surround and Surround Back Speaker Outputs QOO to the respective speakers To ensure that all the audio signals are carried to your speakers without loss of clarity or resolution we suggest that you use high quality speaker cable Many brands of cable are available and the choice of cable may be influenced by the distance between your speakers and the receiver the type of speakers you use per sonal preferences and other factors Your dealer or installer is a valuable resource to consult in selecting the proper cable Regardless of the brand of cable selected we recommend that you use a cable con structed of multistrand copper with a gauge of 14 or smaller Remember that in specifying cable the lower the number the thicker the cable Cable with a gauge of 16 may be used for short runs of less than 3 meters 10 feet We do not recom mend that you use cables with an AWG equivalent of 18 or higher due to the power loss and degradation in perform ance that will occur Cables that are run inside walls should have the appropriate markings to indicate
291. press the gt Navigation Button to move the blinking cursor block to the next position Then press the Numeric Key T gt as required to enter the desired letter c To enter a blank space press the gt Navigation Button twice The first press will move the cursor to the right and the second press 85 86 will move the cursor more space to the right leaving a blank space between the last letter and the next one 8 Repeat Step 7 as needed to enter all the needed letters numbers charac ters and spaces 9 When the text entry is complete press the Set Button The LCD display will blink DEUICE RENAMED three times and then return to normal operation Once a device is renamed you will see the new name on the top line of the remote s LCD display whenever the Input Device Selector is pressed or when any other command function button on the remote is pressed after the main Device Selector is pressed Note that renaming a device in the remote will not change the name of the input used by the on screen menu system of the CVR700 NOTES ON RENAMING DEVICES move the cursor to the right or left of the display during the renaming process press the lt gt Navigation Buttons f as required e The table below shows the letters numbers and characters that may be accessed by pressing the Numeric Keys Key Characters Key Characters 1 6 M N 0 6 2 2 7 8 7 D
292. r long periods of time especially during the first 1 000 hours of operation may cause burnout of the CVPD50 plasma display which is not covered under warranty JBL recommends using the Frame Button 29 Ay or the Letterbox Button to select a display mode for each source that fills the screen Information Menu The last submenu in the Screen menu system is the INFORMATION menu It does not contain any user adjustable settings In the unlikely event that you have a problem with your CVPD50 screen a customer service representative may ask you to access this screen and report the information it contains With the SCREEN MENU Fig 33 on screen scroll to the INFORMATION line and select it by pressing the Set Button A The INFORMATION submenu Figure 40 will be displayed INFORMATION Hardware Version RevOe Software Version 251004R Back to screen menu Figure 40 This menu displavs the version numbers of vour screen and its software drivers Vour JBL Cinema Vision svstem is now completely configured and you are ready to begin enjoving the finest in home the ater entertainment BASIC OPERATION Once you have completed the initial setup and configuration of the JBL Cinema Vision system it is simple to operate and enjoy The following instruc tions will help you maximize the enjoy ment of your new home theater system Turning the CVR700 and CVPD50 On or Off Plug the CVPD50 and CVR700 power
293. r tape and begin play 2 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button f for about three seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 3 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD dis play and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the Set Button to begin the process of selecting a device and locating the proper remote codes 4 PROGRAM CODE will appear in the LCD display Figure 56 Press the A V Navigation Controls 2 to scroll through the list of sources and press the Set Button when the source you wish to set the codes for appears For this example we will select AUX to enter the codes needed to operate your HDTV set top tuner 5 SELECT amp DEUICE will appear in the LCD display Figure 57 Press the A Y Navigation Button 2 to scroll through the list of device cate gories and press the Set Button QT when the device for which you wish to set the codes appears For this 78 example we will select HDTV Tuner to enter the codes needed to operate your HDTV set top box At the next menu screen on the remote press the Navigation Button so that the bottom line of the LCD display reads LITD Fig 62 and then press the Set Button to enter the Automatic programming mode PROGRAM DEUICE AUTO x Figure 62
294. ra automatically trigger the select special separate low frequency channe creates a 6 1 channel sound fie Dolby P fu 0 Logic Il decodes Dolby Pro Logic Il Movie mode used wi that presentation Dolby Pro Logic is the latest sound field from matrix surroun Logic 7 is an advanced mode tha stereo operation you may choose between either 7 1 or 5 1 5 1 channel sys programs or conventiona are available fo Surround or similar matrix enco of sounds with fades and pans The Logic 7 experience by presenting a wid informa availab program front and surround speakers to is configured fo by Digital signal i ion is set for 5 dedica ion is set for 6 DTS ES discrete encoding wi All other DT or Music mode shou movies or oth vide the addi encoded with ed low ion of one of requency effects channel S presen DTS da he two is opt extension of Dolby Pro Logic Il d or two channe Speakers Both Movie and Music versions of Pro extracts th material WI that deliver a less is the sole source of bass energy The CVR70 accuracv when used with 96kHz source materials These two modes are available six channel surround presentati when a program with matrix su he Theater mode creates a so on from matri rround encodi ems The Logic ding Logic 7 C delivers increased ce are much smooth l range discrete left center
295. rammed or previ ously renamed title in the remote s memory you will see that name on the top line of the LCD display and a blinking block cursor will appear on the far left side of the bottom line of the display as shown in Figure 112 b If the button to be renamed does not have a function in the device selected the top line of the LCD screen will be blank and a blinking block cursor will appear on the far left side of the bottom line of the display EXIT E Figure 112 7 To enter the new name for the button press the Alphanumeric Keys The letters above the numbered but ons indicate which letters or symbols will appear when the button is pressed during the renaming process The first press of the button will enter he first character shown subsequent presses of the same button will change the display to the other let ters above that numbered key For example since the first letter we need to rename the Exit button to Full screen is an you would locate the F above the 9 button and press the button four times The first press shows a D and subsequent presses step through the other letters avail able until the F appears Consult the table at left to see which characters are available by pressing a particular button ct 8 After you enter the first letter of the new device name there are three options for entering the next character a To enter a lett
296. re more vibrant and optimized for fast moving action Ax OSD Contrast Button Press this button when the System mode is active to access the setup menu for the CVR700 s audio functions When the Screen mode is active press this button to adjust the contrast of the CVPD50 dis play See page 55 for more information on screen adjustments NOTE The Sports Broadcast Movies Buttons OD A optimize picture settings for a specific viewing medium The Broadcast settings are the most neu tral balanced and accurate and are opti mized for clarity The Movies settings are softer and less bright The Sports settings are more vibrant and optimized for fast moving action JBL On Screen Library Settings Distance Button In DVD mode this but ton accesses the JBL On Screen Library which displays on screen a thumbnail image and description of each disc cur rently loaded in the CVR700 s internal changer including disc type and title if available Use the A V 4 p Navigation Controls A A and the Set Button to conveniently select and play any loaded disc In the System mode this button is used to enter the distance from each speaker to the listening position to avoid unnatu ral sound caused by the speakers being placed at varying distances from the listener which could result in delay artifacts When this button is pressed DIST FRONT LOFT will appear in the Lower Display Line 3 with FRONT and T both flashing Pr
297. read appears press the Set Button READ MACRO MICRO 1 A Figure 67 5 As soon as the Set button is pressed 6 the first two steps in the macro will be appear in the remote s LCD screen You may then use the A V Navigation Button to step up or down through the list of com mands stored as the macro As you read the display you will see Input Selector Buttons appear in brackets e g EM DD31 When the step in the macro is a function navigation or any other button it will appear next to the bracketed read out of the underlying device e g EM DUDJ POWER ON When you are finished reviewing the macro s contents press the Set Button to return the remote to normal operation NOTE It is not possible to edit the steps in a macro If you notice an error you will need to erase the macro as described above and reprogram all of the steps Punch Through Configuration Punch through is a capability of the remote that allows the Volume controls Channel Up Down buttons or Transport keys Play Stop Record Pause Fast Forward and Reverse and Skip Up Down to link to a different device For example if your TV cable box or satellite receiver is connected through the CVR700 you will most likely want to use the CVR700 s volume control commands even when the remote has been set to issue all other commands for the video device Punch through enables you to easily program the remote to do this
298. red Lens on the CVR700R2 remote pointing to the area next to the slots over the EzSet Microphone Sensor The two remotes should be no more than an inch apart and there should not be any direct sunlight or other bright light source near the remotes 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button f for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button DD will remain illuminated in red Press the A Navigation Button f until LEARN appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 66 Press the Set Button to begin the process of learning com mands from another device s remote into the remote MAIN MENU LEARN CODE A Figure 66 LEARN CODE will appear in the LCD display Figure 67 Press the A YW Navigation Controls to scroll through the list of sources and press the Set Button when the source you wish to set the codes for 99 appears The available options are DVD MAIN SYSTEM SCREEN DVI DVD TIV0 GAME CABLE VCR TV and FM AM TUNER We recom mend that you learn new codes only for devices that are external to the JBL Cinema Vision system For this example we will select DVI DVD to enter the codes needed to operate an external DVD player with a DVI
299. remaining for a title or chapter see Figure 41 m B m Figure 41 FA Title Number The first item in the Status Bar is the current Title Number When this number is highlighted you may use the Numeric Keys 9 to enter the number of the desired title and press the Set Button A to switch to that title Some discs may prohibit this action during certain titles such as the warnings against copying the disc Note that when the DVD Audio setting in the DVD SETUP menu Figure 31 has been set to ON this item will be the Group number When the DVD Audio set ting has been set to OF F the disc will be recognized as a DVD Video disc and this item will be the title number E Chapter Number The second item is the current Chapter Number When this number is highlighted you may use the Numeric Keys Ay to enter the number of the desired chapter and press the Set Button to switch to that chapter Some discs may prohibit this action during certain titles such as the warnings against copying the disc Note that when the DVD Audio setting in the DVD SETUP menu Figure 31 has been set to ON this item will be the Track number When the DVD Audio set ting has been set to OF F the disc will be recognized as a DVD Video disc and this item will be the chapter number Elapsed Time The third item is the Elapsed Time of the current chapter It is not possible to display other time vari ables When this item i
300. righ h musical selections The Pro Logic mode re creates o Logi e maxim hen the 7C channe requency channel stereo sources in systems configured are played DTS 5 1 provides up DTS ES 6 soundtrack right Pro Logic Pro Logic processi iginal echno c IIx are available system speaker configuration has operation the DTS 5 1 mode is available when DVD to 1 1 operation playback of a DTS encoded program source will 1 Discrete DTS ES modes Il be decoded to provide six discrete ful S discs will be decoded using the DTS ES Ma d from the original 5 1 channel bandwidth channels plus a IM bee versions of the Logic 7 modes wh ion to the subwoofer if installed and configured e only when the 5 1 option s Logic 7 adds additional bass enhancement whi localized so 0 features 96kHz capable Logic 7 processi with analog sources plaving to create a three channel x encoded or stereo sources Select the Ci ng is present Select the Music version of rocessing when a nonencoded two channe und field that resembles the acoustic feeling of a standard p T T These modes take advantage 0 T two channel stereo programs stereo program is being played he two Hall modes create sound fields that resemble a small Hall 1 or medium sized multiple speakers to place a stereo signal at both the f hey place the same signal at the front
301. rs NEC Section 810 21 Power Service Grounding Electrode System INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing JBL The JBL Cinema Vision home theater system is truly an entertainment system for the 21st century JBL Cinema Vision is a com plete integrated audio video system that combines the sophisticated performance of separate components with the conven ience of a turnkey solution The system includes a 50 inch high definition plasma display monitor and an audio video sys tem controller that contains a 5 disc DVD Audio DVD Video CD changer high performance A V receiver and a video processor The multichannel loudspeaker system is designed to acoustically elec trically and visually complement the JBL Cinema Vision source and video compo nents Satellites and the center feature common voicing dual neodymium driver satellites and a 1 inch titanium laminate tweeter The subwoofer features a 400 watt RMS power amplifier and a 12 inch cast basket woofer This manual describes the CVR700 con trol center and the CVPD50 50 inch high definition plasma display Together with the CVSAT50 CVCEN50 and CVSUB50 loudspeakers the JBL Cinema Vision sys tem delivers a complete home theater experience including high quality play back of most optical discs The CVPD50 and CVR700 have been engi neered so that it is easy to take advan tage of all of the power of their digital technology However to obtain the maxi mum enjoyment fr
302. s 4h Alphanumeric Keys Select num bers or letters by pressing these keys except in System mode when operating the audio section of the CVR700 in which case each key has the following functions 1 Dolby Surround Mode Selector This button is used to select from the available Dolby audio surround modes Each press of this button will select one of the Dolby Pro Logic Il available in 5 1 channel systems or IIx available in 6 1 7 1 channel systems modes Dolby 3 Stereo or Dolby Digital when a Dolby Digital encoded source is in use Each press of this button will scroll through the available modes See page 62 for more information on Dolby modes 2 DTS Digital Surround Mode Selector When a DTS encoded digital source is playing each press of this but ton will scroll through the available DTS audio surround modes The specific choice of modes will vary according to the type of encoding on the disc and your sys tem s speaker configuration 5 1 channel or 6 1 7 1 channel When a DTS source is not in use this button has no function in System mode See page 62 for more information on DTS modes 3 DTS Neo 6 Surround Mode Selector This button is used to select a DTS Neo 6 audio surround mode See page 62 for more information on the available DTS Neo 6 options 4 Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector Press this button to select from among the available Logic 7 surround modes See page 62 for descriptions of the vari o
303. s HD ms 100 m BACK TO MAIN MENU Figure 30 This completes the setup of the CVR700 audio section There remain a few minor adjustments to be made if desired to the setup menu for the internal DVD CD changer and you may wish to make some advanced settings to the Screen menus then you will be able to enjoy the finest in home theater entertainment DVD Setup The DVD Setup menus are accessed by first making sure that the CVR700 and CVPD50 are properly installed and con nected and then pressing the Power On All Button A to turn on both units Press the DVD Setup Button D A to display the SETUP MENU Figure 31 for the DVD CD changer SETUP MENU TV DISPLAY 9 WIDE VIDEO OUT INTERLACED TV TYPE MULTI VIDEO MODE AUTO PARENTAL LOCK UNLOCK PASSWORD DVD AUDIO ON SLIDE SHOW 5 SEC RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS Figure 31 Important Note The DVD Setup menu functions differently from the CVR700 audio menu system Although you will still use the A W Navigation Controls A to scroll from one line to the next in order to scroll through the options available for each setting you must repeatedly press the Set Button D A If you are using the CVR700 with the CVPD50 display screen then you should leave the first four lines at their factory default settings These settings should only be adjusted if you are using the CVR700 with a different video display device 53 54 The first line
304. s If you are not using the CVPD50 or if you desire a secondary dis play connect thse jacks to the composite or S video input of a TV monitor or video projector to view the output of any stan dard video source selected by the receiv er s video switcher If both standard com posite and S video sources are used you must make connections from both Video Monitor Output jacks to your display Also if component video sources are used you must also connect the Component Video Monitor Output the display NOTE The CVR700 is optimized to be used with the CVPD50 High Definition Plasma Display Composite S video and component video monitor outputs on the CVR700 are provided as a means of con necting an auxiliary display only On Screen status messages and all digital video post processing including scaling de interlacing and upconversion features of the CVR700 are only available when used with CVPD50 Remote IR Output This connection permits the IR sensor in the receiver to serve other remote controlled devices Connect this jack to the IR IN jack on JBL or other compatible equipment B Remote IR Input If the CVR700 s front panel IR sensor is blocked due to cab inet doors or other obstructions an exter nal IR sensor may be used Connect the output of the sensor to this jack NOTE The remote IR input and output on he CVR700 are only used for non video functions and will have no effect on the C
305. s these remotes can replace up to 10 Separate remote controls and therefore end the confusion and clutter associated with having a different remote for each of your system components In order to achieve this goal the JBL Cinema Vision remotes are designed to assume the duties of controlling different devices within your system by first pressing one of the 10 Selector Buttons A Pressing one of these buttons places your remote control in a different page where the remote but tons are assigned control functions avail able for that specific purpose For exam ple all internal DVD changer functions are accessed by pressing the DVD Button A first and all CVPD50 Plasma Display functions are accessed by pressing the Screen Button A first and all overall audio and system commands for the CVR700 are accessed by first pressing the System Button A Throughout this manual you will see references to the system being active in DVD SYSTEM SCREEN CABLE SAT or other modes This means that one of these 10 keys is to be pressed first to place your remote in the prescribed mode before accessing any specific controls It is important to always remember to press the appropriate page selection key before trying to access any specific functions for a system or source This may take a little bit of discipline and practice at first but it should become second nature in a very short time Each function on the CVR700
306. s a unique multifeatured component combining audio and video source selection and processing with a five disc magazine changer capable of playing DVD Audio DVD Video CD CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R RW MP3 WMA Kodak Picture CD VCD and JPEG discs Video playback using the internal DVD changer is of the highest quality benefiting from pixel by pixel processing and digital output to the plasma display The CVR700 is capable of reconstructing the 3 2 pulldown effect introduced when film based programs are transferred to video In conjunction with precision video output DACs the result is a full 60 frame per second image that is the closest thing to film this side of your local cinema The audio section includes all of the lat est surround sound processing formats including Dolby Digital Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Headphone DTS DTS ES DTS Neo 69 DTS 96 24 and Logic 7 High efficiency digital amplifiers are designed to match the characteristics of the JBL Cinema Vision speakers preserv ing signal quality and delivering the power and fidelity you expect from JBL In addition to providing a wide array of listening and viewing options the CVR700 is easy to configure so that it provides the best results for your specific listening environment and viewing prefer ences On screen menus make it simple to customize system settings on screen status banners streamline user interac tion and the EzSet remote automatical
307. s appropriate to configure the CVR700 for either 5 1 or 7 1 channel operation but not for 6 1 channels When 6 1 chan nel program material or a 6 1 channel processing mode is in use material for he surround back channel will be out putted simultaneously through both he Surround Back Left and Right Speaker Outputs Connecting only one loudspeaker to these speaker termi nals will not only deprive you of the bene fits of 7 1 channel surround modes such as Logic 7 but will also interfere with the functioning of EzSet speaker calibration as described on page 51 It may also put undesirable strain on the surround back amplifier circuits and power supplies In Dolby Digital and DTS systems it is best to aim all of the speakers except the subwoofer toward the listening position at about ear level height The low fre quency material reproduced by the sub woofer is mostly omnidirectional and this speaker may be placed in a convenient location in the room However bass reproduction will be maximized when the subwoofer is placed in a corner along the same wall as the front speakers Experiment with subwoofer placement by temporarily placing the subwoofer in the listening position and moving around the room until the bass reproduction is best Place the subwoofer in that location Wall Mounting the CVPD50 Plasma Display Due to its weight and fragility there are special concerns in wall mounting the CVPD50 screen The cu
308. s from the way conventional CD audio discs are structured MP3 WMA playback is slightly different from that of standard CDs Important Note on MP3 Playback MP3 and WMA discs may contain 200 tracks or even more To get the best overview about all tracks on the disc and their names and to select or program them comfortably use the on screen dis play rather than the front panel display The front panel display will only show the number and the elapsed time of the track being played Important Note on WMA Playback The supported bit rate is between 32k bits and 192k bits MP3 or WMA Disc Playback After the disc is loaded and the tray closed the CVR700 will read the disc s table of contents TOC A listing of all the directories on the disc will be dis played if the disc was made with several directories see Figure 48 Figure 48 To select a directory if any press the A W Navigation Controls DA A until the desired directory name is high lighted then press the Set Button folder will expand listing all of the tracks within the directory each preceded by a logo to identify it as an MP3 file or WMA file See Figures 49 and 50 Figure 49 Figure 50 To select a track press the A W Navigation Controls A until the desired track name is highlighted If the list of tracks is longer than will fit on the screen press the Page Down Up Buttons to jump through a list of the track numb
309. s highlighted you may take advantage of the Time Search feature which allows you to begin play back from a specified point on the disc Use the Numeric Keys A to enter the hour minute second indication of the time at which you wish play to begin fol lowed by the Set Button Playback from that point will begin imme diately See Figure 42 Figure 42 Audio The fourth item is the Audio track currently in use The audio track is denoted by a number preceding it to indi cate its order of availability Next the language is displayed such as ENG for English or SPA for Spanish Following this is the bitstream type which may be PCM for a two channel format or DTS or the Dolby logo for one of those formats Next to the format is an icon that reflects the number and location of the channels in the bitstream The icon is in the shape of a square that represents a listening room with the front channels at the top small block will appear at the location of each channel encoded in the bitstream with only one block at each top corner for a 2 channel format Figure 41 depicts that a Dolby Digital 5 1 channel bitstream has been detected Note that while the disc is playing a or 1 may also appear to the right of the icon to indicate whether an LFE channel is present 0 if no LFE channel is present or 1 if the LFE chan nel is detected If the disc has more than one audio track such as 2 0 channel PCM
310. s input is permanently assigned to the Digital Recorder source input 6 DVI Computer Optical Digital Audio Input Connect the optical digital audio output from a DVD player HDTV receiver the S P DIF output of a compati ble computer sound card playing audio files or streams LD player or CD player to this jack The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal DTS signal or a standard PCM digital source Do not connect the RF digital output of an LD player to this jack This input is permanently assigned to the DVI Computer source input amp FM Antenna Connect the supplied indoor or an optional external FM antenna to this terminal AM Antenna Terminal Connect the AM loop antenna supplied with the receiver to these terminals If an exter nal AM antenna is used make connec tions to the AM and GND terminals in accordance with the instructions sup plied with the antenna NOTE If using indoor antennas please mount them as far away from CVR700 and CVPD50 as possible and empirically position them for the least amount of possible interference from the many digital processors inside the CVR700 and CVPD50 B Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 Screen Connect this output to the JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen using the cable supplied with the screen When the CVR700 is used with the JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen no other video monitor connections need to be made Do not connect this output to any other device Doing so may cau
311. s not always available in which case you may need to exit the remote s menu system altogether by pressing the Remote Menu Button 87 88 Extensive use of the programming learning and configuration functions of the remote may consume significantly more battery power than normal remote operation While the batteries should last for four to six months in normal operation you may find that they need to be changed sooner after the remote is programmed for the first time When the batteries approach a level below which the remote will not func tion the remote s LCD screen will dis play a LOW BATTERY warning as shown in Figure 118 We strongly rec ommend replacing the batteries as soon as this message appears to avoid the loss of programming and configura tion settings These settings are not lost when the batteries are changed quickly DUD MAIH LOU BATTERJ Figure 118 The remote has a built in backlight that may be activated by pressing the Light Button This button is made from a special glow material so that it is easier to find in dark rooms This glow feature does not consume any electric ity but the glow will fade when the remote is kept in a dark location for an extended period of time The glow feature may be restored by placing the remote in normal room light for a few hours The remote s backlight will remain lit for approximately 5 seconds after the Light Button is presse
312. s to be reset e LED on CVPD50 flashing yellow and red Snowy picture when used with Copy protection communication external DVI HDCP DVD player between the source unit and the CVR700 was unsuccessful No sound ntermittent connections Incorrect digital audio selection DVD disc is in fast or slow mode e Surround receiver not compatible with 96kHz PCM audio Picture is distorted or jumps during e MPEG 2 decoding fast forward or reverse play Some remote buttons do not operate Function not permitted at this time during DVD play prohibited symbol appears see below SOLUTION Press in Main Power Switch El Check AC power plug and make certain any switched outlet is turned on Press the Standby Switch at least 4 seconds after the unit has been turned on by the Main Power Switch El Load disc label side up align the disc with the guides and place it in its proper position Check to see that disc is CD CD R CD RW VCD SVCD MP3 WMA Photo CD DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW standard conforming DVD Video or DVD Audio other types will not play Make sure disc s Region Code matches code shown on rear panel of unit Enter password to override or change rating settings see page 54 Check all video connections Check input selection of TV or receiver Use Progressive Scan mode only with compatible TV Press Screen Standby Button 9 A to reactivate video circuitry see page 71 Make sure to o
313. se Button has been pressed while a DVD is playing the picture advances frame by frame each time the orward skip button is pressed The Page Up and Down functions are used with cable and satellite television to page quickly through on screen menus A Disc Skip Last Channel Buttons In the DVD mode press this button to begin play of the next available disc in the changer When used with most video sources this button returns to the previously selected broadcast channel Picture Channel Up Down and Slow Play Forward Reverse Button When a disc containing JPEG still images is being played using the internal disc changer press the top of this button to advance to the next image on the disc or the bottom of this button return to the previous image When a cable television box satellite receiver HDTV tuner or TiVo device is in use press the top of this button to tune in to the next higher channel or the bot om to tune in to the next lower channel When the internal DVD changer or an external DVD player is in use press the op of this button once to switch to the DVD slow forward play mode Each addi ional press of the top of the button will cycle through the available slow play speeds of 1 2x 1 4x and 1 8x Pressing he bottom of the button switches to the DVD slow reverse play mode Additional presses of the bottom of the button cycles through the available slow play speeds of 1 2x 1 4x and 1 8x N
314. se serious damage to the device or to the CVR700 which would not be covered under the warranty Port for Factory Use Only This connector is used only by factory author ized service personnel Do not connect any control devices to this port or attempt to connect it to any other device Doing so may cause serious damage to the device or to the CVR700 which would not be covered under warranty DVI HDCP Computer Video Input Connect the compatible DVI video output of a computer HDTV tuner or DVD player to this input This input can also be connected to the VGA output of a con ventional PC cable for connection to a VGA output PC is included with the CVPD50 Be sure to select the appropri ate device from the SCREEN MENU You must select the DVI input first by pressing the DVI Input Selector A on the remote control or the Source Selector on the CVR700 front panel before you can configure your DVI input via the SCREEN MENU Please note that due to newness of HDCP technology all HDCP encoded DVI outputs may not be compati ble with the CVR700 We recommend that you test the compatibility of an HDCP DVI source with your CVR700 before purchasing that source unit In cer tain problematic connections switching to a top quality DVI cable that is as short as possible will help improve connection consistency This input is assigned to the DVI Computer source input 23 24 CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS Pow
315. sible to view your favorite materials To access the screen setup menus first make sure the remote control is set to Screen mode by pressing the Screen Selector A If this is not done the remote will execute the commands programmed for the current source device or for the CVR700 audio section Press the Screen Setup Button A to display the SCREEN MENU Figure 33 If the current source is an external device that you are using with component video or if the source has no video output the background will be black If your source uses component video unless you have also made an S video connection from the source to the CVR700 the menus will not be displayed Also if the current source is the DVI Computer source the menus will not be displayed Otherwise the menus will be transparent with the program material visible behind them As described below you may adjust the transparency of the menus from a setting in the ADVANCED menu SCREEN MENU INPUTS PIP PICTURE SETTINGS DISPLAY SETTINGS ADVANCED INFORMATION EXIT Figure 33 IMPORTANT NOTE The Screen Setup menus function differently from the CVR700 audio menu system Although you will still use the A W Navigation Controls A to scroll from one line to the next in order to scroll through the options available for each setting you must repeatedly press the Set Button QA It is recommended that for initial setup you avoid changing any o
316. some of these functions may be assigned to different buttons depending on which device was select ed The device name will appear in the upper line of the LCD Information Display and the function assigned to that device will appear in the lower line when the button is pressed See pages 89 through 91 for a list of the functions assigned to each button for each device type e Some buttons have special functions when they are pressed and held for 3 seconds The jack on the upper right side of the remote is reserved for future use Do not remove the plug provided or con nect any device to the jack To make it easier to follow the instruc tions that refer to this illustration a larger copy may be downloaded from the Product Support section for this product at www jbl com The JBL Cinema Vision main remote control may be programmed to control up to eight devices including the CVR700 receiver with disc changer and the CVPD50 screen Before using the remote it is important to press the Input Selector that corresponds to the device you wish to operate The remote is capable of operating a wide variety of products made by other manufacturers using control codes that are programmed into the remote s code library As described on pages 76 78 itis simple to program the remote to operate your device by selecting the device type and brand and then pro gramming the correct set of codes for that brand Power
317. ss the Set Button A to select that item In some cases the selection will cause a new submenu to appear and when the lowest level submenu has been reached pressing the Set Button A will select the item that the on screen p cur sor is pointing to Some settings in the ADVANCED submenu will require you to press the lt gt Navigation Controls A to scroll through the available settings Throughout this manual when you are asked to scroll to a certain item that means to use the a W Navigation Controls A until the on screen p cursor is next to the item xx MAIN MENU xx P SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SOURCES SPEAKERS ADVANCED LIP SYNC Figure 6 The menus will remain on the screen for 20 seconds and then they will time out and disappear from the screen The time out may be increased to as much as 50 seconds by going to the ADVANCED SETTINGS menu and changing the item titled OSD TIME OUT Selections will also be shown in the Upper Display Line or the Lower Display Line A depending on which parameter is being adjusted In general the Upper Display Line s will indicate the name of the current menu and the Lower Display Line A will indicate 46 the menu line or option that the on screen gt cursor is currently pointing to However the ADVANCED submenu functions differently in that the settings are adjusted directly on screen rather than by using submenus At that time both the setting
318. stomer is solely responsible for proper selection of mount ing hardware not included with the CVPD50 plasma screen and for proper installation of the wall bracket including but not limited to the selection of appro priate weight bearing supports and proper use of the bracket JBL disclaims any lia bility for the selection of mounting hard ware and or bracket installation Be sure to follow these bracket assembly and installation instructions carefully If you have any questions or doubts about your ability to correctly wall mount the CVPD50 plasma display consult with your authorized JBL dealer or custom installer The bracket must be installed in wood studs there is no wall anchor option The slot holes in the bracket are designed to accommodate 16 inch on center wall studs See the illustration Figure 1 for the dimensions of the bracket 20 1 4 Figure 1 The bracket must be installed using four lag bolts each at least 1 4 inch in diame ter Each bolt must be long enough to engage in the stud by at least 2 inches In order to avoid splintering the wall studs it is necessary to drill pilot holes for each lag bolt Use a carpenter s level to ensure that the bracket is installed squarely You will observe that the bracket uses slotholes to assist you in making adjustments to level the bracket before fully tightening the lag bolts F
319. structions in Steps 6 though 11 to rename the next button b If you have no additional buttons to rename press the amp Navigation Button until the menu screen displays EXIT on the bottom line of the display Press the Set Button to return the remote to normal operation NOTES ON RENAMING KEYS e Renaming a button does not change its function You may change the function of an individual button by learning a new code into the remote See page 78 for more information e When a button is renamed it will only apply to the specific device selected in Step 4 The same button may be renamed as needed for each individual device with which it is used There is a limit of nine characters including spaces for any new device or button name Resetting the Remote Depending on the way in which the remote has been programmed there may be a situation where you wish to totally erase all changes that have been made to the remote and return it to the factory defaults You may do that by following the steps shown below but remember that once the remote is reset ALL changes that have been made including programming for use with other devices learned buttons macros punch through settings and button names will be erased and any settings you had previ ously made will have to be reentered To erase all settings and reset the remote to the original factory default settings and displays follow these steps 1 Press and
320. sure that two people lift the CVPD50 plasma display together Never attempt to lift the unit by yourself Failure to follow this instruc tion may result in personal injury or irreparable damage to the unit that is not covered under warranty Remove Front Panel Protective Film In order to protect the lens covering the front panel of your new CVR700 it is shipped from the factory covered by a protective plastic film Before using the unit remove this film by grabbing one corner and gently peeling back the plastic sheet Note that the film must be removed for proper operation of the remote control Moving the Unit Before moving any of the units be certain to disconnect any interconnection cords with other components and make certain that you disconnect the unit from the AC outlet Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma Display Always make sure that two people lift the CVPD50 plasma display together Never attempt to lift the unit by yourself Failure to follow this instruc tion may result in personal injury or irreparable damage to the unit that is not covered under warranty IMPORTANT NOTE To avoid damage to the CVR700 that may not be covered by the warranty be certain that all discs are removed from the unit before it is tilted in place or moved Once the CVR700 is installed a disc may be left in the unit when it is turned off but the unit should NEVER be tilted or moved with a disc left in the changer Failure to do so ma
321. t controls Memory Zoom Button When used with the tuner press this button to enter the currently tuned radio station into a desired preset location using the Numeric Keys to select the preset location between the numbers 01 and 30 Press this button a second time to store your selection To recall that station later select the tuner as the source then either use the Preset Up Down Buttons to scroll to the desired preset station or use the Numeric Keys to directly enter the preset station location In DVD mode this button may be used while a DVD Video disc is playing to zoom the picture so that it is enlarged There are four steps to the zoom function each progressively larger Continue pressing the button to cycle through the steps and return to the normal view Depending on the disc you may also be able to use the 4 V 4 P Navigation Controls A A to view different areas of the enlarged image A Tuning Up Forward Search Button Press this button when the tuner is in use to change the station to one with a higher frequency Each tap of this button will increase the frequency by one increment When the tuner receives a strong enough signal for adequate recep tion MANUAL TUNED will appear in the Lower Display Line 3 When the tuner is in the Auto Stereo mode press and hold the button to cause the tuner to scan for the next higher station with acceptable signal strength and stop The Lower Display Line A wil
322. t is easy to forget the location of a desired disc Rather than having to scan through all five positions the CVR700 offers the 67 68 JBL On Screen Library which conveniently displays the loaded discs without your having to look at each disc individually When play is stopped you may use the JBL On Screen Library feature Press the OSL Button Ay and the CVR700 will read and identify all loaded discs a process which may take several minutes but which only needs to be performed once A thumbnail for each disc position will appear on screen including a thumb nail image representative of the disc materials if one exists on the disc or a logo indicating the disc type the disc s title if it is on the disc and the disc type see Figure 47 Both MP3 and WMA discs will cause an icon called COMPRESSED to appear When the disc is selected its compressed audio type will be displayed in the usual on screen information display for the disc contents Use the A V 4 p Navigation Controls A A to highlight the desired disc and press the Set Button Ax to select it for immediate playback Select the Exit Library icon if you wish to leave the library display without selecting a disc Figure 47 Transport Controls Playing a Disc Basic playback using the CVR700 involves functions similar to those you may be familiar with for conventional CD players or changers e Press the Play Button You will be prompted
323. te 3 Press and hold both the Input Selector A for the product you wish to control e g VCR TV and the Program Button Ay at the same time When the light under the Input Selector A stays lit release the buttons It is important that you begin the next step within 20 seconds 4 Point the remote toward the unit to be programmed and enter the first three digit code using the Numeric Keys Ay If the unit turns off the correct code has been entered Press the Input Selector A Ay again and note that the red light will flash three times before going dark to confirm the entry If the Input Selector A M flashes nine times instead of three times it means that the code was not accepted Check the code table to ver ify the code and reenter it If you wish to exit the program mode press and hold any Input Selector A A for 2 seconds NOTE Since video game consoles and camcorders do not have Power Off codes look for your game device to execute the Stop function and your camcorder to execute the Zoom In function 5 If the device to be programmed in does NOT turn off continue to enter three digit codes until the equipment turns off At this point the correct code has been entered Press the Input Selector A Ay again and note that the light under the Input Selector A Z will flash three times before going dark to confirm the entry 6 Try all of the functions on the remote to make certain that the produ
324. than ever for you to take advan tage of the power of macro commands Recording a Macro To record a macro into the remote s mem ory follow these steps 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button f3 for about three seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD display and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the A Navigation Button 2 until MACRO appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 78 Press the Set Button to enter the main macro menu branch MAIN MENU MACRO A Figure 78 29 At the next menu screen Figure 79 press the Set Button to begin recording a macro MACRO RECORD MACRO P Figure 79 4 The next display screen Figure 80 is where you select the button that will be used to recall the macro The choices are one of the discrete Macro Buttons 6 Press the A V Navigation Button f until the name of the button you wish to pro gram the macro into is shown For this example we will show how to program a series of commands that will automatically be sent out every time the M1 button is pressed RECORD amp MACRO MICRO 1 A Figure 80 part of the macro Press the A V Navigation Button f until th
325. that are similar to those found on DVDs However on VCD discs the disc menu if any is accessed and controlled differently than on DVDs Play will start with the first track which may be an intro then leading to the VCD menu if any automatically NEXT Skip Forward will skip to the VCD menu from the intro Track 1 directly Once the menu options appear on the screen make your selection by pressing the Numeric Keys 4A that corre spond to your desired choice The desired selection will begin playing automatically PROGRAMMED PLAY Programmed play allows you to select any track from an audio CD for playback in a specific order This type of program ming is particularly useful for parties or other situations in which you desire con tinuous playback of specific selections for a long period of time Begin by stopping play and pressing the Program Button Ay and a list of loaded discs with their disc types will appear on screen see Figure 53 How ever you may only program tracks on the current disc The Upper Display Line J will display T followed by the disc number This represents the track number on the disc which will appear in the order pro grammed Use the Numeric Keys B to enter the number of the first track you wish to program into your playlist and press the Set Button to enter it Continue entering tracks in this fashion to create your list and press the Play Button ZA
326. the MAXIMUM COOLING setting in which the fan will always be on at its highest setting Q Subwoofer Output Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered subwoofer If an external subwoofer amplifier is used connect this jack to the subwoofer amplifier input Use a Y adaptor when connecting two sub woofers DVI Computer Analog Audio Inputs Connect the left right analog audio outputs of a computer or other device with a DVI output to these jacks to benefit from the CVR700 s surround processor for added realism and excite ment when playing computer games or giving multimedia presentations or for other uses When you have also connected the computer s DVI video out put to the DVI Computer Video Input EB you may also benefit from the superior visual presentation of the JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen You may connect any device with left and right analog audio outputs to these jacks Q Auxilliarv Analog Audio Video Inputs Connect the left right analog audio and composite or S video jacks of a video device to these jacks You may con nect any video source such as a VCR HDTV receiver or other device to these inputs Note that if the source device offers digital audio capability that con nection must be made separately and the CVR700 configured accordingly Note that the Auxiliary Source Input does not have component video inputs assigned to it and thus may only be used with compos ite or S video Therefor
327. the DISTANCES submenu accessible If a different mode is selected at a later time the CVR700 will automati cally select the closest delay settings available for the surround mode in use Delay times are adjustable only for the Dolby and DTS modes so you will notice that the DISTANCES menu may not be accessed for other modes such as Logic 7 In addition when a non Dolby Digital mode such as Dolby 3 Stereo or Dolby Pro Logic Il is selected adjust ments may be made to the Surround speakers only To set the delay time for a specific input you will need to access the SPEAKER DISTANCES submenu Figure 23 With the SPEAKERS sub menu Figure 20 on screen scroll down to the DISTANCES line and select it Vote that this line will not be available if the audio surround mode for the current source was not set to a Dolby mode You may need to return to the SOURCES submenu Figure 10 and select a Dolby audio mode before adjusting the distance settings x SPEAKER DISTANCES x FRONT 10 FT CENTER 10 FT SIDE SURROUNDS BACK SURROUNDS UNIT OF MEASURE RESET THESE SETTI BACK TO SPEAKERS MENU Figure 23 Once the SPEAKER DISTANCES submenu Figure 23 is on your screen note that the default unit of measure for distance settings is feet If your measure ments are in feet proceed to the next Step if your measurements are made in meters press the A W Navigation Controls A until the on screen p gt cursor is at t
328. the initial level settings Using EzSet The JBL Cinema Vision EzSet main remote makes it possible to quickly and accurately set the output levels without the use of a sound pressure meter although manual adjustment is also avail able However for the easiest setup fol low these steps while seated in the listen ing position that will be used most often 1 Make certain that all speaker positions have been properly configured for their large or small settings and turn off the OSD system if it is in use 2 Adjust the volume so that it is at 2dB as shown in the on screen display or Lower Display Line i 3 Press and hold the SPL Button D until the red LED under the SPL Button IM lights and the LCD screen in the remote changes to the display shown in Figure 24 You may also nav igate to the screen shown in Figure 24 by pressing and holding the Remote Menu Button for 3 seconds until the main remote menu appears then scroll to the SET SPER LEVELS option and press the Set Button SET SPER LEUELS EZSET A Figure 24 4 Press the Set Button 0 within 5 seconds so that the screen shown in Figure 25 appears Press the A W Navigation Controls f until the lower line of the remote s LCD display shows the number of speakers in your system Don t count the subwoofer For example if you have left center right side surround left and right and back surround left and right speakers for
329. the name of either a master device or any button on the remote using the following steps Renaming a Device To rename a specific device input source button follow these steps For this exam ple we will show you how to rename the Device Input Selector normally shown as TV to HDTV TUNER 1 Press and hold the Remote Menu Button 6 for about 3 seconds while the message shown in Figure 54 appears in the remote s LCD Information Display Release the button when the red light under the Set Button appears 2 The remote s MAIN message Figure 55 will appear in the LCD dis play and the Set Button will remain illuminated in red Press the Navigation Button 2 until RENAME appears on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 106 MAIN MENU RENAME a Figure 106 3 Press the Set Button and RENAME DEVICE will appear on the bottom line of the LCD screen as shown in Figure 107 Press the Set Button to begin renaming a device REHAME RENAME DEUICE Figure 107 4 next display screen Figure 108 is where you select the device that will be renamed In our example that is the TV button Press the A W Navigation Button until the name of the base device appears and then press the Set Button RENAME DEVICE Tu A Figure 108 5 At the next menu screen you will see the device name on the bottom line of the display with a blinking
330. the same way as for a compressed audio disc Use the A W Navigation Controls A A to select a folder and press the Set Button A to expand the folder and display the tracks JPEG files are listed with an appropriate icon preceding the file name see Figure 51 Press the Play Button to begin displaying the images in the expanded folder You may set the amount of time each image remains visible on screen using the DVD Setup menu see Figure 31 Figure 51 73 74 VCD PLAYBACK VCD a format that predates DVD is based on a different compression format than DVD and a recording method that is similar to CD Although the DVD has for the most part replaced VCD as a format the CVR700 offers VCD playback so that you may play your existing library of VCD discs There are two versions of the VCD format an early version which is simply called VCD and a later version with Playback Control which is called Version 2 0 or The CVR700 is compatible with both forms of VCD although playback will vary according to which version is used and the specific way in which the disc was created Even though VCD discs provide video because the format is based on CD tech nology the playback functions for a VCD disc are similar to CD To play a VCD disc place it in the CVR700 as you would do with any other CD or DVD disc The unit takes a few seconds to read the disc s contents The VCD Disc Type Indicator VA
331. tion Button f until the brand name of the device you are programming into the remote appears on the lower line of the display and then press the Set Button 6 The next step is important as it determines which codes will operate the source device or display Point the remote at the device being pro grammed and following the instruc tions shown on the remote s LCD Information Display press and release the Numeric Keys one at a time starting with the 1 Button f After you press the 1 Button the remote s LCD screen will briefly go blank as the code is being transmitted but you will see the transmit icon in the upper right corner of the display to serve as con firmation that the remote is sending out commands 7 co co 10 After you press and release the num ber key watch the device being pro grammed to see whether it turns off As shown in the instructions that will appear on the next menu screen Figure 61 press the Set Button lt and then skip to Step 9 If the unit does not turn off proceed to the next step If the device being programmed into the remote does not turn off after you have pressed the 1 Button continue Steps 6 and 7 by pressing the available numeric keys shown until the device turns off If the device still does not turn off after all choices have been tried the code for this specific device is not in the remote library under that brand name If that
332. tly pull on the upper right corner Push upward on it to close Source Selector Rotate this knob to scroll through the available input sources Turn the knob slowly and gently and you will feel a soft click as each source is engaged You may also hear a click as the CVR700 s electrical circuits engage the source This is normal and assures you that you have correctly selected the source The name of the source will be displayed in the Upper Display Line T and in a Status Banner on screen together with the source s audio input for external sources and video format EFJ Surround Mode Selector Press this button repeatedly to scroll through the available surround modes The modes available will depend on the number of speakers in the system and whether the input is analog or digital See page 60 for more information on surround modes NOTE 6 1 and 7 1 digital modes are available only when the appropriate digi tal bitstream is present IE Input Select Button After you have selected the desired input source press this button repeatedly to scroll through the analog optical digital and coaxial digital audio inputs available for that source Volume Control Turn this knob clockwise to increase the volume coun terclockwise to decrease the volume If the CVR700 is muted adjusting the vol ume control will automatically release the unit from the silenced condition Information Display This display deli
333. to play the list To edit the list press the Program Button Ay followed by the Navigation Button 2 A to view the next track in the list or to add a track to the end of the list or the W Navigation Button A to view the previous track in the list Once you have programmed a list you may repeatedly press the Program Button 2 Ay to toggle in and out of programmed play mode However to cancel the program you must remove the disc from the CVR700 Figure 53 75 76 PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R2 REMOTE The CVR700R2 remote is factory pro grammed for all functions needed to operate the unit In addition it is also preprogrammed to operate most recent JBL DVD players and changers CD play ers and changers CD recorders and cas sette decks The codes for other brand devices may be programmed into the CVR700R2 remote using its extensive library of remote codes or a head to head learning process for codes not in the internal library Important Notes on Using the CVR700R2 Remote The CVR700R2 remote control is capable of operating up to nine devices including the CVR700 In order to segregate the control com mands for each device the remote s logic contains a separate page of commands for each device that is called up when that device s selector has been pressed For example in order to access the commands that control the CVPD50 screen such as Letterbox or PIP you must first press the Screen Selector s
334. to a group or simply for pro viding a better view of an intricate spreadsheet This source input may also be used with the latest compatible DVD players or other devices with high quality DVI video outputs Select either the DVI Computer Coaxial Digital Audio Input or the DVI Computer Optical Digital Audio Input for connecting the corresponding digi tal audio output on your PC Alternatively or as a backup connect the analog audio outputs on your PC to the DVI Computer Analog Audio Inputs If your PC s analog audio output is a stereo 1 8 inch mini jack you will need to supply a Y cable with a stereo 1 8 inch mini plug at one end and conventional left and right analog audio interconnect plugs at the other Connect the video output port on your PC to the DVI HDCP Computer Video Input Q If your computer has an analog VGA video output instead of a DVI output you may use the included VGA to DVI adaptor cable to connect the computer s video output to the DVI HDCP Computer Video Input NOTE When using a source connected via the DVI HDCP Computer Video Input it is not possible to view the CVR7005s video on screen menu system In addition although you may access the audio menus if you attempt to do so you will temporarily lose the video signal at the DVI input If the last previous source used provided an S video signal such as an external VCR then that signal will appear when you attempt to access the o
335. to select a disc number use the Disc Selectors E or the Numeric Keys Ay To momentarily pause playback and freeze the current picture frame on a DVD press the Pause Button AA To resume playback press the Play Button Ay The CVR700 also provides a Resume mode that pauses playback but does not freeze a DVD s current picture frame Resume mode is not available for CDs or VCDs To enter Resume mode for any other disc type press the Stop Button 6 once If you press the Play Button JO the disc will resume playing from the point at which it was stopped Resume mode is not preserved if you turn off the CVR700 change to another disc or select another source e Press the Stop Button 6 Ay twice once for CDs and VCDs to stop playback and enter Stop mode If you press the Play Button A with the disc in Stop mode play will begin from the beginning of the disc and you will also be prompted to select another disc by entering its number To move forward or backward through the tracks on a CD VCD or DVD Audio disc or through the chapters on a DVD Video disc or through the still images on a JPEG disc press the Track Skip Forward Reverse Buttons 1 D A This will not work on and WMA discs which are navigated using a special screen described on page 72 To scan quickly forward or backward within a track or chapter on a CD DVD VCD WMA or MP3 disc press the Forward R
336. to the factory default password 1234 by scrolling to the RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS line and pressing the Set Button D A NOTE This will restore all DVD menu settings to the factory default settings Any changes you have made will be lost We recommend that if you wish to restrict access to DVDs for younger view ers that you change the password as part of the setup process Scroll to the PASSWORD line and select it by pressing the Set Button A The display shown in Figure 32 will appear prompting you to enter the old password and then the new Enter 1234 for the old password and then enter a new password of your choice Type carefully as a mistyped entry will be retained as the new password and it is not possible to correct a mistyped digit without creat ing an entirely new password SETUP MENU TV DISPLAY 16 9 WIDE VIDEO OUT INTERLACED TV TYPE NTSC VIDEO MODE AUTO PARENTAL LOCK PASSWORD OLD DVD AUDIO NEW SLIDE SHOW 5 SEC RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS Figure 32 If for some reason you forget your pass word you may override the password control by entering 2580 as the pass word and then program a new password The Rating Levels The five MPAA rating symbols are G General Level 1 PG Parental Guidance Level 3 PG13 Parental Guidance and 13 years old Level 4 R Restricted Level 6 and NC 17 from 17 years old Level 7 The CVR700 will accommodate a total
337. ton Lip Sync In addition to adjusting the delay time for each individual speaker position the CVR700 allows you to adjust the delay for the combined output of all speakers as a group This feature is called Lip Sync Delay it allows you to compensate for delays to the video image that may be caused by the processing in products such as digital video displays video scalars digital cable or satellite systems or personal video recorders With proper adjustment of the setting for Lip Sync Delay you can eliminate the loss of lip sync that may be caused by digital video applications When the CVR700 is used with the CVPD50 plasma display the delay due to video processing is a known factor and the default Lip Sync delay time of 50ms should be retained However if you are using the CVR700 with another display or if you are experiencing lip sync problems with an external source you may wish to adjust the delay time With the MAIN MENU Figure 6 on screen scroll down to the LIP SYNC line and select it by pressing the Set Button A The AUDIO TIME DEL A Y submenu Figure 30 will appear Use the A W Navigation Controls 2 A to scroll to the desired delay setting and press the Set Button to select that setting To retain the current setting without making any changes scroll to the BACK TO MAIN MENU line and press the Set Button A AUDIO TIME DELAY x o p50 m 10 ms bD ms 20 70 ms 30 m 80 m
338. ton Ay to display the Status Bar Use the 4 D Navigation Controls A to high light the elapsed track time then simply enter the time from which you wish play to begin using the Numeric Keys and then press the Set Button D A to enter it Play will begin imme diately from that point in the current track Video Off Feature During CD playback the JBL logo screen will remain on display After a few min utes the screen saver image should begin automatically as a moving image is necessary to avoid burn in of an image on the sensitive CVPD50 plasma display Some users may wish to turn the video display off if they find the visual display distracting or unnecessary during audio playback The CVPD50 screen may be placed in Screen Standby mode by first making sure the remote control is in Screen mode by pressing the Screen Selector A Then press the Screen Standby Button A to place the screen in Standby mode Press it again to return the screen to normal viewing mode The front panel displays on the CVR700 will remain lit to remind you that the system is on 71 72 MP3 WMA PLAYBACK The CVR700 is among those DVD players that are able to play back discs recorded with MP3 or WMA files This means that you may enjoy the latest music using discs created in your computer through the high quality audio components in your home theater system As the way that MP3 and WMA files are recorded on discs differ
339. tor Button NOTE To remove the Channel Control Punch Through and return the remote to its original configuration repeat the steps shown in the example above However press the same Input Selector in Steps 1 and 2 Transport Control Punch Through The secondary remote may be pro grammed to operate so that the Transport Control Functions A A Play Stop Fast Forward Rewind Pause Skip Up Down and Record for a VCR DVD or CD will operate in conjunc tion with one of the other devices con trolled by the remote For example while using and controlling the TV you may wish to start or stop your VCR or DVD without having to change the device selected by the CVR700 or the remote To program the remote for Transport Control Punch Through follow these steps 1 Press the Input Selector A for the device you wish to have the chan nel control associated with and the Play Button at the same time until the light appears under the Input Selector A 2 Press and release the Input Selector Button A A for the device that requires the transport control The Input Selector Button A 4h you pressed in Step 1 will blink three times and then go out to confirm the data entry Example To control the transport of a DVD player while the remote is set to control an external TV first press the Aux Input Selector Button and the Play Button at the same time Next release them and press the DVD Input Selec
340. tor Button A NOTES e To remove the Channel Control Punch Through and return the remote to its original configuration repeat the steps in the example above However press the same Input Selector in Steps 1 and 2 Before programming the remote for Volume Channel or Transport Punch Through make certain that any pro gramming needed for the specific TV CD DVD cable or satellite receivers has been completed Resetting the Remote Memory As you add components to your home theater system occasionally you may wish to totally reprogram the remote control without the confusion of any commands macros or Punch Through programming that you may have done To do this it is possible to reset the secondary remote to the original factory defaults and command codes by following these steps However once the remote is reset all commands or codes that you have entered will be erased and will need to be reentered 1 Press any of the Input Selector Buttons A and the O Button at the same time until the Input Selector Buttons 4h you pressed lights 2 Press the 0 Button 4A three times 3 The LED under the Input Selector will blink three times Note that this may take a few minutes depending on how many commands are in the memory that need to be erased f the remote locks up for some reason and you wish to reset it without losing any programming or removing and replac ing the batteries you
341. tput or the Optical Digital Audio Output to the corresponding record input on your recording device If you also connect the Digital Recorder Analog Audio Outputs to the analog record inputs on your device remember to select the correct input on your recorder Connect either the composite video or S video Digital Recorder Analog Video Output to the corresponding record input on your recording device VCR Source Input If you have an analog VCR or other ana log recording device we recommend that you connect it to the VCR source input and output jacks Connect the analog audio outputs of the recorder to the VCR Analog Audio Inputs If available connect the S video output of your recorder to the VCR Analog Video Input Otherwise use the composite video jacks Next connect the VCR Analog Audio Outputs B to the analog audio record inputs on your recorder Connect the same type of VCR Analog Video Output B composite or S video that you used for the input to the CVR700 to the record input of your device DVI Computer Source Input Due to its advanced video processing and reproduction capabilities the JBL Cinema Vision system may be used with your per sonal computer PC for no compromise video displays A dedicated DVI digital video interface may be used with com patible computers to enjoy activities from video games to surfing the Internet The large screen is perfect for displaying pre sentations
342. ts equipped with onboard decoding of the MP3 and WMA audio formats used by computers and portable audio devices By offering MP3 and WMA decoding the CVR700 is able to deliver precise conversion of the digital signals to an analog output along with the bene fits of listening to the MP3 or WMA audio through the CVR700 s high power amplifier and the speakers from vour sur round svstem rather than the smaller speakers and low powered amplifiers tvpicallv used with computers To take advantage of the CVR700 s MP3 and WMA capabilities simply insert a disc containing MP3 or WMA audio files into the changer drawer When the digital signal is available the Lower Displav Line 3 will indicate that an MP3 or WMA bitstream is present and the audio will begin plaving NOTES e The CVR700 is only capable of playing signals in the MP3 MPEG 1 Laver 3 format or in the Windows Media Audio WMA format compatible with Windows Media plaver version 9 or greater It is not compatible with other computer audio codecs Due to the wide variation in MP3 and WMA formats and encoding speeds it is possible that the CVR700 may not be compatible with all MP3 or WMA files Some may produce unacceptable results or may not be decoded This is not a fault of either the computer or the CVR700 but rather a by product of the unpredictable nature of compressed audio playback Even when your computer does not have a digital output that is compatible
343. uner to scan up or down through all frequencies stopping when you release the button even if no accept able signal is present The message MANUAL TUNED will neverthe less appear in the Lower Display Line B 4 Stations may also be tuned directly in either the automatic or manual mode To enter a station s frequency directly first select the AM or FM band as desired be pressing the Tuner Button A Next press the Direct Button A Within 5 seconds of when DIRECT IN scrolls in the Lower Display Line A enter the station frequency by pressing the Numeric Keys T gt Ay If you press an incorrect button while entering a direct frequency press the Exit Cancel Button A to start over Preset Tuning Using the remote up to 30 stations may be stored in the CVR700 s memory for easy recall using the front panel controls or the remote To enter a station into the memory first tune the station using the steps outlined above Then 1 Press the Memory Button A two underlines will flash in the Upper Display Line T 2 Within 5 seconds press the Numeric Keys 4A corresponding to the memory location where you wish to store this station s frequency The pre set number will appear in the Upper Display Line 1 3 Press the Memory Button A again to store the preset station 4 Repeat the process after tuning any additional stations to be preset NOTE By its nature plasma display devices tend to
344. ur credenza or other furniture is capable of supporting the weight of the CVPD50 in a stable fashion If it becomes necessary to move the CVPD50 to another location two people should carry it by holding the plasma screen Do not attempt to carry the CVPD50 while holding it by the stand lt lt lt lt Figure 3 Each column is made up of two parts the main column and the top foot Using the supplied bolts attach each foot to its col umn but do not fully tighten the bolts Use a 5mm hex key not supplied Carefully insert the glass base into the slot in the column making sure to line up each column flush with the edge of the base This will insure that the base is installed evenly for maximum stability and so that the columns will line up prop erly with the openings on the underside of the CVPD50 To ensure a proper fit GENTLY place the plasma display on a carpeted floor with one end up Make sure that the screen itself is at all times perpendicular to the floor While one person holds the unit steady the other person should check the fit of each column in the two openings on the underside of the unit Loosen move and retighten the column feet until a proper and secure fit is achieved Then secure the columns in their openings using the two supplied hex bolts and the same 5mm hex wrench you used to attach the feet to the columns This method is preferable to placing the stand on the credenza and lowering the
345. urce device Sports Broadcast and Movies Preset Selectors When the Screen Selector is active press any of these buttons to select the CVPD50 pic ture settings that were preset at the fac tory for optimum viewing of sporting events broadcast television programs or movies NOTE The Sports Broadcast Movies Buttons C ED A optimize picture settings for a specific viewing medium The Broadcast settings are the most neu tral balanced and accurate and are opti mized for clarity The Movies settings are softer and less bright The Sports settings are more vibrant and optimized for fast moving action A A Navigation Buttons These buttons are used to navigate the on screen configuration menus to scroll through options lists and to select various settings such as delay speaker configura tions surround modes digital inputs etc Level DVD Setup Guide Button This button is used to start the process of setting the CVR700 s output levels to an external source such as a favorite DVD While the source is playing press this button and then press the W Navigation Controls A until the channel to adjust appears Press the Set Button to select that channel and then use the A W Navigation Controls again to adjust the level setting See page 64 for more information In DVD mode this button accesses the DVD setup menu described on page 53 and enables you to configure the DVD changer 4
346. us surround modes 5 DSP Surround Mode Selector Press this button to select one of the DSP audio surround modes such as Hall 1 Hall 2 or Theater Each press of the button selects another mode See page 62 for descrip tions of surround modes 6 Stereo Mode Selector This button is used to select a stereo listening mode When the button is pressed so that SURROUND OFF appears in the Lower Display Line the CVR700 will operate in a bypass mode with true fully analog two channel left right stereo mode with no surround processing or bass management as opposed to other modes where digital processing is used When the button is pressed so that SURROUND OFF appears in the Lower Display Line and the DSP and Surround Off Surround Mode Indicators are lit you will enjoy a two channel presentation of the sound along with the benefits of bass manage ment Depending on whether your system is configured for 5 1 orf 6 1 7 1 channels the next press of the button will cause either 5 CH STEREO or 7 CH STEREO to appear and the stereo signal will be routed to all five or seven speakers See page 62 for more informa tion on stereo playback modes Test Tone Press this button to activate the CVR700 s test tone that is used to cal ibrate speaker output levels See pages 50 through 52 for more information on calibrating speaker output levels The EzSet function is not available on the secondary remote 8 No Additio
347. use of cer tain functions during only some parts of a disc For example many discs prohibit the use of fast play buttons or prohibit access to the Chapter Menu display during the playback of copyright notices studio logos movie credits or trailers The appearance of the Feature Not Available message or the inability of certain features to operate when the disc itself has prohibited them does not indi cate a problem with the CVR700 as these features are outside of the unit s control e Some DTS discs contain incorrect digi tal flags that may initially cause the CVR700 to display incorrect information on the available surround modes or other features This is the fault of the disc author and not the CVR700 which will correctly process the disc s bit stream once it has been detected and identified NOTES ON DVD AUDIO DISCS e Some DVD Audio discs contain two menus one used when the disc is played on a DVD Audio player and a DVD Video menu used on older players that do not recognize the DVD Audio format You may view the DVD Video menu by turning off the CVR700 s DVD Audio capability temporarily using the DVD Setup menu see Figure 31 You may wish to do this in order to access certain audio surround tracks such as Dolby Digital 5 1 or PCM on the disc When you have finished exploring the DVD Video capabilities of the disc remember to restore the CVR700 s DVD Audio capability e Some DVD Audio discs do not per
348. utton again or the Play Button to resume normal play A Frame Stop PVR Live Button In Screen mode this button performs the Frame function which enables you to set the desired aspect ratio for viewing program materials independent of the aspect ratio encoded on the disc The following settings are available through the Frame function 16 9 This setting is used to display 16 9 program material in the full screen 16 9 mode on the CVPD50 4 3 TO 16 9 NL This mode adjusts a 4 3 aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 screen while creating a more natural looking picture This is accomplished by stretching the two sides of the picture more than the center of the picture where most of the content is 4 3 LTRBOX TO 16 9 This mode is used to adjust an image which is designed to display a 16 9 movie on a 4 3 screen In order to preserve the full width of the 35 36 movie on a narrower screen the image is reduced in size and black bars appear above and below it This setting zooms in on the image enabling it to fill the CVPD50 s 16 9 screen without losing any portion of the image The image is simply enlarged so that its two sides fit the edges of the CVPD50 16 9 screen and the black bars on top and bottom are cropped off 2 35 LB TO 16 9 NL This mode is used 0 adjust an image from a widescreen ilm which is actually at a wider ratio than the CVPD50 s 16 9 ratio In order to it on the smaller s
349. vers messages and status information to help you operate the CVR700 See page 19 for a complete explanation of the display PP Remote Sensor Window The sen sor behind this window receives infrared signals from the remote control that are ntended to control the non video func tions of the CVR700 only Aim the remote at this area and do not block or cover t unless an external remote sensor is nstalled Note that unless the CVR700 is not being used with the CVPD5O it is best to aim the remote at the LED light on the front of the CVPD50 plasma dis play as the IR receiver located there can accept remote control signals intended for both the plasma display and the CVR700 CVR700 FRONT PANEL INFORMATION DISPLAY uu DVDAMP3 16 9 4 3 DG 8 DO Hen POM 192090 DD RANDOM PROGRAM g D REPEAT DISC ALL DO amp AB d bl EN Disc Type Indicators E PCM Bitstream Indicators Programmed Play Indicators B Disc Indicators N Disc Type Indicators The DVD DVD Audio CD VCD or MP3 indicator will light to show the type of disc cur rently being played WMA and JPEG discs will be identified in the Upper and Lower Display Lines 3G E PCM Bitstream Indicators The PCM indicator will light when a PCM pulse code modulation bitstream is detected PCM bitstreams are used on audio CDs and may also be found on other disc types either as the main audio format or as the format used on certain portions of the disc such as
350. vigation Control A choose the OPTICAL COAXIAL or ANALOG input you wish to assign to that source as it appears in the Upper Display Line When the digital source is playing the CVR700 will auto matically detect which type of digital data stream is being decoded and display that information in the Upper Display Line E However the CVR700 will not automatically detect which digital or ana log audio connection you have made Digital Bitstream and Surround Mode Indicators When a digital source is playing the CVR700 senses the type of bitstream data that is present Using this informa tion the correct surround mode will auto matically be selected For example DTS bitstreams will cause the unit to switch to DTS decoding and Dolby Digital bitstreams will enable Dolby Digital decoding When the unit senses PCM data from CDs or LDs you may select any of the standard surround modes such as Dolby Pro Logic Il or Logic 7 Since the range of available surround modes is dependent on the type of digital data that is present the CVR700 shows you what type of signal is present This will help you to understand the choice of modes When a digital source is first detected the CVR700 will indicate the type of bit stream being received by switching to the appropriate surround mode depending on the bitstream and how you have config ured your system The Speaker Channel Input Indicators will light to indi cat
351. will light in the front panel If the disc has playback control a PB C ON banner will appear on screen briefly NOTE Some VCDs are created without playback control so that only a VCD file exists on the disc The CVR700 may iden tify this disc with a CDROM Disc Type Indicator FY similar to a compressed audio disc In that case the disc is navi gated the same way as an MP3 or WMA disc A screen similar to the one in Figure 52 will appear and you will need to select the VCD file and play it manually Figure 52 Keep in mind that the exact level of func tionality for any VCD will vary widely and it is ultimately determined by the way the disc was created not by the CVR700 par ticularly if the disc has been created under VCD Version 2 0 with Playback Control see Playback Control When playing VCD discs most standard DVD CD playback controls are used including Play Stop Pause Track Skip Forward and Reverse and Fast Forward or Reverse Search The functions Slow Play and Step and the Zoom function are not available with VCDs You may select the track number and change it to skip to another track Using the Status Bar for VCD l Plavback e When PBC is on the Disc Menu Button Ay will have the same function as with DVDs making the plaver return to the latest disc menu When PBC is off pressing the Disc Menu Button G A will turn the PBC on and the disc will be plaved from the beginning e Direct
352. y Never remove the plug from the outlet by pulling on the cable Do not run the power cord near heat producing objects If you will be away for an extended period of time it is a good idea to unplug the units and any antennae It is also a good idea to do the same before any thunder storms This is a precautionary measure to prevent the possibility of personal injury or death due to fire or electric shock resulting from a lightning strike and to prevent damage to the unit Always power off all units and unplug them before connecting them to each other Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury due to elec trical shock or fire and or irrepara ble damage to the unit that is not covered under warranty The CVPD50 plasma display is equipped with an attached glass filter plate If the unit is exposed to excessive stress e g due to shock vibration bending or heat the glass surface can break Do not sub ject the glass surface to any pressure or knocks If the glass is cracked unplug the power cord immediately Do not touch the fragments with your bare hands Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury due to sharp edged glass fragments Always make sure that two people lift the CVPD50 plasma display together Never attempt to lift the unit by yourself Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury or irrepara ble damage to the unit that is not covered u
353. y result in discs becoming dis lodged and jamming the mechanism which will require that the unit be returned to an authorized service facility for repair Important Information for the User The CVR700 and CVPD50 have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Regulations 47 Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 These devices may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 these devices must accept interference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation These limits are designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communication However there is no guarantee that harmful inter ference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures m Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna m Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver m Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected m Consu

JBL CVPD50 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents